2014 FIESTA Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

EE8J 19A321 AC | October 2013 | Third Printing | Owner’s Manual | Fiesta | Litho in U.S.A.

20

14 FIESTA

Ow

ne

r’s M

an

ua

l

2014 FIESTA Owner’s Manual

fordowner.com ford.ca

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2013

All rights reserved.Part Number: 20130920230619

IntroductionAbout This Manual...........................................7Symbols Glossary.............................................7Replacement Parts

Recommendation........................................9Mobile Communications

Equipment.....................................................10Data Recording................................................10California Proposition 65.............................12Perchlorate.........................................................12Ford Credit.........................................................12Special Notices................................................12Export Unique Options..................................12

Child SafetyGeneral Information.......................................14Installing Child Seats.....................................15Child Seat Positioning...................................21Booster Seats..................................................23Child Safety Locks..........................................25

Safety BeltsPrinciple of Operation..................................26Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime.............................................................30Safety Belt Minder.........................................30Child Restraint and Safety Belt

Maintenance................................................32

Personal Safety System™Personal Safety System™..........................33

Supplementary RestraintsSystem

Principle of Operation..................................34Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35Front Passenger Sensing System............36Side Airbags.....................................................38

Knee Airbag......................................................39Side Curtain Airbags.....................................39Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41Airbag Disposal...............................................42

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies..................................................43Remote Control..............................................43Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control............................................................47

MyKey™Principle of Operation..................................48Creating a MyKey...........................................48Clearing All MyKeys.......................................49Checking MyKey System Status..............49Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems.........................................................50MyKey Troubleshooting...............................50

LocksLocking and Unlocking.................................52Manual Liftgate...............................................55Keyless Entry...................................................56Interior Luggage Compartment

Release..........................................................58

SecurityPassive Anti-Theft System........................60Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................61

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel...................63Audio Control...................................................63Voice Control...................................................64Cruise Control.................................................64

Wipers and WashersWindshield Wipers........................................65

1

Fiesta (CCT) Vehicles Built From: 11-10-2013, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013

Table of Contents

Windshield Washers.....................................65Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........66

LightingGeneral Information......................................67Lighting Control..............................................67Autolamps........................................................68Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................68Headlamp Exit Delay....................................69Daytime Running Lamps............................69Front Fog Lamps............................................69Direction Indicators.......................................69Interior Lamps.................................................70Ambient Lighting.............................................71

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows..............................................72Global Opening and Closing......................73Exterior Mirrors................................................74Interior Mirror....................................................75Moonroof...........................................................76

Instrument ClusterGauges................................................................77Warning Lamps and Indicators.................78Warning Lamps and Indicators - 1.6L

EcoBoost™...................................................81Audible Warnings and Indicators.............84

Information DisplaysGeneral Information.....................................85Clock...................................................................88Trip Computer.................................................88Personalized Settings..................................89Information Messages.................................89

Climate ControlPrinciple of Operation...................................97Air Vents.............................................................97

Manual Climate Control..............................98Automatic Climate Control........................99Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate........................................................100Heated Windows and Mirrors..................103Cabin Air Filter...............................................103

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position..................105Head Restraints............................................105Manual Seats.................................................107Rear Seats......................................................108Heated Seats.................................................109

Auxiliary Power PointsAuxiliary Power Points..................................111Cigar Lighter......................................................111

Storage CompartmentsCup Holders.....................................................112

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information.....................................113Ignition Switch................................................113Keyless Starting..............................................113Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................115Switching Off the Engine............................116Engine Block Heater.....................................116

Fuel and RefuelingSafety Precautions.......................................118Fuel Quality......................................................119Running Out of Fuel.....................................119Refueling..........................................................120Fuel Consumption........................................122Emission Control System...........................123

TransmissionManual Transmission..................................126

2


Table of Contents

Manual Transmission - 1.6LEcoBoost™.................................................127

Automatic Transmission............................128Hill Start Assist..............................................132

BrakesGeneral Information....................................134Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes...........................................................134Parking Brake.................................................134

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................136Using Stability Control................................137Using Stability Control - 1.6L

EcoBoost™.................................................137

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation.................................138Parking Aid......................................................138Rear View Camera.......................................139

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................142Using Cruise Control....................................142

Driving AidsSteering............................................................144

Load CarryingGeneral Information....................................145Load Limit.......................................................145Rear Under Floor Storage..........................152Cargo Nets.......................................................153Luggage Covers.............................................153

TowingTowing a Trailer - 1.6L EcoBoost™........154Transporting the Vehicle............................154Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......154

Driving HintsBreaking-In......................................................157Cold Weather Precautions........................157Driving Through Water................................157Economical Driving......................................157Floor Mats.......................................................158

Customer AssistanceGetting the Services You Need...............160In California (U.S. Only)..............................161The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only)......................162Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only)........................162Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada.........................................................163Ordering Additional Owner's

Literature.....................................................164Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.

Only).............................................................164Reporting Safety Defects (Canada

Only).............................................................165

Roadside EmergenciesRoadside Assistance..................................166Hazard Warning Flashers...........................167Fuel Shutoff....................................................167Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................167

FusesFuse Specification Chart...........................169Changing a Fuse............................................175

MaintenanceGeneral Information.....................................177Opening and Closing the Hood................177Under Hood Overview - 1.0L

EcoBoost™.................................................179Under Hood Overview - 1.6L Duratec-16V

Ti-VCT (88kW/120PS) - Sigma........180

3


Table of Contents

Under Hood Overview - 1.6LEcoBoost™..................................................181

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.0LEcoBoost™.................................................182

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (88kW/120PS) - Sigma.........182

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6LEcoBoost™.................................................182

Engine Oil Check...........................................182Engine Coolant Check................................183Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check............................................................185Brake Fluid Check.........................................185Power Steering Fluid Check.....................185Fuel Filter.........................................................186Washer Fluid Check.....................................186Changing the 12V Battery..........................186Checking the Wiper Blades......................186Changing the Wiper Blades.....................186Changing the Engine Air Filter..................187Adjusting the Headlamps.........................188Removing a Headlamp..............................189Changing a Bulb...........................................190Changing a Bulb...........................................194Bulb Specification Chart...........................199Technical Specifications - 1.0L

EcoBoost™...............................................200Technical Specifications - 1.6L

EcoBoost™.................................................201Technical Specifications - 1.6L

Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma).............202

Vehicle CareCleaning Products.......................................204Cleaning the Exterior..................................204Waxing.............................................................205Cleaning the Engine...................................205Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades.........................................................206Cleaning the Interior...................................206Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............206

Cleaning the Instrument Panel andInstrument Cluster Lens.......................207

Cleaning Leather Seats.............................207Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................208Vehicle Storage............................................208

Wheels and TiresGeneral Information.....................................211Tire Care............................................................211Using Winter Tires.......................................226Using Snow Chains.....................................226Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........226Changing a Road Wheel...........................230Technical Specifications...........................234

Capacities and Specific-ations

Engine Specifications.................................235Motorcraft Parts...........................................236Vehicle Identification Number................237Vehicle Certification Label........................237Transmission Code Designation............238

AccessoriesAccessories....................................................239

Ford Extended Service Plan(ESP)

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)........241

Audio SystemGeneral Information...................................244Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/

CD..................................................................245Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/

SYNC............................................................249Audio unit - Vehicles With: Touchscreen

Display.........................................................254Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony Audio

System/Touchscreen Display.............255Auxiliary Input Jack......................................257

4


Table of Contents

Audio Troubleshooting..............................258

SYNC™General Information...................................259Using Voice Recognition............................261Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............263SYNC™ Applications and Services.......274Using SYNC™ With Your Media

Player............................................................281SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................289

MyFord Touch™General Information...................................295Settings...........................................................303Entertainment................................................313Phone................................................................331Information.....................................................337Navigation......................................................346

AppendicesEnd User License Agreement.................356

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance............................371

5


Table of Contents

6


ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know about it,the greater the safety and pleasure youwill get from driving it.

WARNINGDriving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any handheld devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range of available models, sometimeseven before they are generally available. Itmay describe options not fitted to yourvehicle.Note: Some of the illustrations in thismanual may be used for different models,so may appear different to you on yourvehicle. However, the essential informationin the illustrations is always correct.Note: Always use and operate your vehiclein line with all applicable laws andregulations.Note: Pass on this manual when sellingyour vehicle. It is an integral part of thevehicle.This manual may qualify the location of acomponent as left-hand side or right-handside. The side is determined when facingforward in the seat.

E154903

Right-hand sideALeft-hand sideB

Protecting the EnvironmentYou must play your part in protecting theenvironment. Correct vehicle usage andthe authorized disposal of waste, cleaningand lubrication materials are significantsteps toward this aim.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYThese are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

E162384

Air conditioning system

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

7


Introduction

Battery

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleumbased

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

E71340

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

Fasten safety belt

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

E91392

Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartmentrelease

Jack

E161353

Keep out of reach of children

Lighting control

8


Introduction

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Note operating instructions

Panic alarm

E139213

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

Service engine soon

Side airbag

E167012

Shield the eyes

Stability control

Windshield wash and wipe

REPLACEMENT PARTSRECOMMENDATIONYour vehicle has been built to the higheststandards using quality parts. Werecommend that you demand the use ofgenuine Ford and Motorcraft partswhenever your vehicle requires scheduledmaintenance or repair. You can clearlyidentify genuine Ford and Motorcraft partsby looking for the Ford, FoMoCo orMotorcraft branding on the parts or theirpackaging.

Scheduled Maintenance andMechanical RepairsOne of the best ways for you to make surethat your vehicle provides years of serviceis to have it maintained in line with ourrecommendations using parts thatconform to the specifications detailed inthis Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford andMotorcraft parts meet or exceed thesespecifications.

Collision RepairsWe hope that you never experience acollision, but accidents do happen. GenuineFord replacement collision parts meet ourstringent requirements for fit, finish,structural integrity, corrosion protectionand dent resistance. During vehicledevelopment we validate these partsdeliver the intended level of protection asa whole system. A great way to know forsure you are getting this level of protectionis to use genuine Ford replacementcollision parts.

9


Introduction

Warranty on Replacement PartsGenuine Ford and Motorcraft replacementparts are the only replacement parts thatbenefit from a Ford Warranty. Damagecaused to your vehicle as a result of thefailure of non-Ford parts may not becovered by the Ford Warranty. Foradditional information, refer to the termsand conditions of the Ford Warranty.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONSEQUIPMENTUsing mobile communications equipmentis becoming increasingly important in theconduct of business and personal affairs.However, you must not compromise yourown or others’ safety when using suchequipment. Mobile communications canenhance personal safety and security whenappropriately used, particularly inemergency situations. Safety must beparamount when using mobilecommunications equipment to avoidnegating these benefits. Mobilecommunication equipment includes, butis not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,portable email devices, text messagingdevices and portable two-way radios.


you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any hand-held devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

DATA RECORDINGService Data RecordingService data recorders in your vehicle arecapable of collecting and storingdiagnostic information about your vehicle.This potentially includes information aboutthe performance or status of varioussystems and modules in the vehicle, suchas engine, throttle, steering or brakesystems. In order to properly diagnose andservice your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,Ford of Canada, and service and repairfacilities may access or share among themvehicle diagnostic information receivedthrough a direct connection to your vehiclewhen diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.Additionally, when your vehicle is in forservice or repair, Ford Motor Company,Ford of Canada, and service and repairfacilities may access or share among themdata for vehicle improvement purposes.For U.S. only (if equipped), if you chooseto use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,you consent that certain diagnosticinformation may also be accessedelectronically by Ford Motor Company andFord authorized service facilities, and thatthe diagnostic information may be usedfor any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 259).

Event Data RecordingThis vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder. The main purpose of anevent data recorder is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle;this data will assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed.The event data recorder is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short periodof time, typically 30 seconds or less.

10


Introduction

The event data recorder in this vehicleis designed to record such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orthe brake pedal; and

• How fast the vehicle was traveling;and

• Where the driver was positioningthe steering wheel.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.Note: Event data recorder data isrecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the event data recorderunder normal driving conditions and nopersonal data or information (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) isrecorded (see limitations regarding 911Assist and Traffic, directions andInformation privacy below). However,parties, such as law enforcement, couldcombine the event data recorder datawith the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.To read data recorded by an event datarecorder, special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or the eventdata recorder is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement, thathave such special equipment, can readthe information if they have access tothe vehicle or the event data recorder.Ford Motor Company and Ford ofCanada do not access event datarecorder information without obtainingconsent, unless pursuant to court order

or where required by law enforcement,other government authorities or otherthird parties acting with lawfulauthority. Other parties may seek toaccess the information independentlyof Ford Motor Company and Ford ofCanada.Note: Including to the extent that anylaw pertaining to Event Data Recordersapplies to SYNC or its features, pleasenote the following: Once 911 Assist (ifequipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assistmay, through any paired and connectedcell phone, disclose to emergencyservices that the vehicle has been in acrash involving the deployment of anairbag or, in certain vehicles, theactivation of the fuel pump shut-off.Certain versions or updates to 911 Assistmay also be capable of being used toelectronically or verbally provide to 911operators the vehicle location (such aslatitude and longitude), and/or otherdetails about the vehicle or crash orpersonal information about theoccupants to assist 911 operators toprovide the most appropriate emergencyservices. If you do not want to disclosethis information, do not activate the 911Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 259).Additionally, when you connect toTraffic, Directions and Information (ifequipped, U.S. only), the service usesGPS technology and advanced vehiclesensors to collect the vehicle’s currentlocation, travel direction, and speed(“vehicle travel information”), only tohelp provide you with the directions,traffic reports, or business searchesthat you request. If you do not wantFord or its vendors to receive thisinformation, do not activate theservice. Ford Motor Company and the

11


Introduction

vendors it uses to provide you with thisinformation do not store your vehicletravel information. For moreinformation, see Traffic, Directions andInformation, Terms and Conditions.See SYNC™ (page 259).

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNINGSome constituents of engineexhaust, certain vehicle components,certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

PERCHLORATECertain components in your vehicle suchas airbag modules, safety beltpretensioners and remote control batteriesmay contain perchlorate material. Specialhandling may apply for service or vehicleend of life disposal. For more informationvisit:

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

FORD CREDIT(U.S. Only)Ford Credit offers a full range of financingand lease plans to help you acquire yourvehicle. If you have financed or leased yourvehicle through Ford Credit, thank you foryour business.For your convenience we offer a numberof ways to contact us, as well as helpmanage your account.

Phone: 1-800-727-7000For more information regarding Ford Credit,as well as access Account Manager, pleasego to www.fordcredit.com.

SPECIAL NOTICESNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyFor a detailed description of what iscovered and what is not covered by yourvehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,refer to the Warranty Manual that isprovided to you along with your Owner’sManual.

Special InstructionsFor your added safety, your vehicle is fittedwith sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNINGSFailure to follow the specificwarnings and instructions couldresult in personal injury.Front seat mounted rear-facing childor infant seats should NEVER beplaced in front of an active

passenger airbag.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONSFor your particular global region, yourvehicle may be equipped with features andoptions that are different from the featuresand options that are described in thisOwner’s Manual. A market uniquesupplement may be supplied thatcomplements this book. By referring to themarket unique supplement, if provided,you can properly identify those features,recommendations and specifications thatare unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s

12


Introduction

Manual is written primarily for the U.S. andCanadian Markets. Features or equipmentlisted as standard may be different on unitsbuilt for Export. Refer to this Owner’sManual for all other requiredinformation and warnings.

13


Introduction

GENERAL INFORMATIONSee the following sections for directionson how to properly use safety restraintsfor children.

WARNINGSAlways make sure your child issecured properly in a device that isappropriate for their height, age and

weight. Child safety restraints must bebought separately from your vehicle.Failure to follow these instructions andguidelines may result in an increased riskof serious injury or death to your child.

All children are shaped differently.The recommendations for safetyrestraints are based on probable

child height, age and weight thresholdsfrom National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and other safetyorganizations, or are the minimum

WARNINGSrequirements of law. Ford recommendschecking with a NHTSA Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technician (CPST) andconsult your pediatrician to make sure yourchild seat is appropriate for your child, andis compatible with and properly installedin your vehicle. To locate a child seat fittingstation and CPST, contact the NHTSA tollfree at 1-888-327-4236 or go tohttp://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,check with your local St. John Ambulanceoffice for referral to a CPST or for furtherinformation, contact your provincialministry of transportation, locate your localSt. John Ambulance office by searching forSt. John Ambulance on the internet, orTransport Canada at 1-800-333-0371(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properlyrestrain children in safety seats madeespecially for their height, age, and weightmay result in an increased risk of seriousinjury or death to your child.

14


Child Safety

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended restrainttype

Child size, height, weight, or ageChild

Use a child safety seat(sometimes called an

infant carrier, convertibleseat, or toddler seat).

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less(generally age four or younger).

Infants ortoddlers

Use a belt-positioningbooster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child safety seat (gener-ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four

and less than age 12, and between 40 lb(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your

child restraint manufacturer).

Small children

Use a vehicle safety belthaving the lap belt snugand low across the hips,shoulder belt centered

across the shoulder andchest, and seat back

upright.

Children who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a belt-positioning boosterseat (generally children who are at least4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80

lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-mended by child restraint manufacturer).

Larger children

• You are required by law to properly usesafety seats for infants and toddlers inthe United States and Canada.

• Many states and provinces require thatsmall children use approved boosterseats until they reach age eight, aheight of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).Check your local and state or provinciallaws for specific requirements aboutthe safety of children in your vehicle.

• When possible, always properlyrestrain children 12 years of age andunder in a rear seating position of yourvehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating positionsthan in a front seating position. SeeFront Passenger Sensing System(page 36).

INSTALLING CHILD SEATSChild Seats

E68920

15


Child Safety

Use a child safety seat (sometimes calledan infant carrier, convertible seat, ortoddler seat) for infants, toddlers, orchildren weighing 40 pounds (18kilograms) or less (generally age four oryounger).

Using Lap and Shoulder BeltsWARNINGS

Airbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. NEVER place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seatin the front seat, move the seat all the wayback.

Children 12 and under should beproperly restrained in the rear seatwhenever possible.Depending on where you secure achild restraint, and depending on thechild restraint design, you may block

access to certain safety belt buckleassemblies and LATCH lower anchors,rendering those features potentiallyunusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupantsshould only use seating positions wherethey are able to be properly restrained.

When installing a child safety seat withcombination lap and shoulder belts:• Use the correct safety belt buckle for

that seating position.• Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle until you hear a snap and feel itlatch. Make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.

• Keep the buckle release buttonpointing up and away from the safetyseat, with the tongue between the childseat and the release button, to preventaccidental unbuckling.

• Place your vehicle seat back in theupright position.

• Put the safety belt in the automaticlocking mode. See Step 5. This vehicledoes not require the use of a lockingclip.

Perform the following steps wheninstalling the child seat with combinationlap and shoulder belts:Note: Although the child seat illustrated isa forward facing child seat, the steps arethe same for installing a rear facing childseat.

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in a seatwith a combination lap and shoulderbelt.

E142529

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt andthen grasp the shoulder belt and lapbelt together.

16


Child Safety

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tonguethrough the child seat according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)for that seating position until you heara snap and feel the latch engage. Makesure the tongue is latched securely bypulling on it.

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automaticlocking mode, grasp the shoulderportion of the belt and pull downwarduntil all of the belt is pulled out.

Note: The automatic locking mode isavailable on the front passenger and rearseats. This vehicle does not require the useof a locking clip.6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt will click as it retractsto indicate it is in the automatic lockingmode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractorto make sure the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode (you shouldnot be able to pull more belt out). If theretractor is not locked, unbuckle thebelt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142533

17


Child Safety

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.Force the seat down with extra weight,e.g., by pressing down or kneeling onthe child restraint while pulling up onthe shoulder belt in order to force slackfrom the belt. This is necessary toremove the remaining slack that willexist once the extra weight of the childis added to the child restraint. It alsohelps to achieve the proper snugnessof the child seat to your vehicle.Sometimes, a slight lean toward thebuckle will additionally help to removeremaining slack from the belt.

9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seatis equipped). See Using TetherStraps later in this section.

E142534

10. Before placing the child in the seat,forcibly move the seat forward andback to make sure the seat is securelyheld in place. To check this, grab theseat at the belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and forward andback. There should be no more than1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movementfor proper installation.

Ford recommends checking with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician (CPST) to make certain thechild restraint is properly installed. InCanada, check with your local St. JohnAmbulance office for referral to a CertifiedPassenger Seat Technician.

Using Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH)

WARNINGSNever attach two child safety seatsto the same anchor. In a crash, oneanchor may not be strong enough to

hold two child safety seat attachmentsand may break, causing serious injury ordeath.

Depending on where you secure achild restraint, and depending on thechild restraint design, you may block

access to certain safety belt buckleassemblies or LATCH lower anchors,rendering those features potentiallyunusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupantsshould only use seating positions wherethey are able to be properly restrained.

The LATCH system is composed of threevehicle anchor points: two lower anchorslocated where your vehicle seat back andseat cushion meet (called the seat bight)and one top tether anchor located behindthat seating position.LATCH compatible child safety seats havetwo rigid or webbing mountedattachments that connect to the two loweranchors at the LATCH equipped seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofattachment method eliminates the needto use safety belts to attach the child seat,however the safety belt can still be usedto attach the child seat. For forward-facingchild seats, the top tether strap must alsobe attached to the proper top tetheranchor, if a top tether strap has beenprovided with your child seat.

18


Child Safety

E142535

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors forchild seat installation at the seatingpositions marked with the child seatsymbol.

E144054

The LATCH anchors are located at the rearsection of the rear seat between thecushion and seat back below the symbolsas shown. Follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions to properlyinstall a child seat with LATCHattachments. Follow the instructions onattaching child safety seats with tetherstraps.Attach LATCH lower attachments of thechild seat only to the anchors shown.

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from theOutboard Seating Positions (CenterSeating Use)

WARNINGThe standardized spacing for LATCHlower anchors is 11 inches (28centimeters) center to center. Do not

use LATCH lower anchors for the centerseating position unless the child seatmanufacturer's instructions permit andspecify using anchors spaced at least asfar apart as those in this vehicle.

The lower anchors at the center of thesecond row rear seat are spaced 15 inches(39 centimeters) apart. A child seat withrigid LATCH attachments cannot beinstalled at the center seating position.LATCH compatible child seats (withattachments on belt webbing) can only beused at this seating position provided thatthe child seat manufacturer's instructionspermit use with the anchor spacing stated.Do not attach a child seat to any loweranchor if an adjacent child seat is attachedto that anchor.Each time you use the safety seat, checkthat the seat is properly attached to thelower anchors and tether anchor, ifapplicable. Tug the child seat from side toside and forward and back where it issecured to your vehicle. The seat shouldmove less than one inch when you do thisfor a proper installation.If the safety seat is not anchored properly,the risk of a child being injured in a crashgreatly increases.

19


Child Safety

Combining Safety Belt and LATCHLower Anchors for Attaching ChildSafety SeatsWhen used in combination, either thesafety belt or the LATCH lower anchorsmay be attached first, provided a properinstallation is achieved. Attach the tetherstrap afterward, if included with the childseat.

Using Tether StrapsMany forward-facing child safetyseats include a tether strapwhich extends from the back of

the child safety seat and hooks to ananchoring point called the top tetheranchor. Tether straps are available as anaccessory for many older safety seats.

Contact the manufacturer of your childseat for information about ordering atether strap, or to obtain a longer tetherstrap if the tether strap on your safety seatdoes not reach the appropriate top tetheranchor in your vehicle.Once the child safety seat has beeninstalled using either the safety belt, thelower anchors of the LATCH system, orboth, you can attach the top tether strap.The tether strap anchors in your vehicleare in the following positions (shown fromtop view):

E142537

Perform the following steps to install achild safety seat with tether anchors:Note: If you install a child seat with rigidLATCH attachments, do not tighten thetether strap enough to lift the child seat offyour vehicle seat cushion when the child isseated in it. Keep the tether strap just snugwithout lifting the front of the child seat.Keeping the child seat just touching yourvehicle seat gives the best protection in asevere crash.

Four DoorThe tether anchors in your vehicle arelocated under a cover marked with thetether anchor symbol.1. Route the child safety seat tether strap

over the back of the seat. For outboardseating positions, route the tether strapunder the head restraint and betweenthe head restraint posts. For the centerseating positions, route the tether strapover the top of the head restraint. Ifneeded, the head restraints can alsobe removed.

E144274

2. Locate the correct anchor for theselected seating position, then openthe tether anchor cover.

E144275

20


Child Safety

3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor asshown.

4. Tighten the child safety seat tetherstrap according to the manufacturer'sinstructions. If your child restraintsystem is equipped with a tether strap,and the child restraint manufacturerrecommends its use, Ford alsorecommends its use.

Five DoorThe tether anchors in your vehicle arelocated on the back panel of the rear seat.These are marked with the tether anchorsymbol.1. Route the child safety seat tether strap

over the back of the seat. For outboardseating positions, route the tether strapunder the head restraint and betweenthe head restraint posts. For the centerseating positions, route the tether strapover the top of the head restraint. Ifneeded, the head restraints can alsobe removed.

E164077

2. Locate the correct anchor on the backpanel of the rear seat for the selectedseating position.

E142539

3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor asshown.

4. Tighten the child safety seat tetherstrap according to the manufacturer'sinstructions. If your child restraintsystem is equipped with a tether strap,and the child restraint manufacturerrecommends its use, Ford alsorecommends its use.

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGSAirbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. Never place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seatin the front seat, move the vehicle seatupon which the child seat is installed allthe way back. When possible, all childrenage 12 and under should be properlyrestrained in a rear seating position. If allchildren cannot be seated and restrainedproperly in a rear seating position, properlyrestrain the largest child in the front seat.

Always carefully follow theinstructions and warnings providedby the manufacturer of any child

restraint to determine if the restraint deviceis appropriate for your child's size, height,weight, or age. Follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions and warningsprovided for installation and use in

21


Child Safety

WARNINGSconjunction with the instructions andwarnings provided by your vehiclemanufacturer. A safety seat that isimproperly installed or utilized, isinappropriate for your child's height, age,or weight or does not properly fit the childmay increase the risk of serious injury ordeath.

Never let a passenger hold a child onhis or her lap while your vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a crash,which may result in serious injury or death.

Never use pillows, books, or towelsto boost a child. They can slidearound and increase the likelihood

of injury or death in a crash.

WARNINGSAlways restrain an unoccupied childseat or booster seat. These objectsmay become projectiles in a crash or

sudden stop, which may increase the riskof serious injury.

Never place, or allow a child to place,the shoulder belt under a child's armor behind the back because it

reduces the protection for the upper partof the body and may increase the risk ofinjury or death in a crash.

To avoid risk of injury, do not leavechildren or pets unattended in yourvehicle.

Use any attachment method as indicated below by XCombinedchild and

seatweight

RestraintType

Safety beltonly

Safety beltand LATCH

(loweranchorsand toptether

anchor)

Safety beltand toptether

anchor

LATCH(lower

anchorsonly)

LATCH(lower

anchorsand toptether

anchor)

XXUp to 65 lb(29 kg)

Rear facingchild seat

XOver 65 lb(29 kg)

Rear facingchild seat

XXXUp to 65 lb(29 kg)

Forwardfacing

child seat

XXOver 65 lb(29 kg)

Forwardfacing

child seat

Note: The child seat must rest tightlyagainst the vehicle seat upon which it isinstalled. It may be necessary to lift orremove the head restraint. See Seats (page105).

22


Child Safety

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNINGNever place, or allow a child to place,the shoulder belt under a child's armor behind the back because it

reduces the protection for the upper partof the body and may increase the risk ofinjury or death in a crash.

Use a belt-positioning booster seat forchildren who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child safety seat (generallychildren who are less than 4 feet 9 inches(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four(4) and less than age twelve (12), andbetween 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to100 pounds (45 kilograms) ifrecommended by your child restraintmanufacturer). Many state and provinciallaws require that children use approvedbooster seats until they reach age eight, aheight of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).Booster seats should be used until you cananswer YES to ALL of these questionswhen seated without a booster seat:

E142595

• Can the child sit all the way backagainst their vehicle seat back withknees bent comfortably at the edge ofthe seat cushion?

• Can the child sit without slouching?

• Does the lap belt rest low across thehips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on theshoulder and chest?

• Can the child stay seated like this forthe whole trip?

Always use booster seats in conjunctionwith your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats

E68924

• Backless booster seatsIf your backless booster seat has aremovable shield, remove the shield. If avehicle seating position has a low seatback or no head restraint, a backlessbooster seat may place your child's head(as measured at the tops of the ears)above the top of the seat. In this case,move the backless booster to anotherseating position with a higher seat back orhead restraint and lap and shoulder belts,or consider using a high back booster seat.

23


Child Safety

E70710

• High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannotfind a seating position that adequatelysupports your child's head, a high backbooster seat would be a better choice.Children and booster seats vary in size andshape. Choose a booster that keeps thelap belt low and snug across the hips,never up across the stomach, and lets youadjust the shoulder belt to cross the chestand rest snugly near the center of theshoulder. The following drawings comparethe ideal fit (center) to a shoulder beltuncomfortably close to the neck and ashoulder belt that could slip off theshoulder. The drawings also show how thelap belt should be low and snug across thechild's hips.

E142596

E142597

24


Child Safety

If the booster seat slides on the vehicleseat upon which it is being used, placing arubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpetliner under the booster seat may improvethis condition. Do not introduce any itemthicker than this under the booster seat.Check with the booster seatmanufacturer's instructions.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNINGYou cannot open the rear doors frominside if you have put the child safetylocks on.

E156821

Left-Hand SideTurn counterclockwise to lock andclockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand SideTurn clockwise to lock andcounterclockwise to unlock.

25


Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSAlways drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snugand low across the hips.To reduce the risk of injury, makesure children sit where they can beproperly restrained.Never let a passenger hold a child onhis or her lap while your vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a crash.All occupants of your vehicle,including the driver, should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraintsystem is provided. Failure to properly wearyour safety belt could seriously increasethe risk of injury or death.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of avehicle. In a crash, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safety belts. Besure everyone in your vehicle is in a seatand using a safety belt properly.

In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a safety

belt.Each seating position in your vehiclehas a specific safety belt assemblywhich is made up of one buckle and

one tongue that are designed to be usedas a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on theoutside shoulder only. Never wear theshoulder belt under the arm. 2) Neverswing the safety belt around your neck overthe inside shoulder. 3) Never use a singlebelt for more than one person.

WARNINGSWhen possible, all children 12 yearsold and under should be properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

Failure to follow this could seriouslyincrease the risk of injury or death.

Safety belts and seats can becomehot in a vehicle that has been closedup in sunny weather; they could burn

a small child. Check seat covers andbuckles before you place a child anywherenear them.

Front and rear seat occupants,including pregnant women, shouldwear safety belts for optimum

protection in an accident.

All seating positions in your vehicle havelap and shoulder safety belts. Alloccupants of the vehicle should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even whenan airbag supplemental restraint systemis provided.The safety belt system consists of:• lap and shoulder safety belts.• shoulder safety belt with automatic

locking mode, (except driver safetybelt).

• height adjuster at the front outboardseating positions.

• safety belt pretensioner at the frontoutboard seating positions.

• belt tension sensor at the frontoutboard passenger seating position.

• Safety belt warning light and chime.

26


Safety Belts

• Crash sensors and monitoring systemwith readiness indicator.

The safety belt pretensioners at the frontseating positions are designed to tightenthe safety belts when activated. In frontaland near-frontal crashes, the safety beltpretensioners may be activated alone or,if the crash is of sufficient severity, togetherwith the front airbags. The pretensionersmay also activate when a side curtainairbag is deployed.

FASTENING THE SAFETYBELTSThe front outboard and rear safetyrestraints in the vehicle are combinationlap and shoulder belts.

E142587

1. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)until you hear a snap and feel it latch.Make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release buttonand remove the tongue from thebuckle.

E142589

When in use, the rear safety belts shouldbe placed in the belt guides on theoutboard seat backs.

Restraint of Pregnant WomenWARNING

Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety beltproperly fastened. The lap portion of

the safety belt should fit snug and bepositioned low across the hips. Theshoulder portion of the safety belt shouldbe positioned across the chest. Pregnantwomen should also follow this practice.See the following figure.

27


Safety Belts

E142590

Pregnant women should always wear theirsafety belt. The lap belt portion of acombination lap and shoulder belt shouldbe positioned low across the hips belowthe belly and worn as tight as comfort willallow. The shoulder belt should bepositioned to cross the middle of theshoulder and the center of the chest.

Safety Belt Locking ModesWARNINGS

After any vehicle crash, the safetybelt system at all passenger seatingpositions must be checked by an

authorized dealer to verify that theautomatic locking retractor feature forchild seats is still functioning properly. Inaddition, all safety belts should be checkedfor proper function.

Belt and retractor assembly must bereplaced if the safety belt assemblyautomatic locking retractor feature

or any other safety belt function is notoperating properly when checked by anauthorized dealer. Failure to replace thebelt and retractor assembly could increasethe risk of injury in crashes.

All safety restraints in the vehicle arecombination lap and shoulder belts. Thedriver safety belt has the first type oflocking mode, and the front outboardpassenger and rear seat safety belts haveboth types of locking modes described asfollows:

Vehicle Sensitive ModeThis is the normal retractor mode, whichallows free shoulder belt lengthadjustment to your movements andlocking in response to vehicle movement.For example, if the driver brakes suddenlyor turns a corner sharply, or the vehiclereceives an impact of approximately 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the combination safetybelts will lock to help reduce forwardmovement of the driver and passengers.In addition, the retractor is designed to lockif the webbing is pulled out too quickly. Ifthis occurs, let the belt retract slightly andpull webbing out again in a slow andcontrolled manner.

Automatic Locking ModeIn this mode, the shoulder belt isautomatically pre-locked. The belt will stillretract to remove any slack in the shoulderbelt. The automatic locking mode is notavailable on the driver safety belt.

When to Use the Automatic LockingModeThis mode should be used any time a childsafety seat, except a booster, is installedin passenger front or rear seating positions.Children 12 years old and under should beproperly restrained in a rear seatingposition whenever possible. See ChildSafety (page 14).

28


Safety Belts

How to Use the Automatic LockingMode

E142591

1. Buckle the combination lap andshoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pulldownward until the entire belt is pulledout.

Allow the belt to retract. As the beltretracts, you will hear a clicking sound. Thisindicates the safety belt is now in theautomatic locking mode.

How to Disengage the AutomaticLocking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap andshoulder belt and allow it to retractcompletely to disengage the automaticlocking mode and activate the vehiclesensitive (emergency) locking mode.

Safety Belt Extension AssemblyWARNING

Do not use extensions to change thefit of the shoulder belt across thetorso.

If the safety belt is too short when fullyextended, a safety belt extension assemblycan be obtained from an authorized dealer.

Use only extensions manufactured by thesame supplier as the safety belt.Manufacturer identification is located atthe end of the webbing on the label. Also,use the safety belt extension only if thesafety belt is too short for you when fullyextended.

SAFETY BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

WARNINGPosition the safety belt heightadjuster so that the belt rests acrossthe middle of your shoulder. Failure

to adjust the safety belt properly couldreduce the effectiveness of the safety beltand increase the risk of injury in a crash.

Adjust the height of the shoulder belt sothe belt rests across the middle of yourshoulder.

E145664

To adjust the shoulder belt height:1. Pull the button and slide the height

adjuster up or down.2. Release the button and pull down on

the height adjuster to make sure it islocked in place.

29


Safety Belts

SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMPAND INDICATOR CHIME (IF

EQUIPPED)

This lamp illuminates and anaudible warning will sound if thedriver's safety belt has not been

fastened when the vehicle's ignition isturned on.

Conditions of operation

Then...If...

The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds

4-8 seconds.

The driver's safety belt is not buckledbefore the ignition switch is turned to the

on position...

The safety belt warning light and warningchime turn off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled while theindicator light is illuminated and the

warning chime is sounding...

The safety belt warning light and indicatorchime remain off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled beforethe ignition switch is turned to the on posi-

tion...

SAFETY BELT MINDER (IF

EQUIPPED)

Belt-Minder®This feature supplements the safety beltwarning function by providing additionalreminders by intermittently sounding achime and illuminating the safety beltwarning light when the driver's or frontpassenger's seat is occupied and thesafety belt is unbuckled.

The system uses information from thefront passenger sensing system todetermine if a front seat passenger ispresent and therefore potentially in needof a warning. To avoid activating theBelt-Minder feature for objects placed inthe front passenger seat, warnings will onlybe given to front seat occupants asdetermined by the front passenger sensingsystem.If the Belt-Minder warnings have expired(warnings for about five minutes) for oneoccupant (driver or front passenger), theother occupant can still activate theBelt-Minder feature.

30


Safety Belts

Then...If...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.The driver's and front passenger's safetybelts are buckled before the ignition switchis turned to the on position or less than 1-2

minutes have elapsed since the ignitionswitch has been turned to on...

The Belt-Minder feature is activated - thesafety belt warning light illuminates and

the warning chime sounds for six secondsevery 25 seconds, repeating for about five

minutes or until the safety belts arebuckled.

The driver's or front passenger's safety beltis not buckled when the vehicle has reachedat least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minuteshave elapsed since the ignition switch has

been turned to on...

The Belt-Minder feature is activated - thesafety belt warning light illuminates and

the warning chime sounds for six secondsevery 25 seconds, repeating for about five

minutes or until the safety belts arebuckled.

The driver's or front passenger's safety beltbecomes unbuckled for about one minutewhile the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes haveelapsed since the ignition switch has been

turned to on...

Deactivating and Activating theBelt-Minder Feature

WARNINGWhile the system allows you todeactivate it, this system is designedto improve your chances of being

safely belted and surviving an accident.We recommend you leave the systemactivated for yourself and others who mayuse the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury,do not deactivate or activate the systemwhile driving the vehicle.

Note: The driver and front passengerwarning are deactivated and activatedindependently. When deactivating oractivating one seating position, do notbuckle the other position as this willterminate the process.Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly beforeproceeding with the programmingprocedure.

The system can be deactivated oractivated by performing the followingprocedure:Before following the procedure, make surethat:• the parking brake is set• the transmission selector lever is in

position P (automatic transmission)or N (manual transmission)

• the ignition is off• the driver and front passenger safety

belts are unbuckled.1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the

vehicle.2. Wait until the safety belt warning light

turns off (about one minute). AfterStep 2, wait an additional five secondsbefore proceeding with Step 3. OnceStep 3 is started, the procedure mustbe completed within 30 seconds.

31


Safety Belts

3. For the seating position being disabled,buckle then unbuckle the safety beltthree times at a moderate speed,ending in the unbuckled state. AfterStep 3, the safety belt warning light willturn on.

4. While the safety belt warning light ison, buckle and then unbuckle thesafety belt. After Step 4, the safety beltwarning light will flash for confirmation.

• This will disable the feature for thatseating position if it is currentlyenabled.

• This will enable the feature for thatseating position if it is currentlydisabled.

CHILD RESTRAINT ANDSAFETY BELT MAINTENANCEInspect the vehicle safety belts and childsafety seat systems periodically to makesure they work properly and are notdamaged. Inspect the vehicle and childseat safety belts to make sure there are nonicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.All vehicle safety belt assemblies, includingretractors, buckles, front safety belt buckleassemblies, buckle support assemblies(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder beltheight adjusters (if equipped), shoulderbelt guide on seat back (if equipped), childsafety seat LATCH and tether anchors, andattaching hardware, should be inspectedafter a crash. Read the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions for additionalinspection and maintenance informationspecific to the child restraint.

Ford Motor Company recommends thatall safety belt assemblies in use in vehiclesinvolved in a crash be replaced. However,if the crash was minor and an authorizeddealer finds that the belts do not showdamage and continue to operate properly,they do not need to be replaced. Safetybelt assemblies not in use during a crashshould also be inspected and replaced ifeither damage or improper operation isnoted.Properly care for safety belts.

32


Safety Belts

The Personal Safety System provides animproved overall level of frontal crashprotection to front seat occupants and isdesigned to help further reduce the risk ofairbag-related injuries. The system is ableto analyze different occupant conditionsand crash severity before activating theappropriate safety devices to help betterprotect a range of occupants in a varietyof frontal crash situations.Your vehicle's Personal Safety Systemconsists of:• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints.• Front outboard safety belts with

pretensioners, energy managementretractors (first row only), and safetybelt usage sensors.

• Driver’s seat position sensor.• Front passenger sensing system.• Passenger airbag off and on indicator

lamp.• Front crash severity sensors.• Restraints control module with impact

and safing sensors.• Restraint system warning light and

backup tone.• The electrical wiring for the airbags,

crash sensor(s), safety beltpretensioners, front safety belt usagesensors, driver seat position sensor,front passenger sensing system, andindicator lights.

How Does the Personal SafetySystem Work?The Personal Safety System can adapt thedeployment strategy of your vehicle’ssafety devices according to crash severityand occupant conditions. A collection ofcrash and occupant sensors providesinformation to the restraints control

module. During a crash, the restraintscontrol module may activate the safetybelt pretensioners and may activate eitherone or both stages of the dual-stage airbagsupplemental restraints based on crashseverity and occupant conditions.

33


Personal Safety System™


WARNINGSAirbags do not inflate slowly orgently, and the risk of injury from adeploying airbag is the greatest close

to the trim covering the airbag module.All occupants of your vehicle,including the driver, should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraintsystem is provided. Failure to properly wearyour safety belt could seriously increasethe risk of injury or death.

Always transport children 12 yearsold and under in the back seat andalways properly use appropriate

child restraints. Failure to follow this couldseriously increase the risk of injury or death.

Never place your arm over the airbagmodule as a deploying airbag canresult in serious arm fractures or

other injuries.Airbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. Never place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seatin the front seat, move the seat upon whichthe child seat is installed all the way back.

Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the airbag supplementalrestraint systems or its fuses as you

could be seriously injured or killed. Contactyour authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Several airbag system componentsget hot after inflation. Do not touchthem after inflation as this may result

in serious injury.If the airbag has deployed, the airbagwill not function again and must bereplaced immediately. If the airbag

is not replaced, the unrepaired area willincrease the risk of injury in a collision.

The airbags are a supplemental restraintsystem and are designed to work with thesafety belts to help protect the driver andright front passenger from certain upperbody injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;there is a risk of injury from a deployingairbag.Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.The airbags inflate and deflate rapidlyupon activation. After airbag deployment,it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powderyresidue or smell the burnt propellant. Thismay consist of cornstarch, talcum powder(to lubricate the bag) or sodiumcompounds (for example, baking soda)that result from the combustion processthat inflates the airbag. Small amounts ofsodium hydroxide may be present whichmay irritate the skin and eyes, but none ofthe residue is toxic.While the system is designed to helpreduce serious injuries, contact with adeploying airbag may also cause abrasionsor swelling. Temporary hearing loss is alsoa possibility as a result of the noiseassociated with a deploying airbag.Because airbags must inflate rapidly andwith considerable force, there is the risk ofdeath or serious injuries such as fractures,facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,particularly to occupants who are notproperly restrained or are otherwise out ofposition at the time of airbag deployment.Thus, it is extremely important thatoccupants be properly restrained as faraway from the airbag module as possiblewhile maintaining vehicle control.Routine maintenance of the airbags is notrequired.

34


Supplementary Restraints System

DRIVER AND PASSENGERAIRBAGS

WARNINGSNever place your arm or any objectsover an airbag module. Placing yourarm over a deploying airbag can

result in serious arm fractures or otherinjuries. Objects placed on or over theairbag inflation area may cause thoseobjects to be propelled by the airbag intoyour face and torso causing serious injury.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. Never place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.


E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags willdeploy during significant frontal and nearfrontal crashes.The driver and passenger front airbagsystem consists of:• driver and passenger airbag modules.• front passenger sensing system.

· crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 41).

Proper Driver and Front PassengerSeating Adjustment

WARNINGNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA)recommends a minimum distance

of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters)between an occupant’s chest and thedriver airbag module.

To properly position yourself away fromthe airbag:• Move your seat to the rear as far as you

can while still reaching the pedalscomfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly (one or twodegrees) from the upright position.

After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on safety belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. A properly seated occupant sitsupright, leaning against the seat back, andcentered on the seat cushion, with theirfeet comfortably extended on the floor.Sitting improperly can increase the chanceof injury in a crash event. For example, ifan occupant slouches, lies down, turnssideways, sits forward, leans forward orsideways, or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash is greatlyincreased.

Children and AirbagsWARNING

Airbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. Never place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.


35



E142846

Children must always be properlyrestrained. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrainedin the rear seating positions than in thefront seating position. Failure to followthese instructions may increase the risk ofinjury in a crash.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSINGSYSTEM

WARNINGSEven with Advanced RestraintsSystems, children 12 and undershould be properly restrained in a

rear seating position. Failure to follow thiscould seriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

Sitting improperly out of position orwith the seat back reclined too farcan take off weight from the seat

cushion and affect the decision of the frontpassenger sensing system, resulting inserious injury or death in a crash.

To reduce the risk of possible seriousinjury: Do not stow objects in seatback map pocket or hang objects off

seat back if a child is in the front passengerseat. Do not place objects underneath thefront passenger seat or between the seat

WARNINGSand the center console. Check thepassenger airbag off or pass airbag offindicator lamp for proper airbag status.Failure to follow these instructions mayinterfere with the front passenger seatsensing system.

Any alteration or modification to thefront passenger seat may affect theperformance of the front passenger

sensing system.

This system works with sensors that arepart of the front passenger’s seat andsafety belt to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determineif the front passenger’s frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

E157152

The front passenger sensing system usesa pass airbag off indicator which willilluminate and stay lit to remind you thatthe front passenger frontal airbag isdisabled.The indicator lamp is located at the topcenter of the instrument panel.Note: When the ignition is first tuned on,the indicator lamp will illuminate for a shortperiod of time to confirm it is functional.The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to disable (will not inflate) thefront passenger's frontal airbag when arear facing infant seat, a forward-facingchild restraint, or a booster seat isdetected. Even with this technology,

36



parents are STRONGLY encouraged toalways properly restrain children in the rearseat. The sensor also turns off thepassenger front airbag and seat-mountedside airbag when the passenger seat isempty.• When the front passenger sensing

system disables (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag, theindicator lamp will illuminate and staylit to remind you that the frontpassenger frontal airbag is disabled.

• If the child restraint has been installedand the indicator lamp is not lit, thenturn the vehicle off, remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe restraint following the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions.

The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to enable (may inflate) the frontpassenger's frontal airbag anytime thesystem senses that a person of adult sizeis sitting properly in the front passengerseat.

• When the front passenger sensingsystem enables the front passengerfrontal airbag (may inflate), theindicator lamp will be unlit and stayunlit.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, but the airbag offindicator lamp is lit, it is possible that theperson isn’t sitting properly in the seat. Ifthis happens:• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person

to place the seat back in the full uprightposition.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This will allow the system todetect that person and enable thepassenger’s frontal airbag.

• If the indicator lamp remains lit evenafter this, the person should be advisedto ride in the rear seat.

Passenger airbagPassenger airbag OFF indic-ator

Occupant

DisabledUnlitEmpty

DisabledLitChild

EnabledUnlitAdult

Note: When the passenger airbag off lightis illuminated, the passenger (seatmounted) side airbag may be disabled toavoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on safety belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. A properly seated occupant sitsupright, leaning against the seat back, andcentered on the seat cushion, with theirfeet comfortably extended on the floor.Sitting improperly can increase the chance

of injury in a crash event. For example, ifan occupant slouches, lies down, turnssideways, sits forward, leans forward orsideways, or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash is greatlyincreased.If you think that the status of the passengerairbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, checkfor the following:

37



• Objects lodged underneath the seat• Objects between the seat cushion and

the center console• Objects hanging off the seat back• Objects stowed in the seat back map

pocket• Objects placed on the occupant's lap• Cargo interference with the seat• Other passengers pushing or pulling on

the seat• Rear passenger feet and knees resting

or pushing on the seatThe conditions listed above may cause theweight of a properly seated occupant tobe incorrectly interpreted by the frontpassenger sensing system. The person inthe front passenger seat may appearheavier or lighter due to the conditionsdescribed in the list above.

Make sure the front passengersensing system is operatingproperly. See Crash Sensors

and Airbag Indicator (page 41).

If the airbag readiness light is lit, do thefollowing:The driver and adult passengers shouldcheck for objects lodged underneath thefront passenger seat, or cargo interferingwith the seat.If there are lodged objects, or cargo isinterfering with the seat, take the followingsteps to remove the obstruction:• Pull the vehicle over.• Turn the vehicle off.• Driver and adult passengers should

check for any objects lodgedunderneath the front passenger seator cargo interfering with the seat.

• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).• Restart the vehicle.

• Wait at least two minutes and verifythat the airbag readiness light is nolonger illuminated.

• If the airbag readiness light remainsilluminated, this may or may not be aproblem due to the front passengersensing system.

Do not attempt to repair or service thesystem. Take your vehicle immediately toan authorized dealer.If it is necessary to modify an advancedfront airbag system to accommodate aperson with disabilities, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center. SeeGetting the Services You Need (page160).

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNINGSDo not place objects or mountequipment on or near the airbagcover, on the side of the seatbacks

(of the front seats), or in front seat areasthat may come into contact with adeploying airbag. Failure to follow theseinstructions may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a crash.

Do not use accessory seat covers.The use of accessory seat coversmay prevent the deployment of the

side airbags and increase the risk of injuryin an accident.

Do not lean your head on the door.The side airbag could injure you as itdeploys from the side of the

seatback.Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the airbag, its fuses or theseat cover on a seat containing an

airbag as you could be seriously injured orkilled. Contact your authorized dealer assoon as possible.

38



WARNINGSIf the side airbag has deployed, theairbag will not function again. Theside airbag system (including the

seat) must be inspected and serviced byan authorized dealer. If the airbag is notreplaced, the unrepaired area will increasethe risk of injury in a crash.

The side airbags are located on theoutboard side of the seatbacks of the frontseats. In certain sideways crashes, theairbag on the side affected by the crashwill be inflated. The airbag was designedto inflate between the door panel andoccupant to further enhance the protectionprovided occupants in side impact crashes.

E152533

The system consists of the following:• A label or embossed side panel

indicating that side airbags are fittedto your vehicle.

• Side airbags located inside the driverand front passenger seatbacks.

• Front passenger sensing system.·Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 41).Note: The passenger sensing system willdeactivate the passenger seat-mountedside airbag if it detects an empty passengerseat.

The design and development of the sideairbag system included recommendedtesting procedures that were developedby a group of automotive safety expertsknown as the Side Airbag TechnicalWorking Group. These recommendedtesting procedures help reduce the risk ofinjuries related to the deployment of sideairbags.

KNEE AIRBAG (IF EQUIPPED)

A driver’s knee airbag is located under orwithin the instrument panel. During a crash,the restraints control module may activatethe driver’s knee airbag based on crashseverity and occupant conditions. Undercertain crash and occupant conditions, thedriver’s knee airbag may deploy but thedriver’s front airbag may not activate. Aswith front and side airbags, it is importantto be properly seated and restrained toreduce the risk of death or serious injury.

Make sure the knee airbag isoperating properly. See CrashSensors and Airbag Indicator

(page 41).

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS

WARNINGSDo not place objects or mountequipment on or near the headlinerat the siderail that may come into

contact with a deploying side curtainairbag. Failure to follow these instructionsmay increase the risk of personal injury inthe event of a crash.

Do not lean your head on the door.The side curtain airbag could injureyou as it deploys from the headliner.

39



WARNINGSDo not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the side curtain airbags, itsfuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the

headliner on a vehicle containing sidecurtain airbags. Contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

All occupants of the vehicle includingthe driver should always wear theirsafety belts even when an airbag

supplemental restraint system and sidecurtain airbag is provided.

To reduce risk of injury, do notobstruct or place objects in thedeployment path of the side curtain

airbag.If the side curtain airbags havedeployed, the side curtain airbagswill not function again. The side

curtain airbags (including the A, B and Cpillar trim and headliner) must beinspected and serviced by an authorizeddealer. If the side curtain airbag is notreplaced, the unrepaired area will increasethe risk of injury in a crash.

The side curtain airbags will deploy duringsignificant side crashes. The side curtainairbags are mounted to the roof side-railsheet metal, behind the headliner, aboveeach row of seats. The side curtain airbagsare designed to inflate between the sidewindow area and occupants to furtherenhance protection provided in side impactcrashes.The system consists of the following:

E75004

• Side curtain airbags located above thetrim panels over the front and rear sidewindows identified by a label orwording on the headliner or roof-pillartrim.

• A flexible headliner which opens abovethe side doors to allow side air curtaindeployment.

Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 41).

Children 12 years old and under shouldalways be properly restrained in the backseats. The side curtain airbags will notinterfere with children restrained using aproperly installed child or booster seatbecause it is designed to inflate downwardfrom the headliner above the doors alongthe side window opening.The design and development of the sidecurtain airbags included recommendedtesting procedures that were developedby a group of automotive safety expertsknown as the Side Airbag TechnicalWorking Group. These recommendedtesting procedures help reduce the risk ofinjuries related to the deployment of sidecurtain airbags.

40



CRASH SENSORS ANDAIRBAG INDICATOR

WARNINGModifying or adding equipment tothe front end of the vehicle (includingframe, bumper, front end body

structure and tow hooks) may affect theperformance of the airbag system,increasing the risk of injury. Do not modifythe front end of the vehicle.

The vehicle has a collection of crash andoccupant sensors which provideinformation to the restraints controlmodule which deploys (activates) thefront safety belt pretensioners, driverairbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag(s),seat mounted side airbags, and the sidecurtain airbags. Based on the type of crash(frontal impact or side impact), therestraints control module will deploy theappropriate safety devices.The restraints control module alsomonitors the readiness of the above safetydevices plus the crash and occupantsensors. The readiness of the safetysystem is indicated by a warning indicatorlight in the instrument cluster or by abackup tone if the warning light is notworking. Routine maintenance of theairbag is not required.A difficulty with the system is indicated byone or more of the following:

The readiness light will notilluminate immediately after theignition is turned on.

• The readiness light will either flash orstay lit.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. Thetone pattern will repeat periodicallyuntil the problem, the light or both arerepaired.

If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the supplementalrestraint system serviced at an authorizeddealer immediately. Unless serviced, thesystem may not function properly in theevent of a crash.The safety belt pretensioners and the frontairbag supplemental restraint system aredesigned to activate when the vehiclesustains longitudinal decelerationsufficient to cause the restraints controlmodule to deploy a safety device.The fact that the safety belt pretensionersor front airbags did not activate for bothfront seat occupants in a crash does notmean that something is wrong with thesystem. Rather, it means the restraintscontrol module determined the accidentconditions (crash severity, belt usage)were not appropriate to activate thesesafety devices.• The design of the front airbags is to

activate only in frontal and near-frontalcrashes (not rollovers, side impacts orrear impacts) unless the crash causessufficient longitudinal deceleration.

• The design of the safety beltpretensioners is to activate in frontaland near-frontal crashes, and may alsoactivate when a side curtain deploys.

• The driver's knee airbag may deploybased on crash severity and occupantconditions.

41



• The design of the side airbags is toinflate in certain side impact crashes.Side airbags may activate in othertypes of crashes if your vehicleexperiences sufficient sideways motionor deformation.

• The design of the Safety Canopy is toinflate in certain side impact crashesor rollover events. The Safety Canopymay activate in other types of crashesif your vehicle experiences sufficientsideways motion or deformation, or acertain likelihood of rollover.

AIRBAG DISPOSALContact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Airbags must be disposed of byqualified personnel.

42



GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIESThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation.Note: Changes or modifications notexpressively approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.The term IC before the radio certificationnumber only signifies that Industry Canadatechnical specifications were met.The typical operating range for yourtransmitter is approximately 33 feet (10meters). Vehicles with the remote startfeature will have a greater range. One ofthe following could cause a decrease inoperating range:• weather conditions• nearby radio towers• structures around the vehicle• other vehicles parked next to your

vehicleThe radio frequency used by your remotecontrol can also be used by other shortdistance radio transmissions, for exampleamateur radios, medical equipment,wireless headphones, remote controls andalarm systems. If the frequencies arejammed, you will not be able to use yourremote control. You can lock and unlockthe doors with the key.Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle beforeleaving it unattended.Note: If you are in range, the remote controlwill operate if you press any buttonunintentionally.

Intelligent Access (If Equipped)

The system uses a radio frequency signalto communicate with your vehicle andauthorize your vehicle to unlock when oneof the following conditions are met:• You touch the inside of the front

exterior door handle.• You press the luggage compartment

button.• You press a button on the transmitter.If excessive radio frequency interferenceis present in the area or if the transmitterbattery is low, you may need tomechanically unlock your door. You canuse the mechanical key blade in yourintelligent access key to open the driverdoor in this situation. See RemoteControl (page 43).

REMOTE CONTROLIntegrated Keyhead Transmitter (If

Equipped)

E142585

Use the key blade to start your vehicle andunlock or lock the driver door from outsideyour vehicle. The transmitter portionfunctions as the remote control.

43


Keys and Remote Controls

E162601

Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with asecurity label that provides importantvehicle key cut information. Keep the labelin a safe place for future reference.

Intelligent Access Transmitter (If

Equipped)

Your intelligent access keys operate thepower locks. The key must be in yourvehicle to activate the push button startsystem.The intelligent access key also contains aremovable mechanical key blade that youcan use to unlock the driver door.

E87964

2

1

1Note: Your vehicle’s back-up keys camewith a security tag that provides importantvehicle key cut information. Keep the tag ina safe place for future reference.

Reprogramming the UnlockingFunctionNote: When you press the unlock buttoneither all the doors are unlocked or only thedriver’s door and the liftgate are unlocked.Pressing the unlock button again unlocksall the doors.You can reprogram the unlocking functionusing the remote control so that only thedriver's door is unlocked. This will enabletwo-stage unlocking.Press and hold the unlock and lock buttonson the remote control simultaneously forat least four seconds with the ignition off.The direction indicators will flash twice toconfirm the change.To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.

Replacing the BatteryNote: Refer to local regulations whendisposing of transmitter batteries.Note: Do not wipe off any grease on thebattery terminals or on the back surface ofthe circuit board.Note: Replacing the battery will not deletethe transmitter from the vehicle. Thetransmitter should operate normally.The remote control uses one coin-typethree-volt lithium battery CR2032 orequivalent.

44



Vehicles Without Intelligent Access

1

E126152

1. Insert a screwdriver into the recess onthe back of the key and remove the keyblade.

E126153

2

2. Release the retaining clips with thescrewdriver and separate the twohalves of the remote control.

E126281

3

Note: Do not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.3. Carefully pry out the battery with the

screwdriver.4. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with

the + facing upward.5. Assemble the two halves of the remote

control.6. Install the key blade.

Integrated Keyhead Transmitter

E138619

1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of thetransmitter near the key ring to removethe battery cover.

2. Remove the old battery.

45



E138620

3. Insert the new battery. Refer to theinstructions inside the transmitter forthe correct orientation of the battery.Press the battery down to make sureit is fully in the housing.

4. Snap the battery cover back onto thetransmitter.

Intelligent Access Transmitter

E87964

2

1

11. Press and hold the buttons on the

edges to release the cover. Carefullyremove the cover.

2. Remove the key blade.

E105362

3

3. Twist the screwdriver in the positionshown to start separating the twohalves of the remote control.

E119190

4

4. Twist the screwdriver in the positionshown to separate the two halves ofthe remote control.

E125860

5

46



Note: Do not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.5. Carefully remove the battery with the

screwdriver.6. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with

the + facing downward.7. Assemble the two halves of the remote

control.8. Install the key blade.

Car Finder

E138623

Press the button twice withinthree seconds. The horn willsound and the turn signals will

flash. We recommend you use this methodto locate your vehicle, rather than usingthe panic alarm.Note: If locking was not successful or if anydoor or the liftgate is open, or if the hood isopen on vehicles with a perimeter alarm orremote start, the horn will sound twice andthe lamps will not flash.

Sounding a Panic Alarm (If Equipped)

Note: The panic alarm will only operatewhen the ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to activate thealarm. Press the button again orturn the ignition on to deactivate.

REPLACING A LOST KEY ORREMOTE CONTROLReplacement or additional keys or remotecontrols can be purchased from anauthorized dealer. Your dealer can programthe remote controls for your vehicle or youmay be able to program them yourself.See Remote Control (page 43).To re-program the passive anti-theftsystem see an authorized dealer.

47



PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONMyKey allows you to program keys withrestricted driving modes to promote gooddriving habits. All but one of the keysprogrammed to the vehicle can beactivated with these restricted modes.Any keys that have not been programmedare referred to as administrator keys oradmin keys. These can be used to:• Create a MyKey• Program configurable MyKey settings• Clear all MyKey featuresWhen you have created a MyKey, you canaccess the following information using theinformation display:• How many admin keys and MyKeys are

programmed to your vehicle.• The total distance your vehicle has

traveled using any MyKey.Note: All MyKeys are programmed to thesame settings. You cannot program themindividually.If a MyKey and an admin key are present,your vehicle will recognize the admin keyonly.Note: For vehicles with intelligent accesskey (push button start) keyless start, whenboth a MyKey and an admin intelligentaccess key (fob) are present, the admin fobwill be recognized by the vehicle to start theengine.

Non-configurable SettingsThe following settings cannot be changedby an admin key user:• Belt-minder. You cannot disable this

feature. The audio system will mutewhen the safety belts are not fastened.

• Early low fuel warning. The low-fuelwarning activates earlier, giving theMyKey user more time to refuel.

• Driver assist features, if equipped onyour vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,blind spot information system (BLIS)with cross traffic alert, lane departurewarning and forward collision warningsystem.

• Satellite radio adult contentrestrictions.

Configurable SettingsWith an admin key, you can configurecertain MyKey settings when you firstcreate a MyKey and before you recycle thekey or restart the vehicle. You can alsochange the settings afterward with anadmin key:• Vehicle speed limits can be set.

Warnings will be shown in the displayfollowed by an audible tone when yourvehicle reaches the set speed. Youcannot override the set speed by fullydepressing the accelerator pedal.

• Vehicle speed minders of 45, 55 or 65mph (75, 90 or 105 km/h). Once youselect a speed it will be shown in thedisplay followed by an audible tonewhen the set vehicle speed isexceeded.

• Audio system maximum volume of45%. A message will be shown in thedisplay when you attempt to exceedthe limited volume. Also, the speedsensitive compensated volume(automatic volume control) featurewill be disabled.

• Always on setting. When this isselected you will not be able to disableAdvanceTrac, 911 Assist or the do notdisturb feature (if your vehicle isequipped with these features).

CREATING A MYKEYUse the information display to create aMyKey.

48


MyKey™ (If Equipped)

1. Insert the key you want to program intothe ignition or, if the vehicle has pushbutton start, hold the intelligent accesskey or fob next to the steering column.

2. Using the information display controls,access the main menu and selectSettings, then MyKey by pressing OKor the right arrow button.

3. Press OK to select Create MyKey.4. When prompted, hold the OK button

until you see a message informing youto label this key as a MyKey. The keywill be restricted at the next start.

MyKey is successfully created. Make sureyou label it so you can distinguish it fromthe admin keys.You can program configurable settings forthe key(s). Refer to Programming orChanging Configurable Settings.

Programming or ChangingConfigurable SettingsUse the information display to access yourconfigurable MyKey settings.1. Switch the ignition on using an admin

key. If the vehicle has push-buttonstart, hold an intelligent access adminkey or fob next to the steering columnand use the push-button start toswitch the ignition on.

2. Access the main menu and selectSettings, then MyKey by pressing OKor the right arrow key.

3. Use the arrow buttons to get to aconfigurable feature.

4. Press OK or the right arrow button tomake a selection.

Note: You can clear or change your MyKeysettings at any time during the same keycycle as you created the MyKey. If youswitch the ignition off, however, you willneed to use an admin key to clear yourMyKeys.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYSYou can clear all MyKeys within the samekey cycle as you created the MyKey. If youswitch your ignition off, however, you willneed to use an admin key to clear yourMyKeys.Note: When you clear your MyKeys, youremove all restrictions and return all MyKeysto their original admin key status at once.To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings,use the information display to do thefollowing:1. Access the main menu and select

Settings, then MyKey.2. Scroll to Clear MyKey and press the

OK button.3. Hold the OK button until ALL

MYKEYS CLEARED displays.

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEMSTATUSYou can find information about yourprogrammed MyKeys by using theinformation display.

MyKey DistanceTracks the distance when drivers use aMyKey. The only way to delete theaccumulated distance is by using an adminkey to clear your MyKey. If the distancedoes not accumulate as expected, thenthe intended user is not using the MyKey,or an admin key user recently cleared andthen recreated a MyKey.

Number of MyKeysIndicates the number of MyKeysprogrammed to your vehicle. Use thisfeature to detect how many MyKeys youhave for your vehicle and determine whena MyKey has been deleted.

49



Number of Admin KeysIndicates how many admin keys areprogrammed to your vehicle. Use thisfeature to determine how many adminkeys you have for your vehicle, and detectif an additional MyKey has beenprogrammed.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTESTART SYSTEMSMyKey is not compatible withnon-Ford-approved aftermarket remotestart systems. If you choose to install aremote start system, please see anauthorized dealer for a Ford-approvedremote start system.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING

Potential causesCondition

· The key or fob used to start the vehicledoes not have admin privileges.

I cannot create a MyKey.

· The key or fob used to start the vehicle isthe only admin key (there always has to beat least one admin key).· Vehicles with push-button start: Theintelligent access key is not in the correctposition. The position location is in anotherchapter. See Keyless Starting (page 113).· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system isdisabled or in unlimited mode.


I cannot program the configurable settings.

· No MyKeys have been created. SeeCreating a MyKey (page 48).


I cannot clear the MyKeys.

· No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle.See Creating a MyKey (page 48).

Purchase a new key from an authorizeddealer.

I lost the only admin key.

Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 60).

I lost a key.

· An admin key is present at engine start-up.

No MyKey functions with intelligent accesskey (push-button start).

· No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle.See Creating a MyKey (page 48).

· The MyKey user is not using a MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.

50



Potential causesCondition

· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeysand reset the key system.

51



LOCKING AND UNLOCKINGRemote ControlThe remote control can be used any timeyour vehicle is not running.

Unlocking the DoorsNote: You can unlock the driver's door withthe key. Use the key when the remotecontrol is not functioning.Note: When you lock your vehicle forseveral weeks, the remote control will beswitched off. Your vehicle must be unlockedand the engine started using the key.Unlocking and starting your vehicle once willenable the remote control.

One-Stage UnlockingPress the button to unlock all thedoors.

The direction indicators will flash.

Two-Stage UnlockingPress the button to unlock thedriver’s door.

Press the button again within threeseconds to unlock all doors.The direction indicators will flash.

Reprogramming the UnlockingFunctionYou can reprogram the unlocking functionusing the remote control to changebetween one-stage and two-stageunlocking. See Remote Control (page43).

Locking the DoorsPress the button to lock all thedoors. The direction indicatorswill flash twice.

Press the button again within threeseconds to confirm that all the doors areclosed. The doors will lock again, and thedirection indicators will flash twice if allthe doors and the luggage compartmentare closed.Note: If any door or the luggagecompartment is not closed, or if the hood isnot closed on vehicles that have ananti-theft alarm or remote start, thedirection indicators will not flash.

Automatic Re-lockingThe doors will relock automatically if youdo not open a door within 45 seconds ofunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol. The door locks and the alarm willreturn to their previous state.

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsFrom InsideThe power door lock control is located onthe instrument panel near the radio.

E102566

Press the button to lock andunlock all the doors. The lampilluminates with the doors

locked.

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsWith the KeyNote: Do not leave your keys in your vehicle.

Locking With the KeyTurn the top of the key toward the front ofyour vehicle.

Unlocking With the KeyTurn the top of the key toward the rear ofyour vehicle.

52


Locks

Unlocking the Doors With theInterior Door HandlesYou can unlock individual doors by pullingthe relevant interior door handle. Pullingthe driver's interior door handle will unlockall the doors, if auto unlock has beenenabled.

Rear Door Unlocking and OpeningPull the interior door release handle twiceto unlock and open the rear door. The firstpull unlocks the door and the second pullwill unlatch the door.

Smart Unlocks for IntegratedKeyhead TransmitterThis feature helps to prevent you fromlocking yourself out of your vehicle if yourkey is still in the ignition.When you open one of the front doors andlock your vehicle with the power door lockcontrol, all the doors will lock then unlockif your key is still in the ignition.You can still lock your vehicle with the keyin the ignition by pressing the lock buttonon the transmitter even if the doors are notclosed.If both front doors are closed, you can lockyour vehicle by any method, regardless ofwhether the key is in the ignition or not.

Smart Unlocks for IntelligentAccess Keys (If Equipped)

This feature helps to prevent you fromunintentionally locking your intelligentaccess key inside your vehicle’s passengercompartment or rear cargo area.

When you lock your vehicle using thepower door lock control (with the dooropen, vehicle in park and ignition off), yourvehicle will search for an intelligent accesskey in the passenger compartment afteryou close the door. If your vehicle finds akey, all of the doors will immediatelyunlock and the horn will chirp, indicatingthat a key is inside.In order to override the smart unlockfeature and intentionally lock theintelligent access key inside your vehicle,you can lock your vehicle after all doorsare closed by pressing the lock button onanother intelligent access key or touchingthe locking area on the handle with anotherintelligent access key in your hand.When you open one of the front doors andlock your vehicle using the power door lockcontrol, all doors will lock then unlock if:• the ignition is on, or• the ignition is off and the transmission

is not in P.

Auto Lock FeatureThe auto lock feature will lock the doorsand liftgate when all of the followingconditions have been met:• All doors are closed.• The ignition is on.• Your vehicle is moving at a speed

greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) formore than two seconds.

Enabling or Disabling Auto LockNote: You cannot disable the auto lockfeature in some markets.Note: See an authorized dealer to enableor disable the auto lock feature or carry outthe following procedure.Note: You will have 30 seconds tocomplete the procedure.1. Switch the ignition on.

53


Locks

2. Press the power door lock button threetimes.

3. Switch the ignition off.4. Press the power door lock button three

times.5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will

chirp indicating your vehicle is inprogramming mode.

6. Press the power door lock button forless than one second and release.

The horn will chirp once if disabled or twice(one short and one long chirp) if enabled.After programming the feature, switch theignition off. The horn will chirp onceindicating programming is complete.

Auto Unlock FeatureThe auto unlock feature will unlock all thedoors when all of the following conditionshave been met:• The ignition is on, all doors are closed,

and your vehicle is moving at a speedgreater than 12 mph (20 km/h) formore than two seconds.

• Your vehicle has come to a stop andyou switch the ignition off or to theaccessory position.

• The driver's door is opened within 10minutes of you switching the ignitionoff or to the accessory position.

Note: The doors will not auto unlock if yourvehicle has been electronically locked afterthe ignition is turned off and before thedriver's door is opened.

Enabling or Disabling Auto UnlockNote: See an authorized dealer to enableor disable the auto unlock feature or carryout the following procedure.Note: You will have 30 seconds tocomplete the procedure.1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Press the power door lock button threetimes.

3. Switch the ignition off.4. Press the power door lock button three

times.5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will

chirp indicating your vehicle is inprogramming mode.

6. Press the power door lock button forlonger than two seconds and release.

The horn will chirp once if disabled or twice(one short and one long chirp) if enabled.After programming the feature, switch theignition off. The horn will chirp onceindicating programming is complete.

Emergency Locking With the KeyNote: If the child safety locks are on andyou pull the interior handle, you will onlyturn off the emergency locking, not the childsafety lock. You can only open the doorsusing the external door handle.Note: If the doors have been unlocked usingthis method, the doors must be lockedindividually until the central locking functionhas been repaired.Note: When the central locking functionfails to operate, lock the doors individuallyusing the key in the position shown.

54


Locks

E112203

Left-Hand SideTurn clockwise to lock.

Right-Hand SideTurn counterclockwise to lock.

MANUAL LIFTGATE

WARNINGSIt is extremely dangerous to ride inthe cargo area, inside or outside ofyour vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed. Do not allowpeople to ride in any area of your vehiclethat does not have seats and safety belts.Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt correctly.

Make sure that the liftgate is closedto prevent exhaust fumes from beingdrawn into your vehicle. This will also

prevent passengers and cargo from fallingout. If you must drive with the liftgate dooropen, keep your vehicle well ventilated sooutside air does not enter your vehicle.

Note: Be careful when opening or closingthe liftgate in a garage or other enclosedarea to avoid damaging the liftgate.Note: Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.)from the spoiler, glass or liftgate. This coulddamage the liftgate and its components.Note: Do not leave the liftgate open whiledriving. This could damage the liftgate andits components.

Opening and Closing the LiftgateTo Open the Liftgate

E138632

Press the button located in the top of theliftgate pull cup handle to unlatch theliftgate, then pull on the outside handle.

Opening With the Remote ControlPress the button twice withinthree seconds.

55


Locks

To Close the Liftgate

E89132

A recessed grip is located inside the liftgateto help with closing.

KEYLESS ENTRYGeneral Information

WARNINGThe system may not function if thekey is close to metal objects orelectronic devices such as cell

phones.

The system will not function if:• Your vehicle battery has no charge.• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery has no charge.Note: If the system does not function, youwill need to use the key blade to lock andunlock your vehicle.The system allows you to operate yourvehicle without the use of a key or remotecontrol.

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be located within oneof the three external detection ranges.These are located approximately five feet(one and a half meters) from the frontdoor handles and the liftgate.

Passive KeyYour vehicle can be locked and unlockedwith the passive key. You can use thepassive key as a remote control. SeeLocking and Unlocking (page 52).

Locking Your Vehicle

E87384

WARNINGYour vehicle does not lock itselfautomatically. If you do not press alocking button your vehicle will

remain unlocked.

56


Locks

Locking buttons are located on each of thefront doors.For central locking and to arm the alarm,press a locking button once.For double locking and to arm the alarm,press a locking button twice within threeseconds.Note: Your vehicle will remain locked forapproximately three seconds. When thedelay period is over, you can open the doorsagain, provided the passive key is within therespective detection range.Two short flashes of the directionindicators confirms that all the doors andthe liftgate have been locked and that thealarm has been armed.

LiftgateNote: The liftgate cannot be closed andwill pop back up if the passive key is locatedinside the luggage compartment with thedoors locked.Note: If a second valid passive key islocated within the liftgate detection range,the liftgate can be closed.

Unlocking Your VehicleNote: When your vehicle remains lockedfor longer than three days, the system willenter an energy-saving mode. This is toprevent your vehicle battery running out ofcharge. When your vehicle is unlocked whilein this mode, the reaction time of the systemmay be a little longer than normal. To exitthe energy-saving mode, unlock yourvehicle.

E87384

Press a locking button once.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door.One long flash of the direction indicatorsconfirms that all the doors and the liftgatehave been unlocked and that the alarmhas been disarmed.

Unlocking Only the Driver's DoorIf the unlocking function is reprogrammedso that only the driver’s door and theliftgate are unlocked. See RemoteControl (page 43). Note the following:If the driver’s door is the first door which isopened, the other doors will remain locked.All the other doors can be unlocked frominside your vehicle by pressing the unlockbutton on the instrument panel.

Disabled KeysAny keys left inside your vehicle interiorwhen it is locked will be disabled.You cannot use a disabled key to switchthe ignition on or start the engine.You must enable all passive keys again inorder to use them.To enable all your passive keys, unlock yourvehicle using a passive key or the remotecontrol unlocking function.All passive keys will then be enabled if youswitch the ignition on or you start yourvehicle with a valid key.

57


Locks

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsWith the Key Blade

E87964

2

1

11. Carefully remove the cover.2. Remove the key blade and insert it into

the lock.Note: Only the driver's door handle has alock cylinder.

INTERIOR LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT RELEASE (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNINGSKeep vehicle doors and luggagecompartment locked and keep keysand remote transmitters out of a

child’s reach. Unsupervised children couldlock themselves in the trunk and risk injury.Children should be taught not to play invehicles.

WARNINGSDo not leave children, unreliableadults, or animals unattended in thevehicle. On hot days, the

temperature in the trunk or vehicle interiorcan rise very quickly. Exposure of peopleor animals to these high temperatures foreven a short time can cause death orserious heat-related injuries, including braindamage. Small children are particularly atrisk.

Your vehicle is equipped with a releasehandle that provides a means of escapefor children and adults if they becomelocked inside the luggage compartment.Adults should familiarize themselves withthe operation and location of the releasehandle.

E144403

58


Locks

The handle is located inside the luggagecompartment either on the luggagecompartment door (lid) or near the taillamps. It is composed of a material thatwill glow for hours in darkness followingbrief exposure to ambient light.Pull the handle and push up on the luggagecompartment door (lid) to open fromwithin the luggage compartment.

59


Locks

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFTSYSTEMNote: The system is not compatible withnon-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.Use of these systems may result in vehiclestarting problems and a loss of securityprotection.Note: Metallic objects, electronic devicesor a second coded key on the same keychain may cause vehicle starting problemsif they are too close to the key when startingthe engine. Prevent these objects fromtouching the coded key while starting theengine. Switch the ignition off, move allobjects on the key chain away from thecoded key and restart the engine if aproblem occurs.Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded keyin the vehicle. Always take your keys andlock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

SecuriLock®The system is an engine immobilizationsystem. It is designed to help prevent theengine from being started unless a codedkey programmed to your vehicle is used.Using the wrong key may prevent theengine from starting. A message mayappear in the information display.If you are unable to start the engine with acorrectly coded key, a malfunction hashappened and a message may appear inthe information display.

Automatic ArmingThe vehicle arms immediately after youswitch the ignition off.

Automatic DisarmingSwitching the ignition on with a coded keydisarms the vehicle.

Replacement KeysNote: Your vehicle comes equipped withtwo integrated keyhead transmitters or twointelligent access keys.The integrated keyhead transmitterfunctions as a programmed ignition keythat operates all the locks and starts thevehicle, as well as a remote control.The intelligent access key functions as aprogrammed key that operates the driverdoor lock and activates the intelligentaccess with push button start system, aswell as a remote control.If your programmed transmitters orstandard SecuriLock coded keys(integrated keyhead transmitters only) arelost or stolen and you do not have an extracoded key, you will need to have yourvehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Youneed to erase the key codes from yourvehicle and program new coded keys.Store an extra programmed key away fromthe vehicle in a safe place to help preventany inconveniences. See your authorizeddealer to purchase additional spare orreplacement keys.

Programming a Spare IntegratedKeyhead TransmitterNote: You can program a maximum of eightcoded keys to your vehicle. All eight can beintegrated keyhead transmitters.You can program your own integratedkeyhead transmitter or standardSecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. Thisprocedure will program both the engineimmobilizer keycode and the remote entryportion of the remote control to yourvehicleOnly use integrated keyhead transmittersor standard SecuriLock keys.

60


Security

You must have two previouslyprogrammed coded keys and the newunprogrammed key readily accessible. Seeyour authorized dealer to have the sparekey programmed if two previouslyprogrammed coded keys are not available.Read and understand the entire procedurebefore you begin.1. Insert the first previously programmed

coded key into the ignition.2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep

the ignition on for at least threeseconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

3. Switch the ignition off and remove thefirst coded key from the ignition.

4. After three seconds but within 10seconds of switching the ignition off,insert the second previously coded keyinto the ignition.

5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least threeseconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

6. Switch the ignition off and remove thesecond previously programmed codedkey from the ignition.

7. After three seconds but within 10seconds of switching the ignition offand removing the previouslyprogrammed coded key, insert the newunprogrammed key into the ignition.

8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least six seconds.

9. Remove the newly programmed codedkey from the ignition.

If the key has been successfullyprogrammed it will start the engine andoperate the remote entry system (if thenew key is an integrated keyheadtransmitter).If programming was not successful, wait10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.If you are still unsuccessful, take yourvehicle to your authorized dealer.

Programming a Spare IntelligentAccess KeySee your authorized dealer to haveadditional keys programmed to yourvehicle.

ANTI-THEFT ALARMAlarm SystemThe perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorized access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the hood. It alsoprotects the audio unit.

Triggering the AlarmOnce armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:• If someone opens a door, the liftgate

or the hood without a valid key orremote control.

• If someone removes the audio ornavigation system.

• If you switch the ignition on without avalid key.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.Any further attempts to perform one of theabove will trigger the alarm again.

Arming the AlarmTo arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. SeeLocks (page 52).

Disarming the AlarmVehicles Without Keyless EntryDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded key orunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol.

61


Security

Vehicles with Keyless EntryNote: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door forkeyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 56).Disarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition on orunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol.

62


Security

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL

WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheelwhen your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 105).

12

2

E95178

1. Unlock the steering column.2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

3E95179

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Select the required source on the audiounit.You can operate the following functionswith the control:

E141530

A

B

C

D

Volume upASeek up, next or end callB

63


Steering Wheel

Volume downCSeek down, previous or acceptcall

D

Seek, Next or PreviousPress the seek button to:• tune the radio to the next or previous

stored preset• play the next or the previous track.Press and hold the seek button to:• tune the radio to the next station up or

down the frequency band• seek through a track.

VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

E141533

Press the button to select or deselect voicecontrol. See SYNC™ (page 259).

CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

E141961

See Cruise Control (page 142).

64


Steering Wheel

WINDSHIELD WIPERSNote: Fully defrost the windshield beforeswitching on the windshield wipers.Note: Make sure the windshield wipers areswitched off before entering a car wash.Note: Install new wiper blades as soon asthey begin to leave bands of water andsmears on the windshield.Note: Do not operate the wipers on a drywindshield. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades or cause the wipermotor to burn out. Always use thewindshield washers before wiping a drywindshield.

E102032

B

A

CD

Single wipeAIntermittent wipeBNormal wipeCHigh speed wipeD

Note: If you press and hold the wiper leverin position A, the wipers will continue towipe until you release the wiper lever.

Intermittent Wipe

E102033

A B

C

Short wipe intervalAIntermittent wipeBLong wipe intervalC

Use the rotary control to adjust theintermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent WipersWhen your vehicle speed increases, theinterval between wipes will decrease.

WINDSHIELD WASHERSNote: Do not operate the washers whenthe washer reservoir is empty. This maycause the washer pump to overheat.

E102051

Push the button to operate the washers.When you release the button, the wiperswill operate for a short time.

65


Wipers and Washers

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHERSIntermittent Wipe

E102052

Pull the lever toward you.

Reverse Gear WipeThe rear wiper will turn on automaticallywhen selecting reverse gear if:• the rear wiper is not already switched

on• the wiper lever is in position A, B, C or

D• the front wiper is operating (when set

to position B).

Rear Window WasherNote: Do not operate the washers whenthe washer reservoir is empty. This maycause the washer pump to overheat.

E102053

Pull the lever toward you to operate thewashers. They will operate for a maximumof 10 seconds. When you release the lever,the wiper will operate for a short time.

66


Wipers and Washers

GENERAL INFORMATIONCondensation in Lamp AssembliesExterior lamps have vents toaccommodate normal changes in airpressure.Condensation can be a natural by-productof this design. When moist air enters thelamp assembly through the vents, there isa possibility that condensation can occurwhen the temperature is cold. Whennormal condensation occurs, a fine mistcan form on the interior of the lens. Thefine mist eventually clears and exitsthrough the vents during normal operation.Clearing time may take as long as 48 hoursunder dry weather conditions.Examples of acceptable condensation are:• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,

drip marks or large droplets).• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the

lens.Examples of unacceptable condensationare:• A water puddle inside the lamp.• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets

present on the interior of the lens.If you see any unacceptable condensation,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

LIGHTING CONTROLLighting Control Positions

E156651

A B C

OffAParking lamps, instrument panellamps, license plate lamps andtail lamps

B

HeadlampsC

Parking LampsNote: Prolonged use of the parking lampswhen the ignition is off will cause the batteryto run out of charge.To operate the parking lamps turn thelighting control to position B. The parkinglamps operate with the ignition on or off.

67


Lighting

High Beams

E101829

Pull the lever fully toward you to switchthe high beams on.Pull the lever fully toward you again toswitch the high beams off.

Headlamp FlasherPull the lever toward you slightly andrelease it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: It may be necessary to switch yourheadlamps on manually in severe weatherconditions.Note: If you have autolamps on, you canonly switch the high beam on onceautolamps has switched the headlamps on.

E158778

The headlamps will switch on and offautomatically in low light situations orduring inclement weather.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER

E156652

68


Lighting

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAYAfter you switch the ignition off, you canswitch the headlamps on by pulling thedirection indicator lever toward you. Youwill hear a short tone. The headlamps willswitch off automatically after threeminutes with any door open or 30 secondsafter the last door has been closed. Youcan cancel this feature by pulling thedirection indicator toward you again orswitching the ignition on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNINGAlways remember to switch yourheadlamps on in low light situationsor during inclement weather. The

system does not turn on the tail lamps andmay not provide adequate lighting duringthese conditions. Failure to switch theheadlamps on under these conditions mayresult in a collision.

The system switches the headlamps on indaylight conditions.To switch the system on:1. Switch the ignition on.2. Turn the lighting control to the off,

autolamp or parking lamp position.3. Make sure the transmission selector

lever is not in position P.

FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

E156823

Pull the control to switch the fog lamps onor off.You cannot switch the fog lamps on whenthe lighting control is in the off orautolamps position.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E102016

Push the lever up or down to use thedirection indicators.Note: Tap the lever up or down to make thedirection indicators flash three times toindicate a lane change.

69


Lighting

INTERIOR LAMPSFront Interior Lamps

E156878

A B

CC

Door contactAOffBReading lampsC

E170657

B C DAD

OffADoor contactBOnCReading lampsD

E170600

D

Reading lamps.D

When the switch is set to the door contactposition, the courtesy lamp will illuminatewhen you unlock or open a door or theliftgate. If you leave a door open with theignition switched off, the courtesy lampwill go off automatically after some timeto prevent your vehicle battery from losingcharge. To switch it back on, switch theignition on for a short time.The courtesy lamp will also illuminatewhen you switch the ignition off. It will gooff automatically after a short time orwhen you start the engine.

Reading LampsIf you switch the ignition off, the readinglamps will go off automatically after sometime to prevent your vehicle battery fromlosing charge. To switch them back on,switch the ignition on for a short time.

Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped)

Press to switch individual lamps on andoff.

70


Lighting

AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)

The ambient lighting system illuminatesthe interior with a choice of several colors.The ambient lighting control is located onthe instrument panel.

E158830

Press and release the switch tocycle through the color choicesand the off condition.

The ambient lighting will switch on whenthe following conditions have been met:• You switch the ignition on.• You switch the headlamps on.• The exterior ambient light level is low.The ambient lighting will remain on untilyou switch the ignition off and one of thefollowing conditions have been met:• You lock your vehicle.• The accessory delay timer expires.

71


Lighting

POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGSDo not leave children unattended inyour vehicle and do not let them playwith the power windows. They may

seriously injure themselves.When closing the power windows,you should verify they are free ofobstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximityof the window openings.

E70848

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise whenjust one of the windows is open. Lower theopposite window slightly to reduce thisnoise.Press the switch to open the window.Lift the switch to close the window.

One-Touch Down (If Equipped)

Press the switch fully and release it. Pressagain or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch Up (If Equipped)

Lift the switch fully and release it. Press orlift it again to stop the window.

Window Lock

E70850

Press the control to lock or unlock the rearwindow controls. It will illuminate whenthe rear window controls are locked.

Bounce-Back (If Equipped)

The window will stop automatically whileclosing. It will reverse some distance ifthere is an obstacle in the way.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNINGWhen you override the bounce-backfeature the window will not reverseif it detects an obstacle. Take care

when closing the windows to avoidpersonal injury or damage to your vehicle.

Proceed as follows to override thisprotection feature when there is aresistance, for example in winter:1. Close the window twice until it reaches

the point of resistance and let itreverse.

72


Windows and Mirrors

2. Close the window a third time to thepoint of resistance. The bounce-backfeature is now disabled and you canclose the window manually. Thewindow will go past the point ofresistance and you can close it fully.

See an authorized dealer as soon aspossible if the window does not close afterthe third attempt.

Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNINGThe bounce-back feature remainsturned off until you reset thememory.

If you have disconnected the battery, youmust reset the bounce-back memoryseparately for each window.1. Lift and hold the switch until the

window is fully closed.2. Release the switch.3. Lift the switch again for one more

second.4. Press and hold the switch until the

window is fully open.5. Release the switch.6. Lift and hold the switch until the

window is fully closed.7. Open the window and then try to close

it automatically.8. Reset and repeat the procedure if the

window does not close automatically.

Accessory Delay (If Equipped)

You can use the window switches forseveral minutes after you have switchedthe ignition off or until either front door isopened.

GLOBAL OPENING ANDCLOSING (IF EQUIPPED)

You can also operate the power windowswith the ignition off using the globalopening and global closing function.Note: Global opening will only operate fora short period of time after you haveunlocked your vehicle using the remotecontrol.Note: Global closing will only operate if youhave set the memory correctly for eachwindow. See Power Windows (page 72).

Global Opening

E71955

To open all the windows:1. Press and release the remote control

unlock button.2. Press and hold the remote control

unlock button for at least threeseconds.

Press the lock or unlock button to stop theopening function.

73


Windows and Mirrors

Global ClosingVehicles Without Keyless Entry

WARNINGTake care when using global closing.In an emergency, press the lock orunlock button immediately to stop.

E71956

To close all the windows, press and holdthe remote control lock button for at leastthree seconds. Press the lock or unlockbutton to stop the closing function. Thebounce-back function is also on duringglobal closing.

Vehicles With Keyless Entry

E87384

WARNINGTake care when using global closing.In an emergency, touch a doorhandle lock sensor to stop.

Note: Global closing can be switched onusing the driver’s door handle. Globalopening and closing can also be switchedon using the buttons on the passive key.To close all the windows, press and holdthe driver’s door handle for at least threeseconds. The bounce-back function is alsoon during global closing.

EXTERIOR MIRRORSPower Exterior Mirrors

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirrors when yourvehicle is moving. This could resultin the loss of control of your vehicle,

serious personal injury or death.

E71280

BC

A

Left-hand mirrorAOffBRight-hand mirrorC

74


Windows and Mirrors

E71281

Move the controller in the direction of thearrows to adjust the mirror.

Fold-Away Exterior MirrorsPush the mirror toward the door windowglass. Make sure that you fully engage themirror in its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If

Equipped)

WARNINGObjects in the blind spot mirror arecloser than they appear.

Blind spot mirrors have an integratedconvex mirror built into the upper outboardcorner of the exterior mirrors. They aredesigned to increase your visibility alongthe side of your vehicle.Check the main mirror first before a lanechange, then check the blind spot mirror.If no vehicles are present in the blind spotmirror and the traffic in the adjacent laneis at a safe distance, signal that you intendto change lanes. Glance over your shoulderto verify traffic is clear and carefullychange lanes.

A

B

C

E138665

The image of the approaching vehicle issmall and near the inboard edge of themain mirror when it is at a distance. Theimage becomes larger and begins to moveoutboard across the main mirror as thevehicle approaches (A). The image willtransition from the main mirror and beginto appear in the blind spot mirror as thevehicle approaches (B). The vehicle willtransition to your peripheral field of viewas it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirror when yourvehicle is moving.

75


Windows and Mirrors

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass ofany mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum or ammonia-based cleaningproducts.You can adjust the interior mirror to yourpreference. Some mirrors also have asecond pivot point. This lets you move themirror head up or down and from side toside.Pull the tab below the mirror toward youto reduce glare at night.

Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the frontand back of the mirror. Mirror performancemay be affected. A rear center passenger orraised rear center head restraint may alsoblock light from reaching the sensor.The mirror will dim automatically to reduceglare when bright lights are detected frombehind your vehicle. It will automaticallyreturn to normal reflection when you selectreverse gear to make sure you have a clearview when backing up.

MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGSDo not allow people to play with themoonroof. Becoming trapped in amoonroof may result in serious injury

or death.You must make sure the moonroofis free of any obstruction whenclosing. Becoming trapped in a

moonroof may result in serious injury ordeath.

The moonroof controls are located on theoverhead console.

E156620

Opening and Closing the MoonroofPress and release the rear of the SLIDEcontrol to open the moonroof. The slidingshade will automatically open, if closed,while the moonroof opens.Press and hold the front of the SLIDEcontrol to close the moonroof.Note: The sliding shade will notautomatically close.

Moonroof Sliding ShadeYou can manually open or close the slidingshade when the moonroof is closed. Slidethe shade backward or forward to open orclose it.

Venting the MoonroofPress and hold the rear of the TILT controlto vent the moonroof.Press and hold the front of the TILTcontrol to close the moonroof.

76


Windows and Mirrors

GAUGES

E102660

CA

DE

B

TachometerAInformation display and engine coolant temperature gaugeBSpeedometerCFuel gaugeDTripmeter reset buttonE

Compass (If Equipped)Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.To calibrate and set the compass zone usethe information display menu. SeeInformation Displays (page 85).Use the diagram to determine yourmagnetic zone.

1234

5

6 7 8 91011

12

1314

15

E142800

77


Instrument Cluster

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

E140760

Displays the temperature of the enginecoolant. At normal operating temperaturethe indicator will remain in the centersection.

Fuel GaugeSwitch the ignition on. The fuel gauge willindicate approximately how much fuel isleft in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge mayvary slightly when your vehicle is movingor on a gradient. The arrow adjacent to thefuel pump symbol indicates on which sideof your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps andindicators will alert you to a vehiclecondition that may become serious. Somelamps will illuminate when you start yourvehicle to make sure they work. If anylamps remain on after starting your vehicle,refer to the respective system warninglamp for further information.Note: Some warning indicators appear inthe information display and function thesame as a warning lamp but do not displaywhen you start your vehicle.

Anti-lock Braking System WarningLamp

If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have the normal braking system(without anti-lock braking system) unlessthe brake system warning lamp is alsoilluminated. Have your vehicle checked byan authorized dealer.

Brake System Warning Lamp

E138644

It will illuminate when youengage the parking brake withthe ignition on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates low brake fluid level or a brakesystem malfunction. Have your vehiclechecked immediately by an authorizeddealer.

WARNINGDriving your vehicle with the warninglamp on is dangerous. A significantdecrease in braking performance

may occur. It will take you longer to stopyour vehicle. Have your vehicle checked byyour authorized dealer immediately. Drivingextended distances with the parking brakeengaged can cause brake failure and therisk of personal injury.

Cruise Control Indicator

E71340

It will illuminate when you switchthis feature on. See UsingCruise Control (page 142).

78


Instrument Cluster

Direction IndicatorIlluminates when the left or rightturn signal or the hazard warningflasher is turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check fora burnt out bulb. See Changing a Bulb(page 194).

Door Ajar Warning LampIlluminates when you switch theignition on and remains on if anydoor, the hood or the liftgate is

not closed properly.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Lamp

WARNINGDo not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have your vehicle checked

by a an authorized dealer immediately.

If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check thecoolant level. See Engine Coolant Check(page 183).

Engine Oil Warning LampWARNING

Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have your vehicle checked

by an authorized dealer immediately.

If it illuminates with the enginerunning or when you are driving,this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so and switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 182).

Engine Warning LampsMalfunction Indicator Lamp

Powertrain Warning Lamp

All VehiclesIf either lamp illuminates when the engineis running, this indicates a malfunction. Theengine will continue to run but it may havelimited power. If it flashes when you aredriving, reduce the speed of your vehicleimmediately. If it continues to flash, avoidheavy acceleration or deceleration. Haveyour vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer immediately.

WARNINGHave this checked immediately.

If both lamps illuminate together, stop yourvehicle as soon as it is safe to do so(continued use may cause reduced powerand cause the engine to stop). Switch theignition off and attempt to restart theengine. If the engine restarts have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealerimmediately. When the engine does notrestart have your vehicle checked beforecontinuing your journey.

79


Instrument Cluster

Front Airbag Warning LampIf it fails to illuminate when youstart your vehicle, continues toflash or remains on, it indicates

a malfunction. Have your vehicle checkedby an authorized dealer.

Front Fog Lamps IndicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe front fog lamps on.

Headlamp IndicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe headlamp dipped beam orthe side and tail lamps on.

High Beam IndicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe high beam headlamps on. Itwill flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Ignition Warning LampIf it illuminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical

equipment. Have your vehicle checked byan authorized dealer immediately.

Information IndicatorIt will illuminate when a newmessage is stored in theinformation display. See

Information Messages (page 89).

Low Fuel Level Warning LampIf it illuminates, refuel as soon aspossible.

Low Tire Pressure WarningIt will illuminate when your tirepressure is low. If the lampremains on with the enginerunning or when driving, check

your tire pressure as soon as possible.It will also illuminate momentarily whenyou switch the ignition on to confirm thelamp is functional. If it does not illuminatewhen you switch the ignition on, or beginsto flash at any time, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer.

Safety Belt Minder Warning LampIt will illuminate and a chime willsound to remind you to fastenyour safety belt. See Safety

Belt Minder (page 30).

Service Engine SoonIf it remains illuminated after youstart the engine, it indicates thatthe on board diagnostics system

has detected a malfunction to theemissions control system. See EmissionControl System (page 123).

If it flashes, engine misfire is occurringwhich could damage your catalyticconverter. Drive in a moderate fashion(avoid heavy acceleration anddeceleration) and have your vehicleserviced immediately.Note: Under engine misfire conditions,excessive exhaust temperatures coulddamage the catalytic converter or othervehicle components.The service engine soon indicator lightilluminates when you switch the ignitionon prior to engine start to check the bulband to indicate whether your vehicle isready for inspection maintenance testing.

80


Instrument Cluster

Normally, the lamp will remain on until theengine is cranked, then turn itself off if amalfunction is not present. However, ifafter 15 seconds the lamp flashes eighttimes, it means that your vehicle is notready for inspection maintenance testing.See Emission Control System (page 123).

Shift IndicatorIt will illuminate to inform youthat shifting to a higher gear maygive better fuel economy and

lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminateduring periods of high acceleration, brakingor when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Stability Control IndicatorWhile driving, it flashes when thesystem is operating. After youswitch the ignition on, if it does

not illuminate or illuminates continuouslywhile driving, this indicates a malfunction.During a malfunction, the system switchesoff. Have your vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

It will illuminate when you switch thesystem off. It will go out when you switchthe system back on or when you switch theignition off.

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORS - 1.6LECOBOOST™The following warning lamps andindicators will alert you to a vehiclecondition that may become serious. Somelamps will illuminate when you start yourvehicle to make sure they work. If anylamps remain on after starting your vehicle,refer to the respective system warninglamp for further information.

Note: Some warning indicators appear inthe information display and function thesame as a warning lamp but do not displaywhen you start your vehicle.

Anti-lock Braking System WarningLamp

If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have the normal braking system(without anti-lock braking system) unlessthe brake system warning lamp is alsoilluminated. Have your vehicle checked byan authorized dealer.

Brake System Warning Lamp

E138644

It will illuminate when youengage the parking brake withthe ignition on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates low brake fluid level or a brakesystem malfunction. Have your vehiclechecked immediately by an authorizeddealer.

WARNINGDriving your vehicle with the warninglamp on is dangerous. A significantdecrease in braking performance

may occur. It will take you longer to stopyour vehicle. Have your vehicle checked byyour authorized dealer immediately. Drivingextended distances with the parking brakeengaged can cause brake failure and therisk of personal injury.

Cruise Control Indicator

E71340

It will illuminate when you switchthis feature on. See UsingCruise Control (page 142).

81


Instrument Cluster

Direction IndicatorIlluminates when the left or rightturn signal or the hazard warningflasher is turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check fora burnt out bulb. See Changing a Bulb(page 194).

Door Ajar Warning LampIlluminates when you switch theignition on and remains on if anydoor, the hood or the liftgate is

not closed properly.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Lamp

WARNINGDo not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have your vehicle checked

by a an authorized dealer immediately.

If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check thecoolant level. See Engine Coolant Check(page 183).

Engine Oil Warning LampWARNING

Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have your vehicle checked

by an authorized dealer immediately.

If it illuminates with the enginerunning or when you are driving,this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so and switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 182).

Engine Warning LampsMalfunction Indicator Lamp

Powertrain Warning Lamp

All VehiclesIf either lamp illuminates when the engineis running, this indicates a malfunction. Theengine will continue to run but it may havelimited power. If it flashes when you aredriving, reduce the speed of your vehicleimmediately. If it continues to flash, avoidheavy acceleration or deceleration. Haveyour vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer immediately.

WARNINGHave this checked immediately.

If both lamps illuminate together, stop yourvehicle as soon as it is safe to do so(continued use may cause reduced powerand cause the engine to stop). Switch theignition off and attempt to restart theengine. If the engine restarts have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealerimmediately. When the engine does notrestart have your vehicle checked beforecontinuing your journey.

82


Instrument Cluster

Front Airbag Warning LampIf it fails to illuminate when youstart your vehicle, continues toflash or remains on, it indicates

a malfunction. Have your vehicle checkedby an authorized dealer.

Front Fog Lamps IndicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe front fog lamps on.

Headlamp IndicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe headlamp dipped beam orthe side and tail lamps on.

High Beam IndicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe high beam headlamps on. Itwill flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Ignition Warning LampIf it illuminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical

equipment. Have your vehicle checked byan authorized dealer immediately.

Information IndicatorIt will illuminate when a newmessage is stored in theinformation display. See

Information Messages (page 89).

Low Fuel Level Warning LampIf it illuminates, refuel as soon aspossible.

Low Tire Pressure WarningIt will illuminate when your tirepressure is low. If the lampremains on with the enginerunning or when driving, check

your tire pressure as soon as possible.It will also illuminate momentarily whenyou switch the ignition on to confirm thelamp is functional. If it does not illuminatewhen you switch the ignition on, or beginsto flash at any time, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer.

Safety Belt Minder Warning LampIt will illuminate and a chime willsound to remind you to fastenyour safety belt. See Safety

Belt Minder (page 30).

Service Engine SoonIf it remains illuminated after youstart the engine, it indicates thatthe on board diagnostics system

has detected a malfunction to theemissions control system. See EmissionControl System (page 123).

If it flashes, engine misfire is occurringwhich could damage your catalyticconverter. Drive in a moderate fashion(avoid heavy acceleration anddeceleration) and have your vehicleserviced immediately.Note: Under engine misfire conditions,excessive exhaust temperatures coulddamage the catalytic converter or othervehicle components.The service engine soon indicator lightilluminates when you switch the ignitionon prior to engine start to check the bulband to indicate whether your vehicle isready for inspection maintenance testing.

83


Instrument Cluster

Normally, the lamp will remain on until theengine is cranked, then turn itself off if amalfunction is not present. However, ifafter 15 seconds the lamp flashes eighttimes, it means that your vehicle is notready for inspection maintenance testing.See Emission Control System (page 123).

Shift IndicatorIt will illuminate to inform youthat shifting to a higher gear maygive better fuel economy and

lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminateduring periods of high acceleration, brakingor when the clutch pedal is pressed.

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSAutomatic TransmissionSounds when you open the driver's doorand do not move the transmission selectorlever to position P.

Key Outside CarVehicles With Keyless SystemSounds when you close the door, theengine is running and the system does notdetect a passive key inside your vehicle.

Headlamps OnSounds when you remove the key from theignition and open the driver's door and youhave left the headlamps or parking lampson.

Low FuelA warning chime will sound when theremaining fuel is less than approximately1.3 gallons (6 liters). The distance to emptydisplayed may vary depending on drivingstyle and road conditions.

Safety Belt MinderWARNINGS

The safety belt minder remains instand-by mode when the front safetybelts have been fastened. It will

sound if either safety belt is unfastened.Do not sit on top of a fastened safetybelt to prevent the safety belt minderfrom coming on. The occupant

protection system will only provideoptimum protection when you use thesafety belt properly.

Sounds when your vehicle speed exceedsthe pre-determined limit and the frontsafety belts are unfastened. The chime willstop after a period of time.

84


Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION



Note: The information display will remainon for several minutes after you switch theignition off.

Device ListThe icon changes to show the currentfunction in use.

CD

Radio

Auxiliary input

Information Display Controls

E103626

Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the information displaycontrols on your audio unit. Correspondinginformation is displayed in the informationdisplay.To use the controls:• Press the up or down arrow button to

scroll through and highlight the optionswithin a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asubmenu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit asubmenu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button atany time to return to the main menudisplay.

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm settings or messages.

Menu Structure - InformationDisplayYou can access the menu using theinformation display control.Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.SYNC-Media allows you to access theSYNC® features.

85


Information Displays

SYNC-Phone

Dial a number

Redial

Phonebook

Call history

Speed Dial

Text messaging

BT Devices

Phone settings

Menu

Ford EcoMode

Bluetooth onSYNC-Settings

Set defaults

Master reset

Install on SYNC

System info

Voice settings

SYNC-Apps

Route optionsNavigation

Map display

Assistance options

Personal data

Reset all settings

Adaptive volumeAudio settings

Sound

NAV audio mixing

86



Menu

DSP settings

DSP equalizer

Traffic

News

Alt. frequency

RDS Regional

Traction ControlVehicle settings

ESC

Hill start assist

Alarm system

Powerfold mirrors

Indicator

Ambient light

Chimes

Auto time (GPS)Clock settings

Set time

Set date

Set time zone

24-hour mode

Measure UnitDisplay settings

Language

Dimming

create MyKeyMyKey

Traction control

ESC

Speed limit

Speed warning

87



Menu

Volume limit

Information

clear all MyKeys

InformationMyKey active

System CheckAll active warnings will display first ifapplicable. The system check menu mayappear different based upon equipmentoptions and current vehicle status. Pressthe up or down arrow button to scrollthrough the list.

CLOCKType 1To adjust the clock, switch the ignition onand press buttons H or M on theinformation and entertainment display asnecessary.

Type 2Note: Use the information display to adjustthe clock. See General Information (page85).

TRIP COMPUTER

E102759

Press the button to scroll through thedisplays.

You can reset the trip, averagefuel consumption and averagespeed. Scroll to the required

display, then press and hold the button,this will reset the trip computer.

The trip computer includes the followinginformation displays:

Trip OdometerRegisters the distance traveledof individual journeys.

Distance to Empty

E164638 EIndicates the approximatedistance your vehicle will travelon the fuel remaining in the tank.The distance to empty displayedmay vary depending on drivingstyle and road conditions.

Average Fuel ConsumptionIndicates the average fuelconsumption since the functionwas last reset.

88



Average SpeedIndicates the average speedcalculated since the functionwas last reset.

Distance OdometerRegisters the total distance yourvehicle has traveled.

PERSONALIZED SETTINGSMeasure UnitsTo swap between imperial and metricunits, scroll to this display and press theOK button.Swapping between imperial and metricunits will affect the following displays:• Distance to empty.• Average fuel consumption.• Instantaneous fuel consumption.• Average speed.

Switching Chimes OffTo switch chimes off, scroll to this displayand press the OK button.

The following chimes can be switched off:• Warning messages.• Information messages.

INFORMATION MESSAGESNote: Depending on the options on yourvehicle, not all of the messages will displayor be available. Certain messages may beabbreviated or shortened depending uponwhich cluster type you have.

E103626

Press the OK button to acknowledge andremove some messages from theinformation display. Other messages willbe removed automatically after a shorttime.Certain messages need to be confirmedbefore you can access the menus.

The message indicatorilluminates to supplement somemessages. It will be red or amber

depending on the severity of the messageand will remain on until the cause of themessage has been rectified.Some messages will be supplemented bya system specific symbol with a messageindicator.

89



Airbag

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Have the system checked by anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible.

AmberAirbag malfunction Service now

Alarm


See Security (page 60).AmberAlarm triggered Check vehicle

See Security (page 60).AmberInterior scan deactivated

Have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.-Alarm system malfunction Service

required

Doors Open


Vehicle is moving. Stop your vehicleas soon as safely possible andclose.

RedDriver door open


RedDriver side rear door open


RedPassenger door open


RedPassenger side rear door open


RedTrunk open

90




Vehicle is moving. Stop your vehicleas soon as safely possible andclose. See Opening and Closingthe Hood (page 177).

RedHood open

Vehicle not moving. Close.AmberDriver door open

Vehicle not moving. Close.AmberDriver side rear door open

Vehicle not moving. Close.AmberPassenger door open

Vehicle not moving. Close.AmberPassenger side rear door open

Vehicle not moving. Close.AmberTrunk open

Vehicle not moving. Close. SeeOpening and Closing the Hood(page 177).

AmberHood open

Engine Immobilizer



RedImmobilizer malfunction Servicenow

Hill Start Assist


See Hill Start Assist (page 132).AmberHill start assist not available

Keyless System


See Keyless Entry (page 56).AmberKey not detected

See Keyless Entry (page 56).AmberKey outside car

See Remote Control (page 43).AmberKey Battery low Replace battery

91




See Keyless Starting (page 113).AmberSwitch ign. off Press ENGINE Start/Stop button

See Keyless Starting (page 113).-Press brake to start

See Keyless Starting (page 113).-Press clutch to start

See Keyless Entry (page 56).-Close trunk or use spare key

Lighting


See Changing a Bulb (page 194).-Left indicator malfunction Changebulb

See Changing a Bulb (page 194).-Right indicator malfunction Changebulb

Maintenance


See Brake Fluid Check (page 185).RedBrake fluid level low Service now

Have the system checked by anauthorized dealer immediately.RedBrake system malfunction Stop

safely

See Engine Oil Check (page 182).RedEngine oil pressure low Stop safely


AmberEngine malfunction Service now

Have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.-Engine oil change due Service

required

92



MyKey


Displays when a MyKey is in use andthe MyKey speed limit is on and yourvehicle speed is approaching 80mph (130 km/h).

AmberMyKey Vehicle at top speed

Displays when MyKey is active.-MyKey active Drive safely

Displays when starting your vehicleand MyKey is in use and the MyKeyspeed limit is on.

-MyKey Speed limited to <XX> mph

Displays when starting your vehicleand MyKey is in use and the MyKeyspeed limit is on.

-MyKey Speed limited to <XXX> km/h

Displays when MyKey is active.-MyKey check speed Drive safely

Displays when a MyKey is in use andthe MyKey speed limit is reached.-MyKey vehicle near top speed

Displays when a MyKey is in use andBelt- Minder is activated.-MyKey Buckle up to unmute audio

Displays when a MyKey is in use andpark aid is activated.-MyKey Park aid cannot be deactiv-

ated

Displays when programming aMyKey.-MyKey ESC cannot be deactivated

Parking Brake


See Parking Brake (page 134).RedPark brake applied

See Parking Brake (page 134).AmberPark brake applied

93



Stability Control


See Using Stability Control (page137).AmberElectronic stability control off


AmberABS malfunction Service Now

See Using Stability Control (page137).-Traction control off

See Using Stability Control (page137).-Sport mode

See Using Stability Control (page137).-Electronic stability control off

Starting and Stopping the Engine


See Starting and Stopping theEngine (page 113).-Press brake to start

See Starting and Stopping theEngine (page 113).-Press clutch to start

See Starting and Stopping theEngine (page 113).-Press brake and clutch to start

See Starting and Stopping theEngine (page 113).-Cranking time exceeded

Steering


Full steering will be maintained butyou will need to exert greater forceon the steering wheel. Have thesystem checked by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

AmberSteering assist fault Servicerequired

94



Tire pressure monitoring system


The pressure in one or more tireshas dropped. Check as soon aspossible.

AmberCheck tire pressures

Permanent malfunction. Have yourvehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

AmberTire Pressure Monitor Fault

Transmission


Have the system checked by anauthorized dealer immediately.RedTransmission malfunction Service

now

Under certain driving conditions it ispossible that the clutches in thetransmission can overheat. In thesecircumstances it is necessary topress the brake pedal and stop yourvehicle to prevent damage to theRedTransmission overtemperature Stop

safely transmission. Move the transmis-sion selector lever to position N orP and apply the parking brake untilthe transmission has cooled and themessage disappears from thedisplay.

Have the system checked by anauthorized dealer immediately.RedUse brake Stop safely

See Automatic Transmission(page 128). See Starting andStopping the Engine (page 113).

-Vehicle not in Park Select P


-Select N or P to start

See Starting and Stopping theEngine (page 113).-Press brake to start

95





-Select N to start


-Door open Apply brake

Transmission is getting hot. Stop tolet it cool or speed up.-Transmission hot Stop or speed up

Transmission is hot. Wait as neededto let it cool.-Transmission hot Wait...

Your vehicle is ready to drive.-Transmission ready


-Press brake to unlock gearshift lever


-Gearshift lever unlocked


-Transmission not in Park

96



PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONOutside AirKeep the air intakes in front of thewindshield free from obstruction (such assnow or leaves) to allow the climatecontrol system to function effectively.

Recirculated AirWARNING

Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings

for demisting the windshield.

The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. Outside air doesnot enter your vehicle.

HeatingHeating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.

Air ConditioningNote: The air conditioning operates onlywhen the temperature is above 39°F (4°C).Note: When you use air conditioning, yourvehicle uses more fuel.The system directs air through theevaporator for cooling. The evaporatorextracts humidity from the air to help keepthe windows free of mist. The systemdirects the resulting condensation to theoutside of your vehicle, which may causea small pool to form under your vehicle.This is normal.

General Information on Controllingthe Interior ClimateFully close all the windows.

Warming the InteriorDirect the air toward your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct some ofthe air toward the windshield and the doorwindows.

Cooling the InteriorDirect the air toward your face.

AIR VENTSCenter Air Vents

E147812

Side Air Vent

E71942

97


Climate Control

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

A B C D

F EE158234

Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjustto select the desired fan speed.

A

Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air distribution. If youselect MAX A/C the system distributes recirculated air through the instrumentpanel air vents. This mode is more economical and efficient than normal airconditioning. Select O to turn the system off.

B

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air andrecirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates andthe air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reducethe time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from enteringyour vehicle.

C

Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in yourvehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.

D

Heated rear window: Press the button to defog and clear the rear window ofa thin covering of ice.

E

Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Airconditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioningwhen starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to threeminutes.

F

98


Climate Control

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

A B C FD E

L K HIJ GE158263

Fan speed: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Rotate thecontrol to select the desired fan speed. The setting is shown in the display.

A

Instrument panel: Press the button to distribute air through the instrumentpanel air vents.

B

Windshield: Press the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents.You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin coveringof ice.

C

MAX Defrost: Press the button to distribute outside air through the windshieldair vents. Air conditioning is automatically selected. The fan is set to the highestspeed and the temperature to HI. When the air distribution is set in this position,you are unable to select recirculated air or manually adjust the fan speed andtemperature control. Press the AUTO button to return to auto mode.

D

MAX A/C: Press the button to distribute recirculated air through the instrumentpanel air vents. This mode is more economical and efficient than normal airconditioning.

E

Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in yourvehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.

F

99


Climate Control

Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Airconditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioningwhen starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to threeminutes.

G

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air andrecirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odorsfrom entering your vehicle.

H

Off button: Press the button to switch the system off.IHeated rear window: Press the button to defog and clear the rear window ofa thin covering of ice.

J

Footwell: Press the button to distribute air through the footwell air vents.KAUTO: Press the button to switch the system on and off. The systemautomatically controls the temperature, amount and distribution of the airflowto reach and maintain your previously selected temperature.

L

Temperature Control

E148690

You can set the temperature between 61°F(16°C) and 82°F (28°C). In position low,the system switches to permanent cooling.In position high, the system switches topermanent heating.Note: If you select either position low orhigh, the system will not regulate a stabletemperature.

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THEINTERIOR CLIMATEGeneral HintsNote: Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to fog up.Note: A small amount of air may be feltfrom the footwell air vents regardless of theair distribution setting.Note: To reduce humidity build-up insideyour vehicle, do not drive with the systemswitched off or with recirculated air alwaysswitched on.Note: Do not place objects under the frontseats as this may interfere with the airflowto the rear seats.Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves fromthe air intake area at the base of thewindshield.

100


Climate Control

Manual Climate ControlNote: To reduce fogging of the windshieldduring humid weather, adjust the airdistribution control to the windshield airvents position. Increase the temperatureand fan speed to improve clearing, ifrequired.

Automatic Climate ControlNote: Do not adjust the settings when yourvehicle interior is extremely hot or cold. Thesystem automatically adjusts to thepreviously stored settings. For the systemto function efficiently, the instrument paneland side air vents should be fully open.Note: At low ambient temperatures withAUTO selected, the air stream is directedtoward the windshield and side windowsfor as long as the engine remains cold.

Note: When the system is switched off,outside air is prevented from entering yourvehicle.Note: When you select AUTO mode andthe interior and exterior temperatures arehigh, the system automatically selectsrecirculated air to maximize cooling of theinterior. When the desired air temperatureis reached, the system automatically selectsoutside air.Note: When you select windshielddefrosting and defogging, the instrumentpanel and footwell level functionsautomatically switch off and air conditioningswitches on. Outside air flows into yourvehicle.

Heating the Interior Quickly

Vehicles With Automatic Climate ControlVehicles With Manual Climate Control

Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the highestsetting.

1

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting.

Adjust the temperature control to thehighest setting.

2

Adjust the air distribution control to thefootwell air vents position.

3

Recommended Settings for Heating


Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the secondsetting.

1



2

Adjust the air distribution control to thefootwell and windshield air vents posi-tion.

3

101


Climate Control

Cooling the Interior Quickly


Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the highestsetting.

1


Adjust the temperature control settingto MAX A/C.

2

Or, press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the air distribution control to theinstrument panel air vents position.

3

Recommended Settings for Cooling


Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the secondsetting.

1



2

Adjust the air distribution control to theinstrument panel air vents position.

3

Press the A/C button.4

Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods During Extreme High AmbientTemperatures


Apply the parking brake.Apply the parking brake.1

Move the transmission selector lever toposition P or neutral.

Move the transmission selector lever toposition P or neutral.

2

Press the AUTO button.Adjust the temperature control to theMAX A/C position.

3


Adjust the fan speed to the highestsetting.

4

102


Climate Control

Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather


Press the MAX defrost button.Adjust the fan speed to the highestsetting.

1


Adjust the temperature control to thehighest setting.

2

Adjust the air distribution control to thewindshield position.

3

Press the A/C button.4

Maximum Cooling Performance inInstrument Panel or InstrumentPanel and Footwell Positions1. Adjust the temperature control to the

lowest setting.2. Press the A/C and recirculated air

buttons.3. Adjust the fan speed to the highest

setting initially and then adjust it to suitthe desired comfort level.

HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORSHeated WindowsUse the heated windows to defrost ordemist the rear window.Note: The heated windows operate onlywhen the engine is running.

Heated Rear Window

E72507

Heated Exterior MirrorsElectric exterior mirrors have a heatingelement that will defrost or demist themirror glass. They will switch onautomatically when you switch the heatedrear window on.

CABIN AIR FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a cabin airfilter. It is located behind the centerconsole.The particulate filtration system reducesthe concentration of airborne particlessuch as dust, spores and pollen in the airsupplied to the interior of your vehicle.Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filterinstalled at all times. This prevents foreignobjects from entering the system. Runningthe system without a filter in place couldresult in degradation or damage to thesystem.

103


Climate Control

The particulate filtration system gives youand your passengers the followingbenefits:• It improves your driving comfort by

reducing particle concentration.• It improves the interior compartment

cleanliness.• It protects the climate control

components from particle deposits.Replace the filter at regular intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 371).For additional cabin air filter information,or to replace the filter, see an authorizeddealer.

104


Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

WARNINGSDo not recline the seatback too faras this can cause the occupant toslide under the safety belt, resulting

in serious injury in the event of a collision.Sitting improperly, out of position orwith the seatback reclined too far,can result in serious injury or death

in the event of a collision. Always situpright against your seatback, with yourfeet on the floor.

Do not place objects higher than theseatback to reduce the risk of seriousinjury in the event of a collision or

during heavy braking.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, safety belt and air bags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a collision.

We recommend that you follow theseguidelines:• Sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.• Do not recline the seatback more than

30 degrees.

• Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forward as possible.Make sure that you remaincomfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 10 inches(25 centimeters) between yourbreastbone and the air bag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of thesafety belt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap straptightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNINGSFully adjust the head restraint beforeyou sit in or operate your vehicle. Thiswill help minimize the risk of neck

injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjustthe head restraint when your vehicle ismoving.

The head restraint is a safety device.Whenever possible it should beinstalled and properly adjusted when

the seat is occupied. An improperlyadjusted head restraint may notadequately protect an occupant during animpact from the rear.

Install the head restraint properly tohelp minimize the risk of neck injuryin the event of a crash.

105


Seats

Note: Adjust the seat back to an uprightdriving position before adjusting the headrestraint. Adjust the head restraint so thatthe top of it is level with the top of your headand as far forward as possible. Make surethat you remain comfortable. If you areextremely tall, adjust the head restraint toits highest position.Front seat head restraint

E138642

Rear seat outboard head restraints

E138643

Rear center and outboard headrestraint

E138645

The head restraints consist of:

an energy absorbing headrestraint

A

two steel stemsBguide sleeve adjust and unlockbutton

C

guide sleeve unlock and removebutton

D

fold buttonE

Adjusting the Head RestraintRaising the Head RestraintPull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button C.2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint1. Pull the head restraint up until it

reaches its highest position.2. Press and hold buttons C and D.3. Pull the head restraint up.

106


Seats

Installing the Head RestraintAlign the steel stems into the guide sleevesand push the head restraint down until itlocks.

Folding the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button E.2. Pull it back up to reset.

Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)The front head restraints may have a tiltingfeature for extra comfort. To tilt the headrestraint, do the following:

E144727

1. Adjust the seat back to an uprightdriving or riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward towardyour head to the desired position.

After the head restraint reaches theforward-most tilt position, pivot it forwardagain to release it to the rearward, un-tiltedposition.

MANUAL SEATS

WARNINGDo not adjust the driver seat whenyour vehicle is moving. This mayresult in the loss of control of your

vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

Moving the Seat Backward andForward

WARNINGRock the seat backward and forwardafter releasing the lever to make surethat it is fully engaged in its catch. A

seat which is not fully engaged in its catchcould move when your vehicle is moving.This may result in the loss of control ofyour vehicle, serious personal injury ordeath.

E147926

107


Seats

Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If

Equipped)

E142199

Adjusting the Height of the DriverSeat

E70730

Recline Adjustment

E70731

REAR SEATSFolding the Seatback

WARNINGWhen folding the seatback down,take care not to get your handscaught between the seatback and

the frame, catches or mechanism. Failureto take care may result in personal injury.

Note: Fully lower the head restraints. Yourvehicle may have folding rear headrestraints. Fold these before you fold theseatback. See Head Restraints (page 105).

108


Seats

E156656

2

1 1

1. Press the unlock buttons down andhold them there.

2. Push the seatback forward.

E165362

3. Stow the safety belt in the beltstowage clip. This prevents the safetybelt from getting caught in the seatlatch.

Note: Do not attempt to fold the rear seatcushion forward.

Unfolding the SeatbackWARNINGS

When unfolding the seatback up,take care not to get your handscaught between the seatback and

the frame, catches or mechanism. Failureto take care may result in personal injury.

Make sure that any cargo or objectsare not trapped behind the seatback.Make sure the safety belts are not

trapped in any way when unfolding theseatback up. Failure of an occupant to beable to use a trapped safety belt increasesthe risk of serious personal injury or death.

Make sure that the seatback is fullyengaged in its catch. A seatbackwhich is not fully engaged in its catch

could move in the event of an accident.This may result in serious personal injuryor death.

HEATED SEATS

WARNINGSPeople who are unable to feel painto their skin because of advancedage, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal

cord injury, medication, alcohol or drug use,exhaustion or other physical conditions,must exercise extreme care when usingthe heated seat. The heated seat maycause burns even at low temperatures,especially if used for long periods of time.An overheated seat may cause seriouspersonal injury.

109


Seats

WARNINGSDo not place anything on the seatthat insulates against heat, forexample; blankets or cushions. This

may cause the heated seat to overheat.An overheated seat may cause seriouspersonal injury.

Do not puncture the seat with anysharp objects. This may damage theheating element which may cause

the heated seat to overheat. Anoverheated seat may cause seriouspersonal injury.

Do not place heavy objects on theseat. This may damage the heatingelement which may cause the

heated seat to overheat. An overheatedseat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not use the seat heater if anyliquid is spilled on the seat. This maydamage the heating element which

may cause the heated seat to overheat.Allow the seat to dry thoroughly beforereusing the seat heater. An overheatedseat may cause serious personal injury.

Note: The heated seats include both aheated seat cushion and heated seatback.

E156657

Press the required switch to turnthe seat heating on. The lampinside the switch will illuminate.

Press the switch again to turn the seatheating off.

The seat heaters will only turn on with theignition turned on.Note: You should avoid using the seatheaters unless the engine is running. Usingthe seat heaters without the engine runningcould drain your vehicle battery.The heated seat will remain turned on untileither the heated seat switch or the ignitionis turned off.

110


Seats

12 Volt DC Power PointWARNING

Do not plug optional electricalaccessories into the cigar lightersocket. Incorrect use of the lighter

can cause damage not covered by yourwarranty, and can result in fire or seriousinjury.

Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 voltappliances with a maximum current ratingof 20 amps.After you switch the ignition off the powersupply will only work for a maximum of 30minutes.Note: Do not insert objects other than anaccessory plug into the power point. Thiswill damage the outlet and blow the fuse.Note: Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug.Note: Do not use the power point over thevehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watt or afuse may blow.Note: Do not use the power point foroperating a cigar lighter element.Note: Incorrect use of the power point cancause damage not covered by yourwarranty.Note: Always keep the power point capsclosed when not in use.Run the engine for full capacity use of thepower point.To prevent the battery from running out ofcharge:• Do not use the power point longer than

necessary when the engine is notrunning.

• Do not leave devices plugged inovernight or when your vehicle isparked for extended periods.

LocationPower points may be found:• on the center console• on the rear of the center console.

CIGAR LIGHTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: Do not hold the cigar lighter elementpressed in.Note: If you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery may lose charge.Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 voltappliances with a maximum current ratingof 20 amps.Note: After you switch the ignition off thepower supply will only work for a maximumof 30 minutes.Note: Use only Ford accessory connectorsor connectors specified for use with SAEstandard sockets.

E103382

Press the element in to use the cigarlighter. It will pop out automatically.

111


Auxiliary Power Points

CUP HOLDERS

WARNINGDo not place hot drinks in the cupholders when your vehicle is moving.

112


Storage Compartments

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSExtended idling at high enginespeeds can produce very hightemperatures in the engine and

exhaust system, creating the risk of fire orother damage.

Do not park, idle or drive your vehicleon dry grass or other dry groundcover. The emission system heats up

the engine compartment and exhaustsystem, creating the risk of fire.

Do not start the engine in a closedgarage or in other enclosed areas.Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always

open the garage door before you start theengine.

If you smell exhaust fumes insideyour vehicle, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer

immediately. Do not drive your vehicle ifyou smell exhaust fumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approximately 5 miles(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. Thisis because the engine management systemmust realign itself with the engine. You candisregard any unusual drivingcharacteristics during this period.The powertrain control system meets allCanadian interference-causing equipmentstandard requirements regulating theimpulse electrical field or radio noise.When you start the engine, avoid pressingthe accelerator pedal before and duringoperation. Only use the accelerator pedalwhen you have difficulty starting theengine.

IGNITION SWITCH

E72128

0 (off) - The ignition is off.Note: When you switch the ignition off andleave your vehicle, do not leave your key inthe ignition. This could cause your vehiclebattery to lose charge.Note: To switch the engine off when yourvehicle is moving, move the transmissionselector lever to position N. Use the brakesto bring the vehicle to a safe stop. After yourvehicle has stopped, switch the engine offand move the transmission selector lever toposition P. Turn the key to position 0 or I.I (accessory) - Allows the electricalaccessories such as the radio to operatewhile the engine is not running.Note: Do not leave the ignition key in thisposition for too long. This could cause yourvehicle battery to lose charge.II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.Warning lamps and indicators areilluminated.III (start) - cranks the engine. Release thekey as soon as the engine starts.

KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGThe system may not function if thekey is close to metal objects orelectronic devices such as cell

phones.

113



Note: The ignition will automatically switchoff when you leave your vehicle unattended.This is to prevent your vehicle batteryrunning out of charge.Note: A valid key must be located insideyour vehicle to switch the ignition on andstart the engine.

Ignition OnPress the START button once. It is locatedon the instrument panel near the steeringwheel. All electrical circuits andaccessories are operational and thewarning lamps and indicators willilluminate.

E142555

Starting with ManualTransmissionNote: Releasing the clutch pedal while theengine is starting will stop the enginecranking and return to ignition on.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Briefly press the button.

Starting with AutomaticTransmissionNote: Releasing the brake pedal while theengine is starting will stop the enginecranking and return to ignition on.1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P or N.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Briefly press the button.

Failure to StartAll VehiclesThe system will not function if:• The key frequencies are jammed.• The key battery has no charge.If you are unable to start your vehicle, dothe following.

E99666

1. Hold the key next to the steeringcolumn exactly as shown.

2. With the key in this position you canuse the button to switch the ignition onand start your engine.

Manual TransmissionNote: Releasing the clutch pedal while theengine is starting will stop the enginecranking and return to ignition on. Amessage will be shown in the display.If the engine does not crank when theclutch pedal has been fully depressed andthe button is pressed:1. Fully depress both the clutch and brake

pedals.2. Press the button until the engine starts.

114



Stopping the Engine with YourVehicle StationaryNote: The ignition, all electrical circuitswarning lamps and indicators will beswitched off.

Manual TransmissionBriefly press the button.

Automatic Transmission1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.2. Press the button.

Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not lock, but higher effortwill be required. With the ignition switchedoff some electrical circuits, warning lampsand indicators may also be off.

1. Press and hold the button for at leastone second or press it three timeswithin two seconds.

2. Move the transmission selector leverto position N and use the brakes tobring your vehicle to a safe stop.

3. When your vehicle has stopped, movethe transmission selector lever toposition P or N and switch the ignitionoff.

STARTING A GASOLINEENGINENote: You can only operate the starter fora limited period of time, for example 10seconds. The number of start attempts islimited to approximately six. If you exceedthis limit, the system will not allow you totry again until a period of time has elapsed,for example 30 minutes.When you start the engine, the idle speedincreases, this helps to warm up theengine. If the engine idle speed does notslow down automatically, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealer.Before starting the engine check thefollowing:• Make sure all occupants have fastened

their safety belts.• Make sure the headlamps and

electrical accessories are off.• Make sure the parking brake is on.• Move the transmission selector lever

to position P (automatic transmission)or neutral (manual transmission).

• Turn the ignition key to position II. Ifyour vehicle is equipped with a keylessignition, see the following instructions.

Cold or Hot EngineVehicles with Manual TransmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while theengine is starting will stop the enginecranking and return to ignition on.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with Automatic TransmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

115



1. Move the transmission selector leverto position P or N.

2. Start the engine.

All VehiclesIf the engine does not start within 10seconds, wait for a short period and tryagain.If the engine does not start after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow theflooded engine procedure.If you have difficulty starting the enginewhen the temperature is below -13°F(-25°C), press the accelerator pedal to themid-way point of its travel and try again.

Flooded EngineVehicles with Manual Transmission1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.3. Start the engine.

Vehicles with Automatic Transmission1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P or N.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.3. Start the engine.

All VehiclesIf the engine does not start, repeat the coldor hot engine procedure.

Engine Idle Speed after StartingThe speed at which the engine idlesimmediately after starting is optimized tominimize vehicle emissions and maximizecabin comfort and fuel economy.

The idle speed will vary depending oncertain factors. These include vehiclecomponent and ambient temperatures aswell as electrical and climate systemdemands.

Failure to StartVehicles with Manual TransmissionIf the engine does not crank when theclutch pedal has been fully depressed andthe ignition key is turned to position III.1. Fully depress the clutch and brake

pedals.2. Turn the key to position III until the

engine has started.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEVehicles With a Turbocharger

WARNINGDo not switch the engine off when itis running at high speed. If you do, theturbocharger will continue running

after the engine oil pressure has droppedto zero. This will lead to prematureturbocharger bearing wear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed and thenswitch it off.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNINGSFailure to follow engine block heaterinstructions could result in propertydamage or serious personal injury.

116



WARNINGSDo not use your heater withungrounded electrical systems ortwo-pronged adapters. There is a risk

of electrical shock.

Note: The heater is most effective whenoutdoor temperatures are below 0°F(-18°C).The heater acts as a starting aid bywarming the engine coolant. This allowsthe climate control system to respondquickly. The equipment includes a heaterelement (installed in the engine block) anda wire harness. You can connect thesystem to a grounded 120-volt ACelectrical source.We recommend that you do the followingfor a safe and correct operation:• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord

that is product certified byUnderwriter’s Laboratory (UL) orCanadian Standards Association(CSA). This extension cord must besuitable for use outdoors, in coldtemperatures, and be clearly markedSuitable for Use with OutdoorAppliances. Do not use an indoorextension cord outdoors. This couldresult in an electric shock or become afire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord aspossible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.• Make sure that when in operation, the

extension cord plug and heater cordplug connections are free and clear ofwater. This could cause an electricshock or fire.

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in aclean area, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord andextension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in theelectrical hookup once the system hasbeen operating for approximately 30minutes.

• Make sure the system is unplugged andproperly stowed before driving yourvehicle. Make sure the protective coverseals the prongs of the block heatercord plug when not in use.

• Make sure the heater system ischecked for proper operation beforewinter.

Using the Engine Block HeaterMake sure the receptacle terminals areclean and dry prior to use. Clean them witha dry cloth if necessary.The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hoursof energy per hour of use. The system doesnot have a thermostat. It achievesmaximum temperature afterapproximately three hours of operation.Using the heater longer than three hoursdoes not improve system performance andunnecessarily uses electricity.

117



SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGSDo not overfill the fuel tank. Thepressure in an overfilled tank maycause leakage and lead to fuel spray

and fire.The fuel system may be underpressure. If you hear a hissing soundnear the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel

capless fuel system), do not refuel untilthe sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may sprayout, which could cause serious personalinjury.

Automotive fuels can cause seriousinjury or death if misused ormishandled.The flow of fuel through a fuel pumpnozzle can produce static electricity,which can cause a fire if fuel is

pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.Fuel ethanol and gasoline maycontain benzene, which is acancer-causing agent.When refueling always shut theengine off and never allow sparks oropen flames near the filler neck.

Never smoke or use a cell phone whilerefueling. Fuel vapor is extremelyhazardous under certain conditions. Avoidinhaling excess fumes.

Observe the following guidelines whenhandling automotive fuel:• Extinguish all smoking materials and

any open flames before refueling yourvehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle beforerefueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful orfatal if swallowed. Fuel such asgasoline is highly toxic and ifswallowed can cause death orpermanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,call a physician immediately, even if nosymptoms are immediately apparent.The toxic effects of fuel may not bevisible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling toomuch fuel vapor of any kind can leadto eye and respiratory tract irritation.In severe cases, excessive or prolongedbreathing of fuel vapor can causeserious illness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. Iffuel is splashed in the eyes, removecontact lenses (if worn), flush withwater for 15 minutes and seek medicalattention. Failure to seek propermedical attention could lead topermanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbedthrough the skin. If fuel is splashed onthe skin, clothing or both, promptlyremove contaminated clothing andwash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Repeated or prolonged skincontact with fuel liquid or vapor causesskin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiramfor the treatment of alcoholism.Breathing gasoline vapors, or skincontact could cause an adversereaction. In sensitive individuals, seriouspersonal injury or sickness may result.If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptlywash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Consult a physician immediatelyif you experience an adverse reaction.

118


Fuel and Refueling

FUEL QUALITYChoosing the Right Fuel (GasolineVehicles)Use only unleaded gasoline or unleadedgasoline blended with a maximum of 15%ethanol in your gasoline vehicle.Do not use:• Fuels containing more than 15%

ethanol or E-85 fuel.• Fuels containing methanol.• Fuels containing metallic based

additives, including manganese-basedcompounds.

• Fuels containing the octane boosteradditive, methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl.

• Leaded fuel. The use of leaded fuel isprohibited by law.

Note: The use of any fuel other than therecommended fuel can cause powertraindamage, impair the emission control systemor cause loss of vehicle performance andrepairs may not be covered under warranty,.

Choosing the Right Fuel (FlexibleFuel Vehicles)Use only unleaded gasoline or unleadedgasoline blended with a maximum of 85%ethanol E-85 in your vehicle. Your vehiclewill have a yellow bezel placed over thefuel tank filler pipe.Do not use:• Fuels containing more than 85%

ethanol or E-100 fuel.• Fuels containing methanol.• Fuels containing metallic based

additives, including manganese-basedcompounds.

• Fuels containing the octane boosteradditive, methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl.

• Leaded fuel. The use of leaded fuel isprohibited by law.

Note: The use of any fuel other than therecommended fuel can cause powertraindamage, impair the emission control systemor cause loss of vehicle performance andrepairs may not be covered under warranty,.

Octane Recommendations1.6L EngineRegular unleaded gasoline with a pump(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 isrecommended. Some fuel stations offerfuels posted as regular with an octanerating below 87, particularly in high altitudeareas. Fuels with octane levels below 87are not recommended.

1.0L and 1.6L EcoBoost EnginesRegular unleaded gasoline with a pump(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 isrecommended. Some fuel stations offerfuels posted as regular with an octanerating below 87, particularly in high altitudeareas. Fuels with octane levels below 87are not recommended. Premium fuel willprovide improved performance and isrecommended for severe duty usage suchas trailer tow.Do not be concerned if your enginesometimes knocks lightly. However, if itknocks heavily while you are using fuel withthe recommended octane rating, see anauthorized dealer to prevent any enginedamage.

RUNNING OUT OF FUELAvoid running out of fuel because thissituation may have an adverse effect onpowertrain components.

119


Fuel and Refueling

If you have run out of fuel:• You may need to cycle the ignition from

off to on several times after refuelingto allow the fuel system to pump thefuel from the tank to the engine. Onrestarting, cranking time will take a fewseconds longer than normal. Withkeyless ignition, just start the engine.Crank time will be longer than usual.

• Normally, adding 1 gallon (4.6 liters) offuel is enough to restart the engine. Ifyour vehicle is out of fuel and on asteep grade, more than 1 gallon (4.6liters) may be required.

Refilling With a Portable FuelContainer

WARNINGSDo not insert the nozzle of portablefuel containers or aftermarketfunnels into the capless fuel system.

This could damage the fuel system and itsseal, and may cause fuel to run onto theground instead of filling the tank, whichcould result in serious personal injury.

Do not try to pry open or push openthe capless fuel system with foreignobjects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to youor others.

Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; theywill not work with the capless fuel systemand can damage it. The included funnel hasbeen specially designed to work safely withyour vehicle.When filling your vehicle’s fuel tank froma portable fuel container, use the funnelincluded with your vehicle.

E142668

1. Locate the plastic funnel in the rear ofthe vehicle, inside the loadcompartment.

2. Slowly insert the funnel into thecapless fuel system.

3. Fill your vehicle with fuel from theportable fuel container.

4. When done, clean the funnel orproperly dispose of it. Extra funnels canbe purchased from your authorizeddealer if you choose to dispose of thefunnel.

REFUELING

WARNINGSFuel vapor burns violently and a fuelfire can cause severe injuries.Read and follow all the instructionson the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling.Do not smoke if you are near fuel orrefueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smokingmaterials away from fuel.Stay outside your vehicle and do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling your vehicle. This is

against the law in some places.

120


Fuel and Refueling

WARNINGSKeep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.Do not use personal electronicdevices while refueling.

Use the following guidelines to avoidelectrostatic charge build-up when fillingan ungrounded fuel container:• Place approved fuel container on the

ground.• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in

the vehicle (including the cargo area).• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact

with the fuel container while filling.• Do not use a device that would hold

the fuel pump handle in the fill position.

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel SystemWARNING

The fuel system may be underpressure. If you hear a hissing soundnear the fuel filler door, do not refuel

until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel mayspray out, which could cause seriouspersonal injury.

When fueling your vehicle:1. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the

ignition off.2. Open the fuel filler door.

E156032

3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fullyinto the fuel system, and leave thenozzle fully inserted to open both doorsuntil you are done pumping. Holdhandle higher during insertion for easieraccess.

E154765

4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowlyremove the fuel filler nozzle—allowabout five to ten seconds afterpumping fuel before removing the fuelfiller nozzle. This allows residual fuelto drain back into the fuel tank and notspill onto the vehicle.

Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur ifoverfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill thetank to the point that the fuel is able tobypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilledfuel may run down the drain located belowand in front of the fuel filler door.

121


Fuel and Refueling

If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,a service engine warning lamp may appearon the instrument cluster.At the next opportunity, do the following:1. Safely pull off the road.2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the

ignition off.3. Open the fuel filler door and remove

any visible debris from the fuel fillopening.

4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or thefuel fill funnel provided with the vehicleseveral times to allow the inlet to closeproperly. This will dislodge any debrispreventing the inlet from sealing.

If this action corrects the problem, thewarning lamp may not reset immediately.It may take several driving cycles for thewarning lamp to turn off. A driving cycleconsists of an engine start-up (after fouror more hours with the engine off) followedby city or highway driving.

FUEL CONSUMPTIONNote: The amount of usable fuel in theempty reserve varies and should not berelied upon to increase driving range. Whenrefueling your vehicle after the fuel gaugeindicates empty, you might not be able torefuel the full amount of the advertisedcapacity of the fuel tank due to the emptyreserve still present in the tank.Empty reserve is the amount of fuelremaining in the tank after the fuel gaugeindicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel fordriving. The usable capacity of the fueltank is the amount of fuel that can be putinto the tank after the gauge indicatesempty. The advertised capacity is the totalfuel tank size – it is the combined usablecapacity plus the empty reserve.

Filling the TankFor consistent results when filling the fueltank:• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an

inaccurate reading results if the engineis left running.

• Use the same fill rate(low-medium-high) each time the tankis filled.

• Allow no more than two automaticclick-offs when filling.

Results are most accurate when the fillingmethod is consistent.

Calculating Fuel EconomyDo not measure fuel economy during thefirst 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) ofdriving (this is your engine’s break-inperiod); a more accurate measurement isobtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuelgauge readings are not accurate ways tomeasure fuel economy.1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record

the initial odometer reading.2. Each time you fill the tank, record the

amount of fuel added.3. After at least three to five tank fill ups,

fill the fuel tank and record the currentodometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer readingfrom the current odometer reading.

5. Calculate fuel economy by dividingmiles traveled by gallons used (ForMetric: Multiply liters used by 100, thendivide by kilometers traveled).

122


Fuel and Refueling

Keep a record for at least one month andrecord the type of driving (city or highway).This provides an accurate estimate of thevehicle’s fuel economy under currentdriving conditions. Additionally, keepingrecords during summer and winter showhow temperature impacts fuel economy.In general, lower temperatures mean lowerfuel economy.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNINGSDo not park, idle, or drive your vehiclein dry grass or other dry ground cover.The emission system heats up the

engine compartment and exhaust system,which can start a fire.

Exhaust leaks may result in entry ofharmful and potentially lethal fumesinto the passenger compartment. If

you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your dealer inspect yourvehicle immediately. Do not drive if yousmell exhaust fumes.

Your vehicle is equipped with variousemission control components and acatalytic converter that will enable yourvehicle to comply with applicable exhaustemission standards. To make sure that thecatalytic converter and other emissioncontrol components continue to workproperly:• Use only the specified fuel listed.• Avoid running out of fuel.• Do not turn off the ignition while your

vehicle is moving, especially at highspeeds.

• Have the items listed in scheduledmaintenance information performedaccording to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listedin scheduled maintenance information areessential to the life and performance ofyour vehicle and to its emissions system.If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraftor Ford-authorized parts for maintenancereplacements, or for service ofcomponents affecting emission control,such non-Ford parts should be theequivalent to genuine Ford Motor Companyparts in performance and durability.Illumination of the service engine soonindicator, charging system warning light orthe temperature warning light, fluid leaks,strange odors, smoke or loss of enginepower could indicate that the emissioncontrol system is not working properly.An improperly operating or damagedexhaust system may allow exhaust toenter the vehicle. Have a damaged orimproperly operating exhaust systeminspected and repaired immediately.Do not make any unauthorized changes toyour vehicle or engine. By law, vehicleowners and anyone who manufactures,repairs, services, sells, leases, tradesvehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehiclesare not permitted to intentionally removean emission control device or prevent itfrom working. Information about yourvehicle’s emission system is on the VehicleEmission Control Information Decallocated on or near the engine. This decalalso lists engine displacementPlease consult your warranty informationfor complete details.

123


Fuel and Refueling

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)Your vehicle is equipped with an on-boarddiagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitorsthe engine’s emission control system. Thissystem protects the environment byensuring that your vehicle continues tomeet government emission standards. TheOBD-II system also assists your authorizeddealer in properly servicing your vehicle.

When the service engine soonindicator illuminates, the OBD-IIsystem has detected a

malfunction. Temporary malfunctions maycause the service engine soon indicator toilluminate.

Examples of temporary malfunctions are:• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the

engine may misfire or run poorly• poor fuel quality or water in the

fuel—the engine may misfire or runpoorly

• the fuel fill inlet may not have beenproperly closed See Refueling (page120).

• driving through deep water—theelectrical system may be wet.

You can correct these temporarymalfunctions by filling the fuel tank withgood quality fuel, properly closing the fuelfill inlet or letting the electrical system dryout. After three driving cycles without theseor any other temporary malfunctionspresent, the service engine soon indicatorshould stay off the next time you start theengine. A driving cycle consists of a coldengine startup followed by mixedcity/highway driving. No additional vehicleservice is required.

If the service engine soon indicator remainson, have your vehicle serviced at the firstavailable opportunity. Although somemalfunctions detected by the OBD-II maynot have symptoms that are apparent,continued driving with the service enginesoon indicator on can result in increasedemissions, lower fuel economy, reducedengine and transmission smoothness, andlead to more costly repairs.

Readiness forInspection/Maintenance (I/M)TestingSome state/provincial and localgovernments may haveInspection/Maintenance (I/M) programsto inspect the emission control equipmenton your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from gettinga vehicle registration.

If the service engine soonindicator is on or the bulb doesnot work, you may need to have

the vehicle serviced. See On-BoardDiagnostics (OBD-II).

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test ifthe service engine soon indicator is on ornot working properly (bulb is burned out),or if the OBD-II system has determinedthat some of the emission control systemshave not been properly checked. In thiscase, your vehicle is not ready for I/Mtesting.If the vehicle’s engine or transmission hasjust been serviced, or the battery hasrecently run down or been replaced, theOBD-II system may indicate that thevehicle is not ready for I/M testing. Todetermine if the vehicle is ready for I/Mtesting, turn the ignition key to the onposition for 15 seconds without cranking

124


Fuel and Refueling

the engine. If the service engine soonindicator blinks eight times, it means thatthe vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; ifthe service engine soon indicator stays onsolid, it means that the vehicle is ready forI/M testing.The OBD-II system monitors the emissioncontrol system during normal driving. Acomplete check may take several days. Ifthe vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, youmay need to perform the following drivingcycle consisting of mixed city and highwaydriving:Drive on an expressway or highway for asteady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutesof stop-and-go driving with at least four30-second idle periods.Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eighthours without starting the engine. Then,start the engine and complete the abovedriving cycle. The engine must warm up toits normal operating temperature. Oncestarted, do not turn off the engine until theabove driving cycle is complete. If thevehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, youwill have to repeat the above driving cycle.

125


Fuel and Refueling

MANUAL TRANSMISSIONUsing the ClutchNote: Failure to fully depress the clutchpedal to the floor may cause increased shiftefforts, prematurely wear transmissioncomponents or damage the transmission.Note: Do not drive with your foot resting onthe clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal tohold your vehicle at a standstill whilewaiting on a hill. These actions will reducethe life of the clutch and could nullify aclutch warranty claim.

E157512

Manual transmission vehicles have astarter interlock that prevents cranking theengine unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed.

Starting Your Vehicle

WARNINGMake sure the floor mat is positionedcorrectly so that it does not interferewith the full extension of the clutch

pedal.

1. Make sure the parking brake is fully setand move the transmission selectorlever to the neutral position.

2. Fully depress the clutch pedal thenstart the engine.

3. Press the brake pedal and move thetransmission selector lever to first orreverse gear.

4. Release the parking brake and slowlyrelease the clutch pedal while slowlypressing on the accelerator.

During each shift, make sure you fullydepress the clutch pedal.

Recommended Shift SpeedsNote: Do not move the transmissionselector lever to first gear when your vehicleis moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h).This will damage the clutch.We recommend you change gearaccording to the following guide to achievethe best fuel economy for your vehicle.

Recommendedspeed

Shift from

15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2

24 mph (38 km/h)2 - 3

32 mph (51 km/h)3 - 4

43 mph (70 km/h)4 - 5

ReverseNote: Do not move the transmissionselector lever to reverse gear when yourvehicle is moving. This can cause damageto the transmission.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal to

disengage clutch.2. Move the transmission selector lever

to the neutral position and wait at leastthree seconds before moving it toreverse.

126


Transmission

If reverse gear is not fully engaged, pressthe clutch pedal down and move thetransmission selector lever to the neutralposition. Release the clutch pedal for amoment, depress the clutch again andthen move the transmission selector leverto reverse.

Parking Your VehicleWARNING

Do not park your vehicle with thetransmission selector lever in theneutral position. Your vehicle may

move unexpectedly and injure someone.Move the transmission selector lever tofirst gear and set the parking brake fully.

To park your vehicle:1. Press the brake pedal and move the

transmission selector lever to theneutral position.

2. Fully apply the parking brake, hold theclutch pedal down, then move thetransmission selector lever to first gear.

3. Switch the ignition off.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION -1.6L ECOBOOST™Using the ClutchNote: Failure to fully depress the clutchpedal to the floor may cause increased shiftefforts, prematurely wear transmissioncomponents or damage the transmission.Note: Do not drive with your foot resting onthe clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal tohold your vehicle at a standstill whilewaiting on a hill. These actions will reducethe life of the clutch and could nullify aclutch warranty claim.

E144954

Manual transmission vehicles have astarter interlock that prevents cranking theengine unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed.

Starting Your Vehicle

WARNINGMake sure the floor mat is positionedcorrectly so that it does not interferewith the full extension of the clutch

pedal.

1. Make sure the parking brake is fully setand move the transmission selectorlever to the neutral position.

2. Fully depress the clutch pedal thenstart the engine.

3. Press the brake pedal and move thetransmission selector lever to first orreverse gear.

4. Release the parking brake and slowlyrelease the clutch pedal while slowlypressing on the accelerator.

During each shift, make sure you fullydepress the clutch pedal.

Recommended Shift SpeedsNote: Do not move the transmissionselector lever to first gear when your vehicleis moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h).This will damage the clutch.

127


Transmission

We recommend you change gearsaccording to the following guide to achievethe best fuel economy for your vehicle.

Recommendedspeed

Shift from

12 mph (19 km/h)1 - 2

23 mph (37 km/h)2 - 3

32 mph (51 km/h)3 - 4

41 mph (66 km/h)4 - 5

42 mph (67 km/h)5 - 6

ReverseNote: Do not move the transmissionselector lever to reverse gear when yourvehicle is moving. This can cause damageto the transmission.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal to

disengage the clutch.2. Move the transmission selector lever

to the neutral position and wait at leastthree seconds before moving it toreverse.

3. Raise the collar below the transmissionselector lever to select reverse gear.

Note: This is a lockout feature whichprotects the transmission from accidentallyengaging reverse gear when intending toselect first gear.

E99067

If reverse gear is not fully engaged, pressthe clutch pedal down and move thetransmission selector lever to the neutralposition. Release the clutch pedal for amoment, then raise the collar and movethe transmission selector lever to reverseagain.

Parking Your VehicleWARNING

Do not park your vehicle with thetransmission selector lever in theneutral position. Your vehicle may

move unexpectedly and injure someone.Move the transmission selector lever tofirst gear and set the parking brake fully.

To park your vehicle:1. Press the brake pedal and move the

transmission selector lever to theneutral position.

2. Fully apply the parking brake, hold theclutch pedal down, then move thetransmission selector lever to first gear.

3. Switch the ignition off.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNINGSAlways set the parking brake fullyand make sure the gearshift islatched in P (Park). Turn the ignition

to the off position and remove the keywhenever you leave your vehicle.

Do not apply the brake andaccelerator pedals simultaneouslyfor more than three seconds as this

limits engine rpm and labors thetransmission. This may result in difficultymaintaining speed in traffic and could leadto serious injury.

128


Transmission

Note: When you switch the ignition off, thetransmission will carry out a series of checks.You may hear slight clicking sounds. This isnormal.We have designed your vehicle to improvefuel economy by reducing fuel usagecompared to a traditional torque converterautomatic transmission. When you takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal andyour vehicle begins to slow down, this canfeel like a light to medium brakingsensation.

Selector Lever PositionsWARNING

You must press the brake pedal toapply the brakes before moving thetransmission selector lever. Failure

to keep the brakes applied until you areready to move off may lead to an accidentor injury.

E161746

ParkPReverseRNeutralNDriveDSport mode or manual shiftingS

Manual shift up+Manual shift down-

Press the button on the front of thetransmission selector lever to change toeach position.The transmission selector lever positionwill be shown in the information display.

P (Park)

WARNINGSYou must only select P when yourvehicle is stationary. Selecting Pwhen your vehicle is moving will

damage the transmission and may lead toan accident or injury.

You must move the transmissionselector lever to position P and fullyapply the parking brake before you

leave your vehicle. Failure to leave yourvehicle securely parked may lead to anaccident or injury.

Your vehicle will not move while thetransmission selector lever is in P. You canstart the engine with the transmissionselector lever in this position.Note: An audible warning will sound if youopen the driver's door and you have notmoved the transmission selector lever topark.

R (Reverse)

WARNINGYou must only select R when yourvehicle is stationary and the engineis at idle speed. Selecting R when

your vehicle is moving or at a high enginespeed will damage the transmission orlead to an accident or injury.

129


Transmission

With the transmission selector lever in R,power is transmitted to the drive wheelsto allow your vehicle to move backward.You cannot start the engine with thetransmission selector lever in this position.Note: Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting the transmission selectorlever out of reverse.

N (Neutral)With the transmission selector lever in N,power is not transmitted to the drivewheels and the transmission is not locked,it is possible your vehicle will move if thebrakes are not applied. You can start theengine with the transmission selector leverin this position.

D (Drive)With the transmission selector lever in D,your vehicle will shift automaticallythrough the forward gears. You cannotstart the engine with the transmissionselector lever in this position.The transmission will select theappropriate gear for optimum vehicleperformance and economy based onambient temperature, road gradient,vehicle load, speed and your driving style.When you use Drive mode it provides adownshift function. See Downshift in thissection.Note: A shift will occur only when yourvehicle and engine speeds are appropriate.

Sport Mode and Manual ShiftingSport ModeWith the transmission selector lever in S,gears are selected quicker and at higherengine speeds. You cannot start the enginewith the transmission selector lever in thisposition.

Sport mode will remain on until you eithershift manually up or down the gears usingthe + or - buttons on the side of thetransmission selector lever or you movethe transmission selector lever to drive.When you use Sport mode it provides adownshift function. See Downshift in thissection.

Manual Shifting

WARNINGDo not permanently hold the + or -buttons in. This may damage thetransmission and may lead to an

accident or injury.

Press the + button to shift up and the -button to shift down.Gears may be skipped by pressing the + or- buttons repeatedly at short intervals.We recommend you upshift according tothe following guide to achieve the best fueleconomy for your vehicle.

RecommendedSpeed

Shift From

15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2

25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3

40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4

45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5

50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6

Manual mode also provides a downshiftfunction. See Downshift in this section.Note: The transmission will automaticallyupshift if the engine speed is too high ordownshift if the engine speed is too low.

130


Transmission

Hints on Driving with an AutomaticTransmission

WARNINGSDo not apply the brake andaccelerator pedals simultaneouslyfor more than three seconds as this

limits engine rpm and labors thetransmission. This may make it difficult tomaintain speeds in traffic and lead to anaccident or injury.

Do not idle the engine for longperiods of time in D with the brakesapplied. This could damage the

transmission and may lead to an accidentor injury.

Note: The system carries out a series ofchecks when you switch the ignition on andoff. You may hear clicking sounds. This isnormal.

Moving off1. Press the brake pedal to apply the

brakes.2. Move the transmission selector lever

to R, D or S.3. Release the parking brake.4. Release the brake pedal and press the

accelerator pedal.

Stopping1. Release the accelerator pedal and

press the brake pedal.2. Apply the parking brake.3. Move the transmission selector lever

to N or P.

DownshiftPress the accelerator pedal fully with thetransmission selector lever in either D, Smode or manual shifting position to selecta lower gear for optimum performance.Release the accelerator pedal when youno longer require downshift.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud orSnowIf your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,it may be rocked out by shifting betweenD and R, stopping between shifts in asteady pattern. Press the acceleratorlightly in each gear.Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature asthis can damage the transmission.Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute as this can damage thetransmission or the tires and the engine mayoverheat.

Emergency Park Position ReleaseLever

WARNINGSDo not drive your vehicle until youverify that the brake lamps areworking. Failure to adhere to warning

indicators may lead to an accident or injury.If you release the parking brake andthe brake warning lamp remainsilluminated the brakes may not be

working correctly. Have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer as soonas possible. Failure to adhere to warninglamps and indicators may lead to anaccident or injury.

Use the emergency P position release leverto move the transmission selector leverfrom the P position in the event of amalfunction or if your vehicle battery hasno charge.

131


Transmission

E1421933 2

1. Apply the parking brake and switch theignition off before carrying out thisprocedure.

2. Remove the retaining screw.3. Remove the center console side panel.

E142214

4

4. Press the brake pedal. Using a suitabletool rotate the lever forward whilepulling the transmission selector leverout of the P position.

Note: The emergency P position releaselever is pink.Note: See an authorized dealer as soon aspossible if you use procedure.

HILL START ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGSThe system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave yourvehicle, always apply the parking

brake and move the transmission selectorlever into position P (Park).

You must remain in your vehicle onceyou have activated the system.During all times, you are responsiblefor controlling your vehicle,supervising the system and

intervening, if required.If the engine is revved excessively, orif a malfunction is detected, thesystem will be deactivated.

The system makes it easier to pull awaywhen your vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.When the system is active, your vehicle willremain stationary on the slope for two tothree seconds after you release the brakepedal. This allows you time to move yourfoot from the brake to the acceleratorpedal. The brakes are releasedautomatically once the engine hasdeveloped sufficient drive to prevent yourvehicle from rolling down the slope. Thisis an advantage when pulling away on aslope, (for example from a car park ramp,traffic lights or when reversing uphill intoa parking space).The system will activate automatically onany slope which can result in significantvehicle rollback.

Using Hill Start Assist1. Press the brake pedal to bring your

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal pressed.

132


Transmission

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicleis on a slope, the system will beactivated automatically.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, your vehicle will remainon the slope without rolling away forapproximately two or three seconds.This hold time will automatically beextended if you are in the process ofdriving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thebrakes will be released automatically.

Switching the System On and OffNote: The system can only be switched onand off for manual transmissions.Note: Once you have switched off thesystem, it will remain off until you switch iton again.Your vehicle comes with the systemalready enabled. If desired, you can disablethe feature: See General Information(page 85).

133


Transmission

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. Ifa metal-to-metal, continuous grinding orcontinuous squeal sound is present, thebrake linings may be worn-out. If the vehiclehas continuous vibration or shudder in thesteering wheel while braking, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealer.Note: Brake dust may accumulate on thewheels, even under normal drivingconditions. Some dust is inevitable as thebrakes wear. See Cleaning the AlloyWheels (page 208).Wet brakes result in reduced brakingefficiency. Gently press the brake pedal afew times when driving from a car wash orstanding water to dry the brakes.

Emergency Brake AssistEmergency brake assist detects when youbrake heavily by measuring the rate atwhich you press the brake pedal. Itprovides maximum braking efficiency aslong as you press the pedal. Emergencybrake assist can reduce stopping distancesin critical situations.

Anti-lock Brake SystemThis system helps you maintain steeringcontrol and vehicle stability duringemergency stops by keeping the brakesfrom locking.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKESNote: When the system is operating, thebrake pedal will pulse and may travelfurther. Maintain pressure on the brakepedal. You may also hear a noise from thesystem. This is normal.The anti-lock braking system will noteliminate the risks when:• you drive too closely to the vehicle in

front of you• your vehicle is hydroplaning• you take corners too fast• the road surface is poor.

PARKING BRAKEVehicles With AutomaticTransmission

WARNINGAlways set the parking brake fullyand leave your vehicle with thetransmission selector lever in

position P.

Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill andfacing uphill move the transmission selectorlever to position P and turn the steeringwheel away from the curb.Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill andfacing downhill move the transmissionselector lever to position P and turn thesteering wheel toward the curb.

Vehicles With ManualTransmissionNote: If you park your vehicle on a hill andfacing uphill select first gear and turn thesteering wheel away from the curb.

134


Brakes

Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill andfacing downhill select reverse gear and turnthe steering wheel toward the curb.

All VehiclesNote: Do not press the release button whilepulling the lever up.To apply the parking brake:1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its

fullest extent.To release the parking brake:1. Press the brake pedal firmly.2. Pull the lever up slightly.3. Press the release button and push the

lever down.

135


Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONElectronic Stability Program

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. Failure to drive

with due care and attention could lead toloss of vehicle control.

Vehicle modifications involvingbraking system, aftermarket roofracks, suspension, steering system,

tire construction and wheel and tire sizemay change the handling characteristicsof the vehicle and may adversely affectthe performance of the AdvanceTracsystem. In addition, installing any stereoloudspeakers may interfere with andadversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeakeras far as possible from the front centerconsole, the tunnel, and the front seats inorder to minimize the risk of interfering withthe AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing theeffectiveness of the AdvanceTrac systemcould lead to an increased risk of loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, personalinjury and death.

Remember that even advancedtechnology cannot defy the laws ofphysics. It’s always possible to lose

control of a vehicle due to inappropriatedriver input for the conditions. Aggressivedriving on any road condition can causeyou to lose control of your vehicleincreasing the risk of personal injury orproperty damage. Activation of theAdvanceTrac system is an indication thatat least some of the tires have exceededtheir ability to grip the road; this couldreduce the operator’s ability to control thevehicle potentially resulting in a loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, personalinjury and death. If your AdvanceTracsystem activates, SLOW DOWN.

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

Without Advance TracAWith Advance TracB

The system supports stability when yourvehicle starts to slide away from yourintended path. This is performed by brakingindividual wheels and reducing enginetorque as needed.The system also provides an enhancedtraction control function by reducingengine torque if the wheels spin when youaccelerate. This improves your ability topull away on slippery roads or loosesurfaces, and improves comfort by limitingwheel spin in hairpin bends.

Stability Control Warning LampWhile driving, it flashes when the systemis operating. See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 78).

136


Stability Control (If Equipped)

USING STABILITY CONTROLNote: The system automatically switcheson every time you switch the ignition on.

You can switch the system on and off usingthe information display. See GeneralInformation (page 85).

USING STABILITY CONTROL -1.6L ECOBOOST™

E156922

Note: The system will switch onautomatically every time you switch theignition on.Note: You can also switch the system offand on using the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 85).

Switching Sport Mode OnPress the switch. It will illuminate and amessage will be displayed in theinformation display. Press the switch againto return the system to normal mode.Note: In this mode stability control is onlyreduced and not switched off completely.

Switching the System OffPress and hold the switch forapproximately five seconds. It willilluminate and a message will be displayedin the information display. Press the switchagain to return the system to normal mode.

137


Stability Control (If Equipped)


WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.If your vehicles has a non-Fordapproved trailer tow module thesystem may not correctly detect

objects.The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.The system does not detect objectsthat are moving away from yourvehicle. They will only be detected

shortly after they start to move towardyour vehicle.

Take particular care when reversingwith a tow ball arm or a rear fittedaccessory. For example, a bicycle

carrier. The rear parking aid will onlyindicate the approximate distance fromthe rear bumper to an object.

If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thesensors briefly from a distance not

less than eight inches (20 centimeters).

Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm, thesystem is turned off automatically whentrailer lamps (or lighting boards) areconnected to the 13-pin socket through aFord approved trailer tow module.Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, iceor snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.Note: The system may emit false alerts ifit detects a signal using the same frequencyas the sensors or if your vehicle is fullyloaded.

Note: The outer sensors may detect theside walls of a garage. If the distancebetween the outer sensors and the side wallremains constant for three seconds, thealert will turn off. As you continue the innersensors will detect objects directly behindyour vehicle.

PARKING AID

WARNINGSTo help avoid personal injury, readand understand the limitations of thesystem as contained in this section.

Sensing is only an aid for some (generallylarge and fixed) objects when moving inreverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.Traffic control systems, inclementweather, air brakes and external motorsand fans may also affect the function ofthe sensing system. This may includereduced performance or a false activation.

To help avoid personal injury, alwaysuse caution when moving in reverseand when using the sensing system.This system is not designed toprevent contact with small or movingobjects. The system is designed to

provide a warning to assist the driver indetecting large stationary objects to avoiddamaging the vehicle. The system may notdetect smaller objects, particularly thoseclose to the ground.

Certain add-on devices such as largetrailer hitches, bike or surfboard racksand any device that may block the

normal detection zone of the system, maycreate false audible warnings.

Note: Keep the sensors located on thebumper or fascia free from snow, ice andlarge accumulations of dirt. If the sensorsare covered, the system’s accuracy can beaffected. Do not clean the sensors withsharp objects.

138


Parking Aids (If Equipped)

Note: If your vehicle sustains damage tothe bumper or fascia, leaving it misalignedor bent, the sensing zone may be alteredcausing inaccurate measurement ofobstacles or false alarms.The system warns you of obstacles withina certain range of the bumper area.When receiving a detection warning, theradio volume is reduced to apredetermined level. After the warninggoes away, the radio volume returns to theprevious level.

Rear Sensing SystemThe rear sensors are only active when youmove the transmission selector lever toposition R (reverse). As your vehicle movescloser to the obstacle, the rate of theaudible warning increases. When theobstacle is fewer than 12 inches (30centimeters) away, the audible warningsounds continuously. If a stationary orreceding object is detected farther than 12inches (30 centimeters) from the side ofyour vehicle, the audible warning soundsfor only three seconds. Once the systemdetects an object approaching, the audiblewarning sounds again.

E130178

A

Coverage area of up to 72 inches(183 centimeters) from the rearbumper (with a decreasedcoverage area at the outercorners of the bumper).

A

The system detects certain objects whenyou move the transmission selector leverto position R (reverse):• and your vehicle is moving toward a

stationary object at a speed of 3 mph(5 km/h) or less

• but your vehicle is not moving, and amoving object is approaching the rearof your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5km/h) or less

• and your vehicle is moving at a speedof less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and amoving object is approaching the rearof your vehicle at a speed of less than3 mph (5 km/h).

Move the transmission selector lever fromposition R (reverse) to turn the system off.If a fault is present in the system, a warningmessage appears in the informationdisplay and does not allow you to switchthe system on.

REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGSThe operation of the camera mayvary depending on the ambienttemperature, vehicle and road

conditions.The distances shown in the displaymay differ from the actual distance.Do not place objects in front of thecamera.

The camera is located on the liftgate nearthe handle.

139



E147796

Switching the Rear View CameraOn

WARNINGThe camera may not detect objectsthat are close to your vehicle.

Switch the ignition and the audio unit on.Move the transmission selector lever toposition R (reverse).The image is displayed on the screen.The camera may not operate correctly inthe following conditions:• Dark areas.• Intense light.• If the ambient temperature increases

or decreases rapidly.• If the camera is wet, for example in rain

or high humidity.• If the camera's view is obstructed, for

example by mud.

Using the DisplayWARNINGS

Obstacles above the camera positionwill not be shown. Inspect the areabehind your vehicle if necessary.Marks are for general guidance only,and are calculated for vehicles inmaximum load conditions on an

even road surface.

The lines show the distance from the outeredge of the front tire plus two inches (51millimeters) and the rear bumper.

E142132

A

B

C

A

B

CD

Red - ZoneAAmber - ZoneB

140



Green - ZoneCBlack - center line of theprojected vehicle path

D

Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lineson the screen are not shown. The camerawill show your vehicle direction and not thetrailer.

Switching the Rear View CameraOffNote: The system will automatically switchoff once your vehicle speed has reachedapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h).Disengage reverse gear.

Vehicles with Parking AidThe display will additionally show acolored distance bar. This guide indicatesthe distance from the rear bumper to thedetected obstacle.These are color coded as follows:• Green - Zone• Amber - Zone• Red - Zone

141




WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

Cruise control allows you to control yourspeed using the switches on the steeringwheel. You can use cruise control whenyou exceed approximately 20 mph (30km/h).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGSDo not use cruise control in heavytraffic, on winding roads or when theroad surface is slippery. This could

result in loss of vehicle control, seriousinjury or death.

When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the

brakes. Change down a gear to assist thesystem in maintaining the set speed.Failure to do so could result in loss ofvehicle control, serious injury or death.

Note: Cruise control will disengage if yourvehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph(16 km/h) below your set speed whiledriving uphill.

E102679

The cruise controls are located on thesteering wheel.

Switching Cruise Control OnPress and release ON.

E71340

The indicator will display in theinstrument cluster.

Setting a Speed1. Accelerate to the desired speed.2. Press and release SET+.3. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

Changing the Set Speed• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release

the control when you reach the desiredspeed.

• Press and release SET+ or SET-. Theset speed will change in approximately1 mph (2 km/h) increments.

• Press the accelerator or brake pedaluntil you reach the desired speed. Pressand release SET+.

Canceling the Set SpeedPress and release CAN, or tap the brakepedal. The set speed will not be erased.

142


Cruise Control (If Equipped)

Resuming the Set SpeedPress and release RES.

Switching Cruise Control OffNote: You will erase the set speed if youswitch the system off.Press and release OFF or switch theignition off.

143


Cruise Control (If Equipped)

STEERINGElectric Power Steering

WARNINGSThe electric power steering systemhas diagnostic checks thatcontinuously monitor the system to

ensure proper operation. When a systemerror is detected a steering message willappear in the information display.

The electric power steering systemhas diagnostic checks thatcontinuously monitor the system to

ensure proper operation of the electronicsystem. When an electronic error isdetected, a message will be displayed inthe information display. If this happens,stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turnoff the engine. After at least 10 seconds,reset the system by restarting the engine,and watch the information display for asteering message. If a steering messagereturns, or returns while driving, take thevehicle to your dealer to have it checked.

Obtain immediate service if a systemerror is detected. You may not noticeany difference in the feel of your

steering, but a serious condition may exist.Failure to do so may result in loss ofsteering control.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electricpower-assisted steering system. There isno fluid reservoir to check or fill.If your vehicle loses electrical power whileyou are driving (or if the ignition is turnedoff), you can steer the vehicle manually,but it takes more effort. Extremecontinuous steering may increase the effortit takes for you to steer. This occurs toprevent internal overheating andpermanent damage to your steering

system. If this should occur, you will neitherlose the ability to steer the vehiclemanually nor will it cause permanentdamage. Typical steering and drivingmaneuvers will allow the system to cooland steering assist will return to normal.

Steering TipsIf the steering wanders or pulls, check for:• an improperly inflated tire• uneven tire wear• loose or worn suspension components• loose or worn steering components• improper vehicle alignmentA high crown in the road or high crosswindsmay also make the steering seem towander or pull.

Adaptive LearningThe EPS system adaptive learning helpscorrect for road irregularities and improvesoverall handling and steering feel. Itcommunicates with the vehicle's brakesystem to help operate advanced stabilitycontrol and accident avoidance systems.Additionally, whenever the battery isdisconnected or a new battery installed,the vehicle must be driven a short distancebefore the strategy is relearned and allsystems are reactivated.

144


Driving Aids

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSUse load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.Place luggage and other loads as lowand as far forward as possible withinthe luggage or loadspace.Do not drive with the liftgate or reardoor open. Exhaust fumes may enteryour vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.See Vehicle Certification Label

(page 237).Do not allow items to contact therear windows.

Note: When loading long objects in to yourvehicle, for example pipes, timber orfurniture be careful not to damage theinterior trim.

LOAD LIMIT

Vehicle Loading - with andwithout a TrailerThis section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle,trailer or both, to keep your loadedvehicle weight within its designrating capability, with or withouta trailer. Properly loading yourvehicle will provide maximumreturn of vehicle designperformance. Before loading yourvehicle, familiarize yourself withthe following terms fordetermining your vehicle’s weightratings, with or without a trailer,from the vehicle’s Tire Label orSafety Compliance CertificationLabel:Base Curb Weight - is the weightof the vehicle including a full tankof fuel and all standardequipment. It does not includepassengers, cargo, or optionalequipment.Vehicle Curb Weight - is theweight of your new vehicle whenyou picked it up from yourauthorized dealer plus anyaftermarket equipment.

E143816

PAYLOAD

145


Load Carrying

Payload - is the combined weightof cargo and passengers that thevehicle is carrying. The maximumpayload for your vehicle can befound on the Tire Label on theB-Pillar or the edge of the driverdoor (vehicles exported outsidethe US and Canada may not havea Tire Label). Look for “THECOMBINED WEIGHT OFOCCUPANTS AND CARGOSHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXXkg OR XXX lb.” for maximumpayload. The payload listed on theTire Label is the maximumpayload for the vehicle as built bythe assembly plant. If you installany aftermarket or

authorized-dealer installedequipment on the vehicle, youmust subtract the weight of theequipment from the payload listedon the Tire Label in order todetermine the new payload.

WARNINGThe appropriate loadingcapacity of your vehicle can

be limited either by volumecapacity (how much space isavailable) or by payload capacity(how much weight the vehicleshould carry). Once you havereached the maximum payload ofyour vehicle, do not add morecargo, even if there is spaceavailable. Overloading orimproperly loading your vehiclecan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and vehicle rollover.

Example only:

E142516

146


Load Carrying

E142517

E143817

CARGO

Cargo Weight - includes allweight added to the Base CurbWeight, including cargo andoptional equipment. When towing,trailer tongue load or king pinweight is also part of cargo weight.GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - isthe total weight placed on eachaxle (front and rear) includingvehicle curb weight and allpayload.

GAWR (Gross Axle WeightRating) - is the maximumallowable weight that can becarried by a single axle (front orrear). These numbers are shownon the Safety ComplianceCertification Label. The label shallbe affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition. The total load on eachaxle must never exceed itsGross Axle Weight Rating.

147


Load Carrying

Note: For trailer towinginformation refer to the RV andTrailer Towing Guide available atan authorized dealer.

E143818

GVW

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -is the Vehicle Curb Weight, pluscargo, plus passengers.GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) - is the maximumallowable weight of the fullyloaded vehicle (including alloptions, equipment, passengersand cargo). It is shown on the

Safety Compliance CertificationLabel. The label shall be affixedto either the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver's seatingposition. The Gross VehicleWeight must never exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating.

Example only:

E142523

148


Load Carrying

E142524

WARNINGExceeding the SafetyCompliance Certification

Label vehicle weight rating limitscould result in substandardvehicle handling or performance,engine, transmission and/orstructural damage, seriousdamage to the vehicle, loss ofcontrol and personal injury.

E143819

GCW GVW

GCW (Gross Combined Weight)- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plusthe weight of the fully loadedtrailer.

GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating) - is the maximumallowable weight of the vehicleand the loaded trailer, includingall cargo and passengers, that thevehicle can handle without riskingdamage. (Important: The towingvehicle’s braking system is rated

149


Load Carrying

for operation at Gross VehicleWeight Rating, not at GrossCombined Weight Rating.)Separate functional brakes shouldbe used for safe control of towedvehicles and for trailers where theGross Combined Weight of thetowing vehicle plus the trailerexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating of the towing vehicle. TheGross Combined Weight mustnever exceed the GrossCombined Weight Rating.Maximum Loaded TrailerWeight - is the highest possibleweight of a fully loaded trailer thevehicle can tow. It assumes avehicle with mandatory options,driver and front passenger weight(150 pounds [68 kilograms]each), no cargo weight (internalor external) and a tongue load of10–15% (conventional trailer) orking pin weight of 15–25% (fifthwheel trailer). Consult anauthorized dealer (or the RV andTrailer Towing Guide available atan authorized dealer) for moredetailed information.Tongue Load or Fifth WheelKing Pin Weight - refers to theamount of the weight that a trailerpushes down on a trailer hitch.

Examples: For a 5000 pound(2268 kilogram) conventionaltrailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and0.15 to obtain a proper tongueload range of 500 to 750 pounds(227 to 340 kilograms). For an11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifthwheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and0.25 to obtain a proper king pinload range of 1725 to 2875 pounds(782 to 1304 kilograms).

WARNINGSDo not exceed the GVWR orthe GAWR specified on the

Safety Compliance CertificationLabel.

Do not use replacement tireswith lower load carrying

capacities than the original tiresbecause they may lower thevehicle’s GVWR and GAWRlimitations. Replacement tireswith a higher limit than the originaltires do not increase the GVWRand GAWR limitations.

Exceeding any vehicle weightrating limitation could result

in serious damage to the vehicleand/or personal injury.

Steps for determining thecorrect load limit:1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lb." on yourvehicle’s placard.

150


Load Carrying

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lb.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1,400 lb. and there willbe five 150 lb. passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lb.(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargo andluggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces theavailable cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

The following gives you a fewexamples on how to calculate theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity:

*Suppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You decideto go golfing. Is there enough loadcapacity to carry you, four of yourfriends and all the golf bags? Youand four friends average 220pounds (99 kilograms) each andthe golf bags weigh approximately30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.The calculation would be: 1400 -(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you haveenough load capacity in yourvehicle to transport four friendsand your golf bags. In metric units,the calculation would be: 635kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.*Suppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You andone of your friends decide to pickup cement from the local homeimprovement store to finish thatpatio you have been planning forthe past two years. Measuring theinside of the vehicle with the rearseat folded down, you have roomfor twelve 100-pound(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Doyou have enough load capacity totransport the cement to yourhome? If you and your friend eachweigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),the calculation would be: 1400 -(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you donot have enough cargo capacityto carry that much weight. Inmetric units, the calculation would

151


Load Carrying

be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.You will need to reduce the loadweight by at least 240 pounds(104 kilograms). If you removethree 100-pound (45-kilogram)cement bags, then the loadcalculation would be: 1400 - (2 x220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -900 = 60 pounds. Now you havethe load capacity to transport thecement and your friend home. Inmetric units, the calculation wouldbe: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.The above calculations alsoassume that the loads arepositioned in your vehicle in amanner that does not overloadthe Front or the Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating specified for yourvehicle on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label. The label shallbe affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition.

REAR UNDER FLOORSTORAGE (IF EQUIPPED)

Adjustable Load Floor

E159476B

A

Upper positionALower positionB

The load floor can be placed in eitherposition on shelves located at the rear ofthe luggage compartment trim.

E157606

You can hold the load floor open. Use thestoppers located at the side of the luggagecompartment to hold the floor up.

152


Load Carrying

CARGO NETS (IF EQUIPPED)

Installing and Removing the CargoNetInstalling the Cargo Net

E156757

1. Raise the rear outer head restraints.See Head Restraints (page 105).

2. Attach the top securing clips to thehead restraint outer posts.

3. Attach the bottom securing clips to theanchor points.

Removing the Cargo Net1. Raise the rear outer head restraints.

See Head Restraints (page 105).2. Detach the top and bottom securing

clips.

LUGGAGE COVERS

WARNINGDo not place objects on the luggagecover.

Removing the Cover

1

2E72512

153


Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER - 1.6LECOBOOST™

WARNINGYour vehicle is not approvedfor trailer towing.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

E143886

If you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional towing service or,if you are a member of a roadsideassistance program, your roadsideassistance service provider.

It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with a wheel lift and dollies orflatbed equipment. Do not tow with aslingbelt. Ford Motor Company has notapproved a slingbelt towing procedure. Ifthe vehicle is towed incorrectly, or by anyother means, vehicle damage may occur.Ford Motor Company produces a towingmanual for all authorized tow truckoperators. Have your tow truck operatorrefer to this manual for proper hook-upand towing procedures for your vehicle.You can tow your vehicle from the frontwith wheel lift equipment to raise the frontwheels off the ground. We recommendthat you place the rear wheels on a dollyto prevent damage to the rear of yourvehicle.You can tow your vehicle from the rear withwheel lift equipment.Note: You must place the front wheels ona dolly to prevent damage to thetransmission.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELSEmergency TowingIf your vehicle is disabled without accessto wheel dollies, a car-hauling trailer, or aflatbed transport vehicle it can beflat-towed with all wheels on the ground.You may do this under the followingconditions:• Your vehicle is facing forward so that

it is towed in a forward direction.• The transmission gear shift lever is

placed in position N. If the transmissiongear shift lever cannot be moved toposition N, it may need to beoverridden. See Transmission (page126).

154


Towing

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80

kilometers).

Recreational TowingNote: Put your climate control system inrecirculated air mode to prevent exhaustfumes from entering the vehicle.Follow these guidelines if you have a needfor recreational (RV) towing. An exampleof recreational towing would be towingyour vehicle behind a motorhome. Theseguidelines are designed to ensure that yourtransmission is not damaged.

Vehicles with a Manual TransmissionYour vehicle can be towed with all fourwheels on the ground or with the frontwheels off the ground by using a tow dolly.If you are using a tow dolly follow theinstructions specified by the equipmentprovider. If you tow your vehicle with allwheels on the ground, follow theseinstructions:1. Tow only with your vehicle in the

forward direction. Release the parkingbrake.

2. Place the transmission in neutral.3. Place the ignition in the accessory

position. See Starting and Stoppingthe Engine (page 113).

Note: Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)when towing your vehicle.

Vehicles with an AutomaticTransmission - with Ignition SwitchNote: There must be battery power toproperly move the transmission’s internalcomponents to neutral in step 3. Also,moving the gearshift to the neutral positionwithout first turning the ignition to the on IIposition limits the towing capability to 35mph (56 km/h) and 50 miles (80kilometers).

1. Release the parking brake.2. Switch the ignition to the on (II)

position.3. Press the brake pedal, then move the

gearshift to the neutral position.4. Wait for a message indicating that the

transmission is ready in the informationand entertainment display, then switchthe ignition off and release the brakepedal.

5. Disconnect the negative (black) cablefrom the battery. The anti-theft systemis disabled until the battery cable isreconnected. See Changing the 12VBattery (page 186).

Note: The maximum towing speed is 70mph (113 km/h).Note: There is no limit on towing distance.After towing, start the engine within 15minutes of reconnecting the battery cable.See Changing the 12V Battery (page 186).

Vehicles with an AutomaticTransmission - with Keyless StartingNote: There must be battery power toproperly move the transmission’s internalcomponents to neutral in step 3. Also,moving the gearshift to the neutral positionwithout first turning the ignition to the on IIposition limits the towing capability to 35mph (56 km/h) and 50 miles (80kilometers).1. Release the parking brake.2. Switch the ignition on by pressing the

keyless start button, but do not applythe brake pedal.

3. Press the brake pedal, then move thegearshift to the neutral position.Release the brake pedal.

155


Towing

4. Wait for a message indicating that thetransmission is ready in the informationand entertainment display, then switchthe ignition off by pressing the keylessstart button.

5. Disconnect the negative (black) cablefrom the battery. The door key isneeded to lock and unlock doors whenthe battery cable is disconnected. Also,the anti-theft system is disabled untilthe battery cable is reconnected. SeeChanging the 12V Battery (page 186).

Note: The maximum towing speed is 70mph (113 km/h).Note: There is no limit on towing distance.After towing, start the engine within 15minutes of reconnecting the battery cable.See Changing the 12V Battery (page 186).

156


Towing

BREAKING-INTires

WARNINGNew tires need to be run-in forapproximately 300 miles (500kilometers). During this time, you

may experience different drivingcharacteristics.

Brakes and ClutchWARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 100miles (150 kilometers) in town and

for the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers)on freeways.

EngineWARNING

Avoid driving too fast during the first1000 miles (1500 kilometers). Varyyour speed frequently and change

up through the gears early. Do not laborthe engine.

COLD WEATHERPRECAUTIONSThe functional operation of somecomponents and systems can be affectedat temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).

DRIVING THROUGH WATERNote: Driving through deep water abovethe recommended levels can cause vehicledamage.

If driving through deep or standing wateris unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Neverdrive through water that is higher than thebottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or thebottom of the hubs (for trucks).

E142667

When driving through water, traction orbrake capability may be limited. Also,water may enter your engine’s air intakeand severely damage your engine or yourvehicle may stall.Once through the water, always dry thebrakes by moving your vehicle slowly whileapplying light pressure on the brake pedal.Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle asquickly as dry brakes.

ECONOMICAL DRIVINGFuel economy is affected by several thingssuch as how you drive, the conditions youdrive under and how you maintain yourvehicle.There are some things to keep in mind thatmay improve your fuel economy:• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,

moderate fashion.• Drive at steady speeds.• Anticipate stops; slowing down may

eliminate the need to stop.

157


Driving Hints

• Combine errands and minimizestop-and-go driving.• When running errands, go to the

furthest destination first and thenwork your way back home.

• Close the windows for high-speeddriving.

• Drive at reasonable speeds. (Travelingat 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15%less fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121kph).

• Keep the tires properly inflated and useonly the recommended size.

• Use the recommended engine oil.• Perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance.There are also some things you may wantto avoid doing because they reduce yourfuel economy:• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.• Avoid revving the engine before turning

off the car.• Avoid long idle periods.• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold

mornings.• Reduce the use of air conditioning and

heat.• Avoid using speed control in hilly

terrain.• Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving.• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight

(approximately 1 mpg [0.4kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400lbs [180 kilograms] of weight carried).

• Avoid adding particular accessories toyour vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,rollbars/light bars, running boards, skiracks).

• Avoid driving with the wheels out ofalignment.

FLOOR MATS

E142666

WARNINGSAlways use floor mats that aredesigned to fit the foot well of yourvehicle, leaving the pedal area

unobstructed, and which can be firmlysecured to retention posts so that theycannot slip out of position and interferewith the pedals or impair safe operation ofyour vehicle in other ways.

Incorrectly fitted floor mats cancause the accelerator pedal tobecome stuck in the open position.

This can cause loss of vehicle control.Always correctly install the floormats to the retention posts so thatthey cannot slip out of position or

obstruct pedal operation.Do not place unsecured floor matsor any other covering in the foot well.Do not place additional floor matsor any other covering on top of theoriginal floor mats. This will reduce

the pedal clearance and interfere with thepedal operation.

Do not allow objects to fall orbecome trapped under the pedals ofyour vehicle. This can cause loss of

vehicle control.Carry out regular inspections to makesure the floor mats are secure.

158


Driving Hints

To install the floor mats, position the floormat eyelet over the retention post andpress down to lock in position.Remove in reverse order.

159


Driving Hints

GETTING THE SERVICES YOUNEEDWarranty repairs to your vehicle must beperformed by an authorized dealer. Whileany authorized dealer handling your vehicleline will provide warranty service, werecommend you return to your sellingauthorized dealer who wants to ensureyour continued satisfaction.Please note that certain warranty repairsrequire special training and equipment, sonot all authorized dealers are authorizedto perform all warranty repairs. This meansthat, depending on the warranty repairneeded, you may have to take your vehicleto another authorized dealer.A reasonable time must be allowed toperform a repair after taking your vehicleto the authorized dealer. Repairs will bemade using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, orremanufactured or other parts that areauthorized by Ford.

Away From HomeIf you are away from home when yourvehicle needs service, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center or use theonline resources listed below to find thenearest authorized dealer.In the United States:Mailing addressFord Motor CompanyCustomer Relationship CenterP.O. Box 6248Dearborn, MI 48121Telephone1-800-392-3673 (FORD)(TDD for the hearing impaired:1-800-232-5952)OnlineAdditional information and resources areavailable online at www.fordowner.com

These are some of the items that can befound online:• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,

City/State, or Zip Code• Owner Manuals• Maintenance Schedules• Recalls• Ford Extended Service Plans• Ford Genuine Accessories• Service specials and promotions.In Canada:Mailing addressCustomer Relationship CentreFord Motor Company of Canada, LimitedP.O. Box 2000Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8Telephone1-800-565-3673 (FORD)Onlinewww.ford.ca

Additional AssistanceIf you have questions or concerns, or areunsatisfied with the service you arereceiving, follow these steps:1. Contact your Sales Representative or

Service Advisor at your selling/servicingauthorized dealer.

2. If your inquiry or concern remainsunresolved, contact the Sales Manager,Service Manager or Customer RelationsManager.

3. If you require assistance or clarificationon Ford Motor Company policies,please contact the Ford CustomerRelationship Center.

160


Customer Assistance

In order to help you serve you better,please have the following informationavailable when contacting a CustomerRelationship Center:• Vehicle Identification Number.• Your telephone number (home and

business).• The name of the authorized dealer and

city where located.• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.In some states, you must directly notifyFord in writing before pursuing remediesunder your state’s warranty laws. Ford isalso allowed a final repair attempt in somestates.In the United States, a warranty disputemust be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINEbefore taking action under theMagnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to theextent allowed by state law, beforepursuing replacement or repurchaseremedies provided by certain state laws.This dispute handling procedure is notrequired prior to enforcing state createdrights or other rights which are independentof the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act orstate replacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)requires that, if a manufacturer or itsrepresentative is unable to repair a motorvehicle to conform to the vehicle’sapplicable express warranty after areasonable number of attempts, themanufacturer shall be required to eitherreplace the vehicle with one substantiallyidentical or repurchase the vehicle andreimburse the buyer in an amount equal tothe actual price paid or payable by theconsumer (less a reasonable allowancefor consumer use). The consumer has theright to choose whether to receive a refundor replacement vehicle.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)presumes that the manufacturer has hada reasonable number of attempts toconform the vehicle to its applicableexpress warranties if, within the first 18months of ownership of a new vehicle orthe first 18000 miles (29 000 km),whichever occurs first:1. Two or more repair attempts are made

on the same non-conformity likely tocause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are madeon the same nonconformity (a defector condition that substantially impairsthe use, value or safety of the vehicle)OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repairof nonconformities for a total of morethan 30 calendar days (not necessarilyall at one time).

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumermust also notify the manufacturer of theneed for the repair of the nonconformityat the following address:Ford Motor Company16800 Executive Plaza DriveMail Drop 3NE-BDearborn, MI 48126You are required to submit your warrantydispute to BBB AUTO LINE before assertingin court any rights or remedies conferredby California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).You are also required to use BBB AUTOLINE before exercising rights or seekingremedies created by the FederalMagnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seekredress by pursuing rights and remediesnot created by California Civil Code Section1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-MossWarranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE isnot required by those statutes.

161


Customer Assistance

THE BETTER BUSINESSBUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINEPROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)Your satisfaction is important to FordMotor Company and to your dealer. If awarranty concern has not been resolvedusing the three-step procedure outlinedearlier in this chapter in the Getting theServices you need section, you may beeligible to participate in the BBB AUTOLINE program.The BBB AUTO LINE program consists oftwo parts – mediation and arbitration.During mediation, a representative of theBBB will contact both you and Ford MotorCompany to explore options for settlementof the claim. If an agreement is not reachedduring mediation or you do not want toparticipate in mediation, and if your claimis eligible, you may participate in thearbitration process. An arbitration hearingwill be scheduled so that you can presentyour case in an informal setting before animpartial person. The arbitrator willconsider the testimony provided and makea decision after the hearing.Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINEprogram are usually decided within fortydays after you file your claim with the BBB.You are not bound by the decision, andmay reject the decision and proceed tocourt where all findings of the BBB AutoLine dispute, and decision, are admissiblein the court action. Should you choose toaccept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Fordis then bound by the decision, and mustcomply with the decision within 30 daysof receipt of your acceptance letter.BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using theinformation provided below, please call orwrite to request a program application.You will be asked for your name andaddress, general information about yournew vehicle, information about yourwarranty concerns, and any steps you have

already taken to try to resolve them. ACustomer Claim Form will be mailed thatwill need to be completed, signed andreturned to the BBB along with proof ofownership. Upon receipt, the BBB willreview the claim for eligibility under theProgram Summary Guidelines.You can get more information bycalling BBB AUTO LINE at1-800-955-5100, or writing to:BBB AUTO LINE4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800Arlington, Virginia 22203-1833BBB AUTO LINE applications can also berequested by calling the Ford MotorCompany Customer Relationship Centerat 1-800-392-3673.Note: Ford Motor Company reserves theright to change eligibility limitations, modifyprocedures, or to discontinue this processat any time without notice and withoutobligation.

UTILIZING THEMEDIATION/ARBITRATIONPROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)For vehicles delivered to authorizedCanadian dealers. In those cases whereyou continue to feel that the efforts by Fordof Canada and the authorized dealer toresolve a factory-related vehicle serviceconcern have been unsatisfactory, Ford ofCanada participates in an impartial thirdparty mediation/arbitration programadministered by the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).The CAMVAP program is a straight forwardand relatively speedy alternative to resolvea disagreement when all other efforts toproduce a settlement have failed. Thisprocedure is without cost to you and isdesigned to eliminate the need for lengthyand expensive legal proceedings.

162


Customer Assistance

In the CAMVAP program, impartialthird-party arbitrators conduct hearings atmutually convenient times and places inan informal environment. These impartialarbitrators review the positions of theparties, make decisions and, whenappropriate, render awards to resolvedisputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,and final as the arbitrator’s award isbinding on both you and Ford of Canada.CAMVAP services are available in allCanadian territories and provinces. Formore information, without charge orobligation, call your CAMVAP ProvincialAdministrator directly at 1-800-207-0685or visit www.camvap.ca.

GETTING ASSISTANCEOUTSIDE THE U.S. ANDCANADABefore exporting your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreignembassy or consulate. These officials caninform you of local vehicle registrationregulations and where to find unleadedfuel.If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can onlyget fuel with an anti-knock index lowerthan is recommended for your vehicle,contact our Customer Relationship Center.The use of leaded fuel in your vehiclewithout proper conversion may damagethe effectiveness of your emission controlsystem and may cause engine knocking orserious engine damage. Ford MotorCompany or Ford of Canada is notresponsible for any damage caused by useof improper fuel. Using leaded fuel mayalso result in difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the United States.

If your vehicle must be serviced while youare traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Ifthe authorized dealer cannot help you,contact:FORD MOTOR COMPANYFORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBALINITIATIVESCustomer Relationship Center1555 Fairlane DriveFairlane Business Park #3Allen Park, Michigan 48101U.S.A.Telephone: (313) 594-4857Fax: (313) 390-0804Email: [email protected] customers in Guam, theCommonwealth of the Northern MarianaIslands (CNMI), America Samoa, and theU.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to callour Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD(3673).If your vehicle must be serviced while youare traveling or living in Puerto Rico,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Ifthe authorized dealer cannot help you,contact:FORD MOTOR COMPANYFORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBALINITIATIVESCustomer Relationship Center1555 Fairlane DriveFairlane Business Park #3Allen Park, Michigan 48101U.S.A.Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)FAX: (313) 390-0804Email: [email protected] your vehicle must be serviced while youare traveling or living in the Middle East,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Ifthe authorized dealer cannot help you,contact:

163


Customer Assistance

Ford Middle EastCustomer Relationship CenterP.O. Box 21470Dubai, United Arab EmiratesTelephone: +971 4 3326084Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of SaudiArabia: 800 8971409Local Telephone Number of Kuwait:24810575FAX: +971 4 3327299Email: [email protected] you buy your vehicle in North Americaand then relocate to any of the abovelocations, register your vehicleidentification number (VIN) and newaddress with Ford Motor Company ExportOperations & Global Growth Initiatives byemailing [email protected] you are in another foreign country,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Inthe event your inquiry is unresolved,communicate your concern with thedealership’s Sales Manager, ServiceManager or Customer Relations Manager.If you require additional assistance orclarification, please contact the respectiveCustomer Relationship Center aspreviously listed.Customers in the U.S. should call1-800-392-3673.

ORDERING ADDITIONALOWNER'S LITERATURETo order the publications in this portfolio,contact Helm, Incorporated at:HELM, INCORPORATED47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, Michigan 48170Attention: Customer ServiceOr to order a free publication catalog, calltoll free: 1-800-782-4356Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

Helm, Incorporated can also be reachedby their website:www.helminc.com(Items in this catalog may be purchasedby credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’sManualFrench Owner’s Manual can be obtainedfrom your authorized dealer or bycontacting Helm, Incorporated using thecontact information listed previously in thissection.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(U.S. ONLY)

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingFord Motor Company.If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Ford MotorCompany.

164


Customer Assistance

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or writeto:Administrator1200 New Jersey Avenue,SoutheastWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(CANADA ONLY)If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform Transport Canada.

Transport Canada Contact Information

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite

1–800–333–0510Phone

165


Customer Assistance

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEVehicles Sold In The U.S.: GettingRoadside AssistanceTo fully assist you should you have avehicle concern, Ford Motor Companyoffers a complimentary roadsideassistance program. This program isseparate from the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. The service is available:• 24 hours, seven days a week.• for the coverage period listed on the

Roadside Assistance Card included inyour Owner's Manual portfolio.

Roadside assistance will cover:• a flat tire change with a good spare, if

provided with the vehicle (exceptvehicles that have been supplied witha tire inflation kit).

• battery jump start.• lock-out assistance (key replacement

cost is the customer's responsibility).• fuel delivery — Independent Service

Contractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law, shall deliver upto 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters) of gasoline or5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuelto a disabled vehicle. Fuel deliveryservice is limited to two no-chargeoccurrences within a 12-month period.

• winch out — available within 100 feet(30.5 meters) of a paved or countymaintained road, no recoveries.

• towing — Ford and Lincoln eligiblevehicles towed to an authorized dealerwithin 35 miles (56.3 kilometers) of thedisablement location or to the nearestauthorized dealer. If a memberrequests to be towed to an authorizeddealer more than 35 miles (56.3kilometers) from the disablementlocation, the member shall beresponsible for any mileage costs inexcess of 35 miles (56.3 kilometers).

Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if thedisabled eligible vehicle requires service atthe nearest authorized dealer. If the traileris disabled, but the towing vehicle isoperational, the trailer does not qualify forany roadside services.

Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : UsingRoadside AssistanceComplete the roadside assistanceidentification card and place it in yourwallet for quick reference. This card isfound in the owner's information portfolioin the glove compartment.U.S. Ford vehicle customers who requireRoadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.If you need to arrange roadside assistancefor yourself, Ford Motor Company willreimburse a reasonable amount for towingto the nearest dealership within 35 miles(56.3 kilometers). To obtainreimbursement information, U.S. Fordvehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.Customers will be asked to submit theiroriginal receipts.

Vehicles Sold In Canada : GettingRoadside AssistanceCanadian customers who require roadsideassistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

Vehicles Sold In Canada : UsingRoadside AssistanceFor your convenience, you may completethe roadside assistance identification cardfound in the centerfold of your warrantyguide and retain for future reference.Canadian roadside coverage and benefitsmay differ from the U.S. coverage. If yourequire more information, please refer tothe coverage section of your warrantyguide, call us in Canada at1-800-665-2006, or visit our website atwww.ford.ca.

166


Roadside Emergencies

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSNote: If used when the vehicle is notrunning, the battery will lose charge. Theremay be insufficient power to restart yourvehicle.

The hazard warning button islocated on the instrument panel.Use it when your vehicle is

creating a safety hazard for othermotorists.

• Press the button to turn on the hazardwarning function, and the front andrear direction indicators will flash.

• Press the button again to turn themoff.

FUEL SHUTOFF

WARNINGFailure to inspect and, if necessary,repair fuel leaks after a collision mayincrease the risk of fire and serious

injury. Ford Motor Company recommendsthat the fuel system be inspected by anauthorized dealer after any collision.

In the event of a moderate to severecollision, this vehicle is equipped with afuel pump shut-off feature that stops theflow of fuel to the engine. Not every impactwill cause a shut-off.Should your vehicle shut off after acollision, you may restart your vehicle bydoing the following:1. Turn the ignition off.2. Turn the ignition to crank.3. Turn the ignition off.4. Turn the ignition on again to re-enable

the fuel pump.For vehicles equipped with a push buttonstart system:

1. Press the START/STOP button toturn the ignition off.

2. Press the brake pedal and press theSTART/STOP button (crankattempt).

3. Remove your foot from the brake pedaland press the START/STOP button(ignition off).

4. Press the START/STOP button againto re-enable the fuel system.

JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGSDo not use fuel lines, engine rockercovers or the intake manifold asgrounding points.Connect batteries with only the samenominal voltage.Always use booster cables withinsulated clamps and adequate sizecable.

Note: Do not disconnect the battery fromyour vehicle’s electrical system.

167



To Connect the Booster Cables

A

B

C D

E102925

Vehicle with low charge batteryABooster battery vehicleBPositive connection cableCNegative connection cableD

1. Position the vehicles so that they donot touch one another.

2. Switch off the engine and any electricalequipment.

3. Connect the positive (+) terminal ofvehicle B with the positive (+) terminalof vehicle A (cable C).

E102923

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal ofvehicle B to the ground connection ofvehicle A (cable D).

WARNINGSDo not connect directly to thenegative (–) terminal of the batterywith low charge.Make sure that the cables are clearof any moving parts and fuel deliverysystem parts.

To Start the Engine1. Run the engine of vehicle B at a

moderately high speed.2. Start the engine of vehicle A.3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of

three minutes before disconnecting thecables.

WARNINGDo not switch on the headlampswhen disconnecting the cables. Thepeak voltage could blow the bulbs.

Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.

168



FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTEngine Compartment Fuse Box

E78332

4-door and 5-door

E156752

169


Fuses

Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse

Electronic stability program module60 A1

Anti-lock braking system40 A1

Transmission control unit40 A2

Engine cooling fan40 A3

Engine cooling fan module60 A3

Heater blower40 A4

Passenger compartment fuse box supply (battery)60 A5

Locking and unlocking30 A6

Ignition switch60 A7

Powertrain control module60 A8

Electronic stability program module40 A9

Engine start inhibitor30 A10

Fuel system30 A11

Power windows60 A12

High speed cooling fan60 A13

Not used-14

Not used-15

Not used-16

High beam20 A17

Powertrain control module15 A18

Fog lamps20 A19

Emissions system15 A20

Fog lamps, high beam7.5 A21

Ignition coil15 A22

Ignition coil20 A22

Exterior lamps right-hand side15 A23

170


Fuses


Emissions system10 A24

Exterior lamps left-hand side15 A25

Horn, battery back-up sounder, interior lamps20 A26

Engine cold start system module7.5 A27

Water pump, active grill shutter15 A27

Direction indicators15 A28

Compressed natural gas, fuel control module20 A29

Air conditioning clutch10 A30

Not used-31

Powertrain control module, transmission control unit7.5 A32

Fuel injectors10 A33

Mass air flow sensor7.5 A33

Heated exterior mirrors30 A34

Fog lamp left-hand side10 A35

Fog lamp right-hand side10 A36

High beam left-hand side10 A37

High beam right-hand side10 A38

Not used-39

Not used-40

Not used-41

Not used-42

Not used-43

Not used-44

Not used-45

Not used-46

171


Fuses

Circuits switchedRelay

Compressed natural gas fuel systemR1

Not usedR2

Powertrain control moduleR3

Heater blowerR4

Engine cooling fanR5

Air conditioning clutchR6

High speed engine cooling fanR7

Not usedR8

Engine start inhibitorR9

High beamR10

Fog lampsR11

Reversing lampR12

Fuel pumpR13

Passenger Compartment Fuse BoxThis fuse box is located behind the glovebox. Open the glove box and empty thecontents. Press the sides inwards andswivel the glove box downward.

172


Fuses

E156756


Ignition switch15 A1

Interior mirror, autowipers, heater relay control7.5 A2

Instrument cluster7.5 A3

Passenger airbag deactivation indicator, passenger sensingsystem

7.5 A4

On-board diagnostics connector15 A5

173


Fuses


Reversing lamps10 A6

Instrument panel, information and entertainment display7.5 A7

Moonroof7.5 A8

Keyless entry, keyless starting20 A9

Audio unit, SYNC15 A10

Windshield wipers20 A11

Climate control7.5 A12

Rear window wiper15 A13

Keyless entry, keyless starting20 A14

Wiper switch15 A15

Electric exterior mirrors, power windows5 A16

Heated seats15 A17

Brake lamp10 A18

Instrument cluster7.5 A19

Airbags10 A20

Electronic power assisted steering, instrument cluster,ignition, wipers, passive anti-theft system

7.5 A21

Transmission control unit, powertrain control module,anti-lock braking system, electronic stability program

7.5 A22

Transmission control unit7.5 A23

Audio unit7.5 A24

Electric exterior mirrors7.5 A25

Locking and unlocking7.5 A26

Not used-27

Not used-28

Not used-29

Not used-30

Power windows30 A31

174


Fuses


Battery back-up sounder20 A32

Auxilliary power points20 A33

Power windows30 A34

Moonroof20 A35

Not used-36

Circuits switchedRelay

Ignition relayR1

Not usedR2

Not usedR3

Driver heated seatR4

Passenger heated seatR5

Keyless startingR6

Keyless startingR7

Battery back-up sounderR8

Accessory delayR9

CHANGING A FUSEFuses

WARNINGAlways replace a fuse with one thathas the specified amperage rating.Using a fuse with a higher amperage

rating can cause severe wire damage andcould start a fire.

E142430

If electrical components in the vehicle arenot working, a fuse may have blown. Blownfuses are identified by a broken wire withinthe fuse. Check the appropriate fusesbefore replacing any electricalcomponents.

175


Fuses

Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color

Color

J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating

--TanTan5A

--BrownBrown7.5A

--RedRed10A

-GreyBlueBlue15A

BlueLight Blue-Yellow20A

WhiteWhite-White25A

PinkPink-Green30A

GreenGreen--40A

Red---50A

Yellow---60A

176


Fuses

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network of Fordauthorized dealers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. We believe that their speciallytrained technicians are best qualified toservice your vehicle properly and expertly.They are supported by a wide range ofhighly specialized tools developedspecifically for servicing your vehicle.To help you service your vehicle, weprovide scheduled maintenanceinformation which makes tracking routineservice easy. See ScheduledMaintenance (page 371).If your vehicle requires professional service,your authorized dealer can provide thenecessary parts and service. Check yourwarranty information to find out whichparts and services are covered.Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,fluids and service parts conforming tospecifications. Motorcraft® parts aredesigned and built to provide the bestperformance in your vehicle.

Precautions• Do not work on a hot engine.• Make sure that nothing gets caught in

moving parts.• Do not work on a vehicle with the

engine running in an enclosed space,unless you are sure you have enoughventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burningmaterial (such as cigarettes) awayfrom the battery and all fuel relatedparts.

Working with the Engine Off1. Set the parking brake and shift to P

(Park).2. Turn off the engine and remove the key

(if equipped).3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine OnWARNING

To reduce the risk of vehicle damageand/or personal burn injuries, do notstart your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while theengine is running.

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P(Park).

2. Block the wheels

OPENING AND CLOSING THEHOODOpening the Hood

E102165

1. Pull the hood release handle.

177


Maintenance

E163236

2. Move the catch to the left.E87786

3. Open the hood and support it with thehood strut.

Closing the Hood1. Remove the hood strut from the catch

and secure correctly after use.2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop

from under its own weight for the last8 - 11 inches (20 – 30 centimeters).

Note: Make sure that you have closed thehood correctly.

178


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.0L ECOBOOST™

E163005

A B C D

EGH F

Engine coolant reservoir*: See Engine Coolant Check (page 183).AEngine oil filler cap*: See Engine Oil Check (page 182).BBattery: See Changing the 12V Battery (page 186).CBrake and clutch fluid reservoir*: See Brake Fluid Check (page 185).DEngine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 169).EWindshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check(page 186).

F

Air cleaner: See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 187).GEngine oil dipstick*: See Engine Oil Check (page 182).H

* The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

179


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (88KW/120PS) - SIGMA

E163006

A B C D

H G F E

Engine coolant reservoir*: See Engine Coolant Check (page 183).AEngine oil filler cap*: See Engine Oil Check (page 182).BBattery: See Changing the 12V Battery (page 186).CBrake and clutch fluid reservoir : See Brake Fluid Check (page 185).DEngine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 169).EWindshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check(page 186).

F

Air cleaner: See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 187).GEngine oil dipstick*: See Engine Oil Check (page 182).H

* The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

180


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST™

A B C D

FGH

E

E163007

Engine coolant reservoir*: See Engine Coolant Check (page 183).AEngine oil filler cap*: See Engine Oil Check (page 182).BEngine oil dipstick*: See Engine Oil Check (page 182).CBattery: See Changing the 12V Battery (page 186).DBrake and clutch fluid reservoir*: See Brake Fluid Check (page 185).EEngine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 169).FWindshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check(page 186).

G

Air cleaner: See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 187).H* The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

181


Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.0LECOBOOST™

E141337

A B

MinimumAMaximumB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATEC-16V TI-VCT (88KW/120PS) - SIGMA

E95540

BA

MinimumAMaximumB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LECOBOOST™

A B

E134114

MinimumAMaximumB

ENGINE OIL CHECKNote: Check the level before starting theengine.Note: Make sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level

ground.2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes

for the oil to drain into the oil pan.3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with

a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace thedipstick and remove it again to checkthe oil level.

If the level is at the MIN mark, add oilimmediately.

Adding Engine OilNote: Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.Note: Do not add oil further than the MAXmark. Oil levels above the MAX mark maycause engine damage.

182


Maintenance

E142732

Only use oils certified for gasoline enginesby the American Petroleum Institute (API).An oil with this trademark symbolconforms to the current engine andemission system protection standards andfuel economy requirements of theInternational Lubricants SpecificationAdvisory Council (ILSAC), comprised ofU.S. and Japanese automobilemanufacturers.1. Remove the filler cap.2. Add engine oil that meets the Ford

specifications. See Maintenance(page 177).

3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until youfeel a strong resistance.

Resetting the Oil Life MonitoringSystemNote: Reset the oil life monitoring only afteran oil change.1. Turn the ignition key to the on position.

Do not start the engine. For vehicleswith push-button start, press and holdthe start button for two secondswithout pressing the brake pedal. Donot attempt to start the engine.

2. Press both the accelerator and brakepedals at the same time.

3. Keep both pedals fully pressed.

4. After three seconds, the Service: Oilreset in prog. message will bedisplayed.

5. After 25 seconds, the Service: Oil resetcomplete message will be displayed.

6. Release both the accelerator and brakepedals.

7. The Service: Oil reset completemessage will no longer be displayed.

8. Rotate the key to the off position. Forvehicles with push-button start, pressthe start button to turn the vehicle offcompletely.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECKChecking the Engine CoolantWhen the engine is cold, check theconcentration and level of the enginecoolant at the intervals listed in thescheduled maintenance information. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 371).Note: Make sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the coolantreservoir.Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may extend beyond the MAX markNote: If the level is at the MIN mark, belowthe MIN mark, or empty, add coolantimmediately. See Adding Engine Coolantin this chapter.The coolant concentration should bemaintained within 48% to 50%, whichequates to a freeze point between -30°F(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).Note: For best results, coolantconcentration should be tested with arefractometer such as Rotunda tool300-ROB75240 available from yourauthorized dealer. Ford does notrecommend the use of hydrometers orcoolant test strips for measuring coolantconcentrations.

183


Maintenance

Note: Automotive fluids are notinterchangeable. Do not use engine coolantor antifreeze or windshield washer fluidoutside of its specified function and vehiclelocation.

Adding Engine CoolantWARNINGS

Do not add engine coolant when theengine is hot. Steam and scaldingliquids released from a hot cooling

system can burn you badly. Also, you canbe burned if you spill coolant on hot engineparts.

Do not put engine coolant in thewindshield washer fluid container. Ifsprayed on the windshield, engine

coolant could make it difficult to seethrough the windshield.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,make sure the engine is cool beforeunscrewing the coolant pressure

relief cap. The cooling system is underpressure; steam and hot liquid can comeout forcefully when the cap is loosenedslightly.

Do not add coolant further than theMAX mark.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, coolingsystem sealants, or additives as they cancause damage to the engine cooling orheating systems. This damage would notbe covered under your vehicle’s warranty.Note: During normal vehicle operation, theengine coolant may change color fromorange to pink or light red. As long as theengine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,this color change does not indicate theengine coolant has degraded nor does itrequire the engine coolant to be drained, thesystem to be flushed, or the engine coolantto be replaced.

• Do not mix different colors or types ofcoolant in your vehicle. Make sure thecorrect coolant is used. Mixing ofengine coolants may harm yourengine’s cooling system. The use of animproper coolant may harm engine andcooling system components and mayvoid the warranty. Use predilutedengine coolant meeting the Fordspecification. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 235).

• In case of emergency, a large amountof water without engine coolant maybe added in order to reach a vehicleservice location. In this instance, thecooling system must be drained,chemically cleaned with Motorcraft®Premium Cooling System Flush, andrefilled with engine coolant as soon aspossible. Water alone (without enginecoolant) can cause engine damagefrom corrosion, overheating or freezing.

• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine orany engine coolants mixed with alcoholor methanol antifreeze (coolant).Alcohol and other liquids can causeengine damage from overheating orfreezing.

• Do not add extra inhibitors or additivesto the coolant. These can be harmfuland compromise the corrosionprotection of the engine coolant.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure willescape as you unscrew the cap.Add prediluted engine coolant meeting theFord specification. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 235).Whenever coolant has been added, thecoolant level in the coolant reservoirshould be checked the next few times youdrive the vehicle. If necessary, add enoughprediluted engine coolant to bring thecoolant level to the proper level.

184


Maintenance

Recycled Engine CoolantFord Motor Company does not recommendthe use of recycled engine coolant since aFord-approved recycling process is not yetavailable.Used engine coolant should be disposedof in an appropriate manner. Follow yourcommunity’s regulations and standardsfor recycling and disposing of automotivefluids.

Severe ClimatesIf you drive in extremely cold climates:• It may be necessary to have a Ford

authorized dealer increase the coolantconcentration above 50%.

• A coolant concentration of 60% willprovide improved freeze pointprotection. Engine coolantconcentrations above 60% willdecrease the overheat protectioncharacteristics of the engine coolantand may cause engine damage

If you drive in extremely hot climates:• It may be necessary to have a Ford

authorized dealer decrease the coolantconcentration to 40%.

• A coolant concentration of 40% willprovide improved overheat protection.Engine coolant concentrations below40% will decrease the corrosion/freezeprotection characteristics of the enginecoolant and may cause enginedamage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extremeclimates should use prediluted enginecoolant for optimum cooling system andengine protection.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID CHECKNote: Transmission fluid should be checkedby an authorized dealer. If required, fluidshould be added by an authorized dealer.The automatic transmission does not havea transmission fluid dipstick.Have an authorized dealer check andchange the transmission fluid and filter atthe correct service interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 371). Yourtransmission does not consume fluid.However, the fluid level should be checkedif the transmission is not working properly,(i.e., if the transmission slips or shiftsslowly) or if you notice some sign of fluidleakage.Do not use supplemental transmissionfluid additives, treatments or cleaningagents. The use of these materials mayaffect transmission operation and resultin damage to internal transmissioncomponents.

BRAKE FLUID CHECKFluid levels between the MIN and MAXlines are within the normal operating range;there is no need to add fluid. If the fluidlevels are outside of the normal operatingrange, the performance of the systemcould be compromised; seek service fromyour authorized dealer immediately.

POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECKYour vehicle is equipped with an electricpower steering (EPS) system. There is nofluid reservoir to check or fill.

185


Maintenance

FUEL FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a lifetimefuel filter that is integrated with the fueltank. Regular maintenance or replacementis not needed.

WASHER FLUID CHECKNote: The reservoir supplies the front andrear washer systems.When adding fluid, use a mixture of washerfluid and water to help prevent freezing incold weather and improve the cleaningcapability. We recommend that you useonly high quality washer fluid.For information on fluid dilution, refer tothe product instructions.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNINGFor vehicles with start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Youmust replace the battery with one of

exactly the same specification.

Note: Where applicable you mustreprogram the audio system using thekeycode.The battery is located in the enginecompartment. See Maintenance (page177).

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blades with washer fluidor water applied with a soft sponge orcloth.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADESWindshield Wiper BladesChanging the Windshield Wiper Blades

E728991

2

1. Press the locking button.2. Remove the wiper blade.3. Install in the reverse order.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

Rear Window Wiper Blade1. Lift the wiper arm.

186


Maintenance

E130060

3

2

2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade from thewiper arm

3. Disengage the wiper blade from thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.5. Install in the reverse order.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIRFILTER

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of vehicle damageand personal burn injuries, do notstart your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while theengine is running.

When changing the air filter element, useonly the air filter element listed. SeeTechnical Specifications (page 236).On vehicles with an EcoBoost engine, whenservicing the air cleaner it is important thatno foreign material enters the air inductionsystem. The engine and turbocharger aresusceptible to damage from even smallparticles.

Change the air filter element at the correctinterval. See Scheduled Maintenance(page 371).Note: Failure to use the correct air filterelement may result in severe enginedamage. Your warranty may be void for anydamage to the engine if the correct air filterelement is not used.Vehicles with 1.0L EcoBoost and 1.6LEcoBoost Engine

E156923

Vehicles with 1.6L Duratec-16V Engine

E156924

1. Remove the retaining screws thatsecure the air filter housing cover.

2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.

187


Maintenance

3. Remove the air filter element from theair filter housing.

4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filterhousing and cover to make sure no dirtgets in the engine and to make sure youhave a good seal.

5. Install a new air filter element. Becareful not to crimp the filter elementedges between the air filter housingand cover. This could cause filterdamage and allow unfiltered air toenter the engine if not correctly seated.

6. Install the air filter housing cover.7. Install the retaining screws to secure

the air filter housing cover to the airfilter housing.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPSVertical Aim AdjustmentIf your vehicle has been involved in anaccident, have the alignment of yourheadlamps checked by an authorizeddealer.

Headlamp Aiming Target

E142592

8 feet (2.4 meters)ACenter height of lamp to groundB25 feet (7.6 meters)CHorizontal reference lineD

Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a

wall or screen on a level surface,approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)away.

2. Measure the height of the headlampbulb center from the ground and markan 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontalreference line on the vertical wall orscreen at this height.

Note: To see a clearer light pattern foradjusting, you may want to block the lightfrom one headlamp while adjusting theother.3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to

illuminate the wall or screen and openthe hood.

E142465

4. On the wall or screen you will observea flat zone of high intensity lightlocated at the top of the right handportion of the beam pattern. If the topedge of the high intensity light zone isnot at the horizontal reference line,adjust the headlamp.

188


Maintenance

E156848

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on eachheadlamp. Using a Phillips #2screwdriver, turn the adjuster eitherclockwise or counterclockwise in orderto adjust the vertical aim of theheadlamp. The horizontal edge of thebrighter light should touch thehorizontal reference line.

6. Close the hood and turn the lamps off.

Horizontal Aim AdjustmentHorizontal aim is not required for thisvehicle and is not adjustable.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP1. Open the hood. See Opening and

Closing the Hood (page 177).

E146878

2

2. Remove the screws.

E102590

34

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Remove the headlamp.Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you reconnect the electricalconnector correctly.Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you fully engage the headlamp inthe retaining clips.

189


Maintenance

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGSSwitch the lamps and the ignition off.

Let the bulb cool down beforeremoving it.Do not touch the glass of the bulb.

Note: Only fit bulbs of the correctspecification.Note: The following instructions describehow to remove the bulbs. Fit replacementsin the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

HeadlampNote: Remove the covers to gain access tothe bulbs.

BA C D

E159827

Side markerAHeadlamp low beamBHeadlamp high beamCDirection indicatorD

Side Marker1. Remove the headlamp. See

Removing a Headlamp (page 189).

E161707

A

2. Remove the bulb holder.3. Remove the bulb.

Headlamp Low Beam1. Remove the headlamp. See


E146803

4

2

2. Remove the cover.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Release the clip and remove the bulb.Note: Do not touch the glass of the bulb.

Headlamp High Beam1. Remove the headlamp. See


190


Maintenance

E146804

2

3

2. Remove the cover.3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.Note: Do not touch the glass of the bulb.

Direction Indicator1. Remove the headlamp. See


E146805

3

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.

3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it counterclockwise andremove it.

Side Direction Indicator

1

2

E112777

1. Press the side of the cover to releasethe clips.

2. Remove the cover.

3

E112778

3. Remove the bulb and bulb holder.Remove the bulb.

191


Maintenance

Front Fog Lamps

E161665

1

1. Remove the retaining clips to gainaccess to the lamp assembly.

23

4

E161667

Note: You cannot separate the fog lampbulb from the bulb holder.2. Using a suitable implement, remove

the cover.3. Remove the screws.4. Remove the lamp.

5

E161670

6

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.6. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.

Rear LampsBrake, Tail and Direction IndicatorLamps1. Remove the trim and disconnect the

electrical connector.2. Loosen the wing nut and carefully pull

out the rear lamp.

192


Maintenance

E161816

1

3

2

3. Unclip the bulb holder and remove it.4. Remove the bulb.

E161793

A

Reversing Lamp

1

E113384

1. Remove the trim panel and disconnectthe electrical connector.

E161817

2. Loosen the wing nut and carefully pullout the rear lamp.

E163004

4


4. Remove the bulb.

Center High Mounted Stop LampNote: The LED board is not a serviceableitem, please consult your dealer if this fails.

193


Maintenance

License Plate Lamp

3

2

1

E72789

1. Carefully release the spring clip.2. Remove the lamp.3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

Interior Lamp

E99452

2

3

1

1. Carefully remove the lamp.2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.3. Remove the bulb.

Reading Lamps

E99453

2

3

1



Luggage Compartment Lamp,Footwell Lamp and Liftgate Lamp

E72784

1. Carefully pry out the lamp.2. Remove the bulb.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGSSwitch the lamps and the ignition off.

194


Maintenance

WARNINGSLet the bulb cool down beforeremoving it.Do not touch the glass of the bulb.

Note: Only fit bulbs of the correctspecification.Note: The following instructions describehow to remove the bulbs. Fit replacementsin the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

HeadlampNote: Remove the covers to gain access tothe bulbs.

BA C D

E159827

Side markerAHeadlamp low beamBHeadlamp high beamCDirection indicatorD

Side Marker1. Remove the headlamp. See


E161707

A

2. Remove the bulb holder.3. Remove the bulb.

Headlamp Low Beam1. Remove the headlamp. See


E146803

4

2

2. Remove the cover.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Release the clip and remove the bulb.Note: Do not touch the glass of the bulb.

Headlamp High Beam1. Remove the headlamp. See


195


Maintenance

E146804

2

3

2. Remove the cover.3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.Note: Do not touch the glass of the bulb.

Direction Indicator1. Remove the headlamp. See


E146805

3


3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it counterclockwise andremove it.

Side Direction Indicator

1

2

E112777

1. Press the side of the cover to releasethe clips.

2. Remove the cover.

3

E112778

3. Remove the bulb and bulb holder.Remove the bulb.

196


Maintenance

Front Fog Lamps

E161665

1

1. Remove the retaining clips to gainaccess to the lamp assembly.

23

4

E161667

Note: You cannot separate the fog lampbulb from the bulb holder.2. Using a suitable implement, remove

the cover.3. Remove the screws.4. Remove the lamp.

5

E161670

6


and remove it.

Rear Lamps

E102854

1

1. Remove the screws.

197


Maintenance

E1616712


and remove it.

E146871

A B

C4. Gently press the bulb into the bulb

holder, turn it counterclockwise andremove it.

A. IndicatorB. Tail and brakeC. Reverse

Center High Mounted Stop LampNote: The LED board is not a serviceableitem, please consult your dealer if this fails.

License Plate Lamp

3

2

1

E72789

1. Carefully release the spring clip.2. Remove the lamp.3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

Interior Lamp

E99452

2

3

1



198


Maintenance

Reading Lamps

E99453

2

3

1



Luggage Compartment Lamp,Footwell Lamp and Liftgate Lamp

E72784

1. Carefully pry out the lamp.2. Remove the bulb.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Power (watt)SpecificationLamp

27/7PY27/7Front direction indicator

55H1LLHeadlamp high beam

55H11Headlamp low beam

55H11Front fog lamp

5WY5WSide direction indicator

27/7PY27/7Rear direction indicator

27/7PY27/7Brake and tail lamp

16W16WReversing lamp

5W5WLicense plate lamp

6W6WInterior lamp

5W5WReading lamp

5W5WLuggage compartment lamp

199


Maintenance

Note: On some vehicles the lamps are LED.These are not serviceable items, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealer assoon as possible.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 1.0L ECOBOOST™Capacities

CapacityItem

6.1 qt (5.8 L)Engine cooling system

4.3 qt (4.1 L)Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter

4.2 qt (4.0 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter

0.8 qt (0.75 L)Engine oil top-up - raise the level on the dipstickfrom minimum to maximum

12.4 gal (47 L)Fuel tank

1.8 qt (1.7 L)Automatic transmission

2.6 qt (2.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system -including headlamp washer

Specifications

MaterialsSpecificationNameWSS-M2C945-AMotorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor

Oil or Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor OilXO-5W20-QSP, XO-5W20-QFS

WSS-M2C200-D2Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission FluidXT-11-QDC

WSD-M2C200-CMotorcraft® Full Synthetic Manual Transmission FluidXT-M5-QS

WSS-M97B44-D2Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant PredilutedVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor VehicleBrake FluidPM-20

ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease SprayXL-5

200


Maintenance

Use oil and fluids that meet the definedspecification and viscosity grades.Note: If you unable to find an engine oil thatmeets the specification defined byWSS-M2C913-D, you must use an SAE5W-30 engine oil defined by ACEA A5/B5for top-up only.

If you use oil and fluids that do not meetthe defined specification and viscositygrades this may lead to:• component damage which may not be

covered by the vehicle Warranty.• longer engine cranking periods.• increased emission levels.• reduced engine performance.• reduced fuel economy.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 1.6L ECOBOOST™Capacities

CapacityItem



4 qt (3.8 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter





Specifications






201


Maintenance

SpecificationNameWSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle

Brake FluidPM-20

ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease SprayXL-5Use oil and fluids that meet the definedspecification and viscosity grades.Note: If you unable to find an engine oil thatmeets the specification defined, you mustuse an SAE 5W-30 engine oil defined byACEA A5/B5 for top-up only.

If you use oil and fluids that do not meetthe defined specification and viscositygrades this may lead to:• component damage which may not be


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT(SIGMA)Capacities

CapacityItem



4 qt (3.8 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter




2.2 qt (2.1 L)Manual transmission


202


Maintenance

Specifications






WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor VehicleBrake FluidPM-20

ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease SprayXL-5Use oil and fluids that meet the definedspecification and viscosity grades.Note: If you unable to find an engine oil thatmeets the specification defined byWSS-M2C913-D, you must use an SAE5W-30 engine oil defined by ACEA A5/B5for top-up only.If you use oil and fluids that do not meetthe defined specification and viscositygrades this may lead to:• component damage which may not be


203


Maintenance

CLEANING PRODUCTSFor best results, use the following productsor products of equivalent quality:Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner(ZC-15)Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)Motorcraft Engine Shampoo andDegreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canadaonly) (CXC-66-A)Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canadaonly) (CXC-101)Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner(Canada only) (CXC-100)Motorcraft Premium Quality WindshieldWasher Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,B, D or F)]Motorcraft Premium Windshield WashConcentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)(ZC-32-B1)Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.only) (ZC-14)Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner(ZC-23)Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner(ZC-37-A)

CLEANING THE EXTERIORWash your vehicle regularly with cool orlukewarm water and a neutral pHshampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash.

• Never use strong household detergentsor soap, such as dish washing orlaundry liquid. These products candiscolor and spot painted surfaces.

• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to thetouch” or during exposure to strong,direct sunlight.

• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or softterry cloth towel in order to eliminatewater spotting.

• Immediately remove items such asgasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings andinsect deposits because they can causedamage to your vehicle’s paintworkand trim over time. Use Motorcraft Bugand Tar Remover.

• Remove any exterior accessories, suchas antennas, before entering a carwash.

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellentscan damage any painted surface; if thesesubstances come in contact with yourvehicle, wash off as soon as possible.

Stripes or Graphics (if equipped)Do not use a commercial or high-pressuresprayer on the surface or edge of stripesand graphics. This can cause damage tothe film and cause the edge of the film topeel away from the vehicle surface.

Exterior ChromeNote: Never use abrasive materials such assteel wool or plastic pads as they canscratch the chrome surface.Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metalcleaner or polish on wheels and wheelcovers

204


Vehicle Care

• Wash your vehicle first, using cool orlukewarm water and a neutral pHshampoo, such as Motorcraft DetailWash.

• Use Motorcraft Custom Bright MetalCleaner. Apply the product as youwould a wax to clean bumpers andother chrome parts; allow the cleanerto dry for a few minutes, then wipe offthe haze with a clean, dry rag.

• Do not apply cleaning product to hotsurfaces and do not leave cleaningproduct on chrome surfaces longerthan the time recommended.

• Using other non-recommendedcleaners can result in severe andpermanent cosmetic damage.

UnderbodyFlush the complete underside of yourvehicle frequently. Keep body and doordrain holes free from packed dirt.

Cleaning Plastic Exterior PartsUse only approved products to cleanplastic parts• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft

Detail Wash.• If tar or grease spots are present, use

Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

WAXINGRegular waxing is necessary to protect yourcar's paint from the elements. Werecommend that you wash and wax thepainted surface once or twice a year.When washing and waxing, park yourvehicle in a shaded area out of directsunlight. Always wash your vehicle beforeapplying wax.

• Use a quality wax that does not containabrasives.

• Follow the manufacturer’s instructionsto apply and remove the wax.

• Apply a small amount of wax in aback-and-forth motion, not in circles.

• Do not allow wax to come in contactwith any non-body (low-gloss black)colored trim. The wax will discolor orstain the parts over time.• Roof racks.• Bumpers.• Grained door handles.• Side moldings.• Mirror housings.• Windshield cowl area.

• Do not apply wax to glass areas.• After waxing, your car's paint should

feel smooth, and be free of streaks andsmudges.

CLEANING THE ENGINEEngines are more efficient when they areclean because grease and dirt buildup keepthe engine warmer than normal.When washing:• Take care when using a power washer

to clean the engine. The high-pressurefluid could penetrate the sealed partsand cause damage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with coldwater to avoid cracking the engineblock or other engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo andDegreaser on all parts that requirecleaning and pressure rinse clean. InCanada, use Motorcraft EngineShampoo.

• Never wash or rinse the engine while itis hot or running; water in the runningengine may cause internal damage.

205


Vehicle Care

• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,spark plug wire or spark plug well, orthe area in and around these locations.

• Cover the battery, power distributionbox, and air filter assembly to preventwater damage when cleaning theengine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS ANDWIPER BLADESCar wash chemicals and environmentalfallout can result in windshield and wiperblade contamination. Dirty windshield andwipers will result in poor windshield wiperoperation. Keep the windshield and wiperblades clean to maintain windshield wiperperformance.To clean the windshield and wiper blades:• Clean the windshield with a

non-abrasive glass cleaner.• For windshields contaminated with

tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, cleanthe entire windshield using steel wool(no greater than 0000 grade) in acircular motion and rinse with water.

• Clean the wiper blades with isopropylrubbing alcohol or windshield washerfluid.

Note: Do not use razor blades or othersharp objects to clean or remove decalsfrom the inside of the heated rear window.The vehicle warranty does not coverdamage caused to the heated rear windowgrid lines.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

WARNINGSDo not use cleaning solvents, bleachor dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,as these actions may weaken the

belt webbing.

WARNINGSOn vehicles equipped withseat-mounted airbags, do not usechemical solvents or strong

detergents. Such products couldcontaminate the side airbag system andaffect performance of the side airbag in acollision.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety beltsand seats equipped with side airbags:• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.• Remove light stains and soil with

Motorcraft Professional StrengthCarpet & Upholstery Cleaner.

• If grease or tar is present on thematerial, spot-clean the area first withMotorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. InCanada, use Motorcraft Multi-PurposeCleaner.

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spotcleaning, clean the entire areaimmediately (but do not oversaturate)or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaningproducts or glass cleaners, which canstain and discolor the fabric and affectthe flame retardant abilities of the seatmaterials.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGEYou should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choice ofproducts are available from an authorizeddealer.Remove particles such as bird droppings,tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, roadsalt and industrial fallout before repairingpaint chips.

206


Vehicle Care

Always read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions before using the products.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENTPANEL AND INSTRUMENTCLUSTER LENS

WARNINGDo not use chemical solvents orstrong detergents when cleaning thesteering wheel or instrument panel

to avoid contamination of the airbagsystem.

Clean the instrument panel and clusterlens with a clean, damp, white cottoncloth, then use a clean and dry whitecotton cloth to dry these areas.• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase

the gloss of the upper portion of theinstrument panel. The dull finish in thisarea helps protect you fromundesirable windshield reflection.

• Be certain to wash or wipe your handsclean if you have been in contact withcertain products such as insectrepellent and suntan lotion in order toavoid possible damage to the interiorpainted surfaces.

• Do not use household or glass cleanersas these may damage the finish of theinstrument panel, interior trim andcluster lens.

• Do not allow air fresheners and handsanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.Damage may not be covered by yourwarranty.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice hasbeen spilled on the instrument panel or oninterior trim surfaces, clean as follows:1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

white, cotton cloth.

2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,white cotton cloth. For more thoroughcleaning, use a mild soap and watersolution. If the spot cannot becompletely cleaned by this method,the area may be cleaned using acommercially available cleaningproduct designed for automotiveinteriors.

3. If necessary, apply more soap andwater solution or cleaning product toa clean, white, cotton cloth and pressthe cloth onto the soiled area. Allowthis to set at room temperature for 30minutes.

4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is notsoiled badly, use this cloth to clean thearea by using a rubbing motion for 60seconds.

5. Following this, wipe area dry with aclean, white, cotton cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF

EQUIPPED)

For routine cleaning, wipe the surface witha soft, damp cloth. For more thoroughcleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soapand water solution. Dry the area with a softcloth.If you cannot completely clean the leatherusing a mild soap and water solution, youcan try a commercially available leathercleaning product designed for automotiveinteriors.Note: To check for compatibility, first testany cleaner or stain remover on aninconspicuous part of the leather.You should:

207


Vehicle Care

• remove dust and loose dirt with avacuum cleaner

• clean spills and stains as quickly aspossible

• check for compatibility by first testingany cleaner or stain remover on aninconspicuous part of the leather.

Do not use the following products as thesemay damage the leather:• oil/petroleum-based leather

conditioners• household cleaners• alcohol solutions• solvents or cleaners intended

specifically for rubber, vinyl andplastics.

CLEANING THE ALLOYWHEELSNote: Do not apply a cleaning chemical towarm or hot wheel rims and covers.Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, incombination with brush agitation to removebrake dust and dirt, could wear away theclear coat finish over a period of time.Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-basedor high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steelwool, fuels or strong household detergent.Note: If you intend parking your vehicle foran extended period after cleaning thewheels with a wheel cleaner, drive yourvehicle for a few minutes before doing so.This will reduce the risk of increasedcorrosion of the brake discs, brake pads andlinings.Note: Some automatic car washes maycause damage to the finish on your wheelrims and covers.

Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coatedwith a clear coat paint finish. To maintaintheir condition we recommend that you:• Clean them weekly with the

recommended wheel and tire cleaner.• Use a sponge to remove heavy

deposits of dirt and brake dustaccumulation.

• Rinse them thoroughly with apressurized stream of water when youhave completed the cleaning process.

We recommend that you use Ford servicewheel cleaner. Make sure that you readand follow the manufacturer’s instructions.Using other non-recommended cleaningproducts can result in severe andpermanent cosmetic damage.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you plan on storing your vehicle for anextended period of time (30 days or more),read the following maintenancerecommendations to make sure yourvehicle stays in good operating condition.All motor vehicles and their componentswere engineered and tested for reliable,regular driving. Long term storage undervarious conditions may lead to componentdegradation or failure unless specificprecautions are taken to preserve thecomponents.

General• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated

place.• Protect from sunlight, if possible.• If vehicles are stored outside, they

require regular maintenance to protectagainst rust and damage.

208


Vehicle Care

Body• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to

remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud fromexterior surfaces, rear-wheel housingand underside of front fenders.

• Periodically wash your vehicle storedin exposed locations.

• Touch-up exposed or primed metal toprevent rust.

• Cover chrome and stainless steel partswith a thick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessarywhen your vehicle is washed.

• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lidhinges, and latches with a light gradeoil.

• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and

solvents.

Engine• The engine oil and filter should be

changed prior to storage, as usedengine oil contain contaminates thatmay cause engine damage.

• Start the engine every 15 days. Run atfast idle until it reaches normaloperating temperature

• With your foot on the brake, shiftthrough all the gears while the engineis running.

Fuel system• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel

until the first automatic shutoff of thefuel pump nozzle.

Cooling system• Protect against freezing temperatures.• When removing your vehicle from

storage, check coolant fluid level.Confirm there are no cooling systemleaks, and fluid is at the recommendedlevel.

Battery• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep

connections clean.• If storing your vehicle for more than 30

days without recharging the battery, itmay be advisable to disconnect thebattery cables to ensure battery chargeis maintained for quick starting.

Note: If battery cables are disconnected, itwill be necessary to reset memory features.

Brakes• Make sure brakes and parking brake

are fully released.

Tires• Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers

and pins under your vehicle are coveredwith grease to prevent rust.

• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8meters) every 15 days to lubricateworking parts and prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From StorageWhen your vehicle is ready to come out ofstorage, do the following:• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt

or grease film build-up on windowsurfaces.

• Check windshield wipers for anydeterioration.

209


Vehicle Care

• Check under the hood for any foreignmaterial that may have collectedduring storage (mice/squirrel nests).

• Check the exhaust for any foreignmaterial that may have collectedduring storage.

• Check tire pressures and set tireinflation per the Tire Label.

• Check brake pedal operation. Driveyour vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters) backand forth to remove rust build-up.

• Check fluid levels (including coolant,oil and gas) to make sure there are noleaks, and fluids are at recommendedlevels.

• If the battery was removed, clean thebattery cable ends and inspect.

Contact your authorized dealer if you haveany concerns or issues.

210


Vehicle Care

GENERAL INFORMATIONA decal with tire pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening.Check and set the tire pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive your vehicle and whenthe tires are cold.Note: Check your tire pressures regularly tooptimize fuel economy.Note: Use only approved wheel and tiresizes. Using other sizes could damage yourvehicle and will make the National TypeApproval invalid.Note: If you change the diameter of the tiresfrom that fitted at the factory, thespeedometer may not display the correctspeed. Take your vehicle to an authorizeddealer to have the engine managementsystem reprogrammed.Note: If you intend to change the size of thewheels from that fitted at the factory, checkthe suitability with an authorized dealer.

TIRE CARE

Important information for205/40R17 low-profile tiresand wheels If your vehicle isequipped with 205/40R17 tires,they are low-profile tires. Thesetires and wheels are designed togive your vehicle a sportappearance. With low-profile tires,you may notice an increase in roadnoise and faster tire wear,depending on road conditions and

driving styles. Due to their design,low-profile tires and wheels aremore prone to road damage frompotholes, rough or unpaved roads,car wash rails and curb contactthan standard tires and wheels.Note: Your vehicle’s warranty doesnot cover these types of damage.Tires should always be kept at thecorrect inflation pressures andextra caution should be taken whenoperating on rough roads to avoidimpacts that could cause wheeland tire damage.Information About UniformTire Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires.The Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample: Treadwear 200Traction AA Temperature A.These Tire Quality Grades aredetermined by standards that theUnited States Department ofTransportation has set.

211


Wheels and Tires

Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires.They do not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary usespare tires, light truck or LT typetires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches orlimited production tires as definedin Title 49 Code of FederalRegulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).U.S. Department ofTransportation Tire qualitygrades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires FordMotor Company to give you thefollowing information about tiregrades exactly as the governmenthas written it.TreadwearThe treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B C

WARNINGThe traction grade assignedto this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highestto lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Thegrades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.Temperature A B C

WARNINGThe temperature grade forthis tire is established for a

tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory

212


Wheels and Tires

test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 139. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law.Glossary of Tire Terminology* Tire label: A label showing theOE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,recommended inflation pressureand the maximum weight thevehicle can carry.*Tire Identification Number(TIN): A number on the sidewallof each tire providing informationabout the tire brand andmanufacturing plant, tire size anddate of manufacture. Also referredto as DOT code.*Inflation pressure: A measureof the amount of air in a tire.*Standard load: A class ofP-metric or Metric tires designedto carry a maximum load at 35 psi[37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will notincrease the tire’s load carryingcapability.

*Extra load: A class of P-metricor Metric tires designed to carry aheavier maximum load at 41 psi[43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will notincrease the tire’s load carryingcapability.*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit ofair pressure.*PSI: Pounds per square inch, astandard unit of air pressure.*Cold tire pressure: The tirepressure when the vehicle hasbeen stationary and out of directsunlight for an hour or more andprior to the vehicle being driven for1 mile (1.6 kilometers).*Recommended inflationpressure: The cold inflationpressure found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label located onthe B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver’s door.*B-pillar: The structural memberat the side of the vehicle behindthe front door* Bead area of the tire: Area ofthe tire next to the rim.* Sidewall of the tire: Areabetween the bead area and thetread.

213


Wheels and Tires

* Tread area of the tire: Area ofthe perimeter of the tire thatcontacts the road when mountedon the vehicle.*Rim: The metal support (wheel)for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tirebeads are seated.Information Contained on theTire SidewallBoth U.S. and Canada Federalregulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies anddescribes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and alsoprovides a U.S. DOT TireIdentification Number for safetystandard certification and in caseof a recall.

Information on P Type Tires

H

I

J

KL

M

A

BC D E

FG

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example ofa tire size, load index and speedrating. The definitions of theseitems are listed below. (Note thatthe tire size, load index and speedrating for your vehicle may bedifferent from this example.)A. P: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association(T&RA), that may be used forservice on cars, SUVs, minivansand light trucks. Note: If your tiresize does not begin with a letterthis may mean it is designated byeither ETRTO (European Tire andRim Technical Organization) orJATMA (Japan Tire ManufacturingAssociation).

214


Wheels and Tires

B. 215: Indicates the nominalwidth of the tire in millimetersfrom sidewall edge to sidewalledge. In general, the larger thenumber, the wider the tire.C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio ofheight to width.D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.F. 95: Indicates the tire's loadindex. It is an index that relates tohow much weight a tire can carry.You may find this information inyour owner’s manual. If not,contact a local tire dealer.Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because itis not required by federal law.G. H: Indicates the tire's speedrating. The speed rating denotesthe speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time under a standardcondition of load and inflationpressure. The tires on your vehiclemay operate at differentconditions for load and inflationpressure. These speed ratings mayneed to be adjusted for thedifference in conditions. Theratings range from 81 mph (130km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).These ratings are listed in thefollowing chart.

Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because itis not required by federal law.

Speed rating - mph(km/h)

Letterrating

81 mph (130 km/h)M87 mph (140 km/h)N99 mph (159 km/h)Q106 mph (171 km/h)R112 mph (180 km/h)S118 mph (190 km/h)T124 mph (200 km/h)U130 mph (210 km/h)H149 mph (240 km/h)V168 mph (270 km/h)W186 mph (299 km/h)Y

Note: For tires with a maximumspeed capability over 149 mph(240 km/h), tire manufacturerssometimes use the letters ZR. Forthose with a maximum speedcapability over 186 mph (299km/h), tire manufacturers alwaysuse the letters ZR.

H. U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): This begins withthe letters DOT and indicates thatthe tire meets all federalstandards. The next two numbersor letters are the plant codedesignating where it wasmanufactured, the next two are

215


Wheels and Tires

the tire size code and the last fournumbers represent the week andyear the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 317 meanthe 31st week of 1997. After 2000the numbers go to four digits. Forexample, 2501 means the 25thweek of 2001. The numbers inbetween are identification codesused for traceability. Thisinformation is used to contactcustomers if a tire defect requiresa recall.I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, orAT: All Terrain, orAS: All Season.J. Tire Ply Composition andMaterial Used: Indicates thenumber of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric inthe tire tread and sidewall. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe ply materials in the tire and thesidewall, which include steel,nylon, polyester, and others.K. Maximum Load: Indicates themaximum load in kilograms andpounds that can be carried by thetire. Refer to the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), for the correct tirepressure for your vehicle.L. Treadwear, Traction andTemperature Grades:

*Treadwear The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditionson a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.*Traction: The traction grades,from highest to lowest are AA, A,B, and C. The grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.*Temperature: The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B andC, representing the tire'sresistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel.M. Maximum InflationPressure: Indicates the tiremanufacturers' maximumpermissible pressure or thepressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher thanthe vehicle manufacturer'srecommended cold inflationpressure which can be found onthe Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed toeither the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edge

216


Wheels and Tires

that meets the door-latch post,next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. The coldinflation pressure should never beset lower than the recommendedpressure on the vehicle label.The tire suppliers may haveadditional markings, notes orwarnings such as standard load,radial tubeless, etc.Additional InformationContained on the Tire Sidewallfor LT Type TiresNote: Tire Quality Grades do notapply to this type of tire.

A

BC

BDE142544

LT type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of Ptype tires; these differences aredescribed below.

A. LT: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association(T&RA), that is intended forservice on light trucks.B. Load Range and LoadInflation Limits: Indicates thetire's load-carrying capabilitiesand its inflation limits.C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates themaximum load and tire pressurewhen the tire is used as a dual;defined as four tires on the rearaxle (a total of six or more tires onthe vehicle).D. Maximum Load Single lb(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicatesthe maximum load and tirepressure when the tire is used asa single; defined as two tires(total) on the rear axle.Information on T Type TiresT145/80D16 is an example of atire size.Note: The temporary tire size foryour vehicle may be different fromthis example. Tire Quality Gradesdo not apply to this type of tire.

217


Wheels and Tires

AB C D

E

E142545

T type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of Ptype tires; these differences aredescribed below:A. T: Indicates a type of tire,designated by the Tire and RimAssociation (T&RA), that isintended for temporary service oncars, SUVs, minivans and lighttrucks.B. 145: Indicates the nominalwidth of the tire in millimetersfrom sidewall edge to sidewalledge. In general, the larger thenumber, the wider the tire.

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio ofheight to width. Numbers of 70 orlower indicate a short sidewall.D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.Location of the Tire LabelYou will find a Tire Labelcontaining tire inflation pressureby tire size and other importantinformation located on the B-Pillaror the edge of the driver’s door.Inflating Your TiresSafe operation of your vehiclerequires that your tires areproperly inflated. Remember thata tire can lose up to half of its airpressure without appearing flat.Every day before you drive, checkyour tires. If one looks lower thanthe others, use a tire gauge tocheck pressure of all tires andadjust if required.At least once a month and beforelong trips, inspect each tire andcheck the tire pressure with a tiregauge (including spare, ifequipped). Inflate all tires to theinflation pressure recommendedby Ford Motor Company.

218


Wheels and Tires

You are strongly urged to buy areliable tire pressure gauge, asautomatic service station gaugesmay be inaccurate. Fordrecommends the use of a digitalor dial-type tire pressure gaugerather than a stick-type tirepressure gauge.Use the recommended coldinflation pressure for optimum tireperformance and wear.Under-inflation or over-inflationmay cause uneven treadwearpatterns

WARNINGUnder-inflation is the mostcommon cause of tire failures

and may result in severe tirecracking, tread separation orblowout, with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased riskof injury. Under-inflation increasessidewall flexing and rollingresistance, resulting in heatbuildup and internal damage tothe tire. It also may result inunnecessary tire stress, irregularwear, loss of vehicle control andaccidents. A tire can lose up tohalf of its air pressure and notappear to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to theFord recommended inflationpressure even if it is less than themaximum inflation pressureinformation found on the tire. TheFord recommended tire inflationpressure is found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. Failure tofollow the tire pressurerecommendations can causeuneven treadwear patterns andadversely affect the way yourvehicle handlesMaximum Inflation Pressure isthe tire manufacturer's maximumpermissible pressure and thepressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher thanthe manufacturer’s recommendedcold inflation pressure which canbe found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. The coldinflation pressure should never beset lower than the recommendedpressure on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label orTire Label.

219


Wheels and Tires

When weather temperaturechanges occur, tire inflationpressures also change. A 10°F(6°C) temperature drop cancause a corresponding drop of 1psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.Check your tire pressuresfrequently and adjust them to theproper pressure which can befound on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label or Tire Label.To check the pressure in yourtire(s):1. Make sure the tires are cool,meaning they are not hot fromdriving even a mile.Note: If you are checking tirepressure when the tire is hot, (i.e.driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km]),never bleed or reduce air pressure.The tires are hot from driving andit is normal for pressures toincrease above recommended coldpressures. A hot tire at or belowrecommended cold inflationpressure could be significantlyunder-inflated.Note: If you have to drive adistance to get air for your tire(s),check and record the tire pressurefirst and add the appropriate airpressure when you get to thepump. It is normal for tires to heatup and the air pressure inside to goup as you drive.2. Remove the cap from the valveon one tire, then firmly press thetire gauge onto the valve andmeasure the pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach therecommended air pressure.Note: If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pressing on the metal stemin the center of the valve. Thenrecheck the pressure with your tiregauge.4. Replace the valve cap.5. Repeat this procedure for eachtire, including the spare.Note: Some spare tires operate ata higher inflation pressure than theother tires. For T type mini-sparetires (refer to the Dissimilar sparewheel and tire assemblyinformation for a description):Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15bar). For full-size and dissimilarspare tires (refer to the Dissimilarspare wheel and tire assemblyinformation for a description):Store and maintain at the higher ofthe front and rear inflation pressureas shown on the Tire Label.6. Visually inspect the tires tomake sure there are no nails orother objects embedded thatcould poke a hole in the tire andcause an air leak.7. Check the sidewalls to makesure there are no gouges, cuts orbulges.

220


Wheels and Tires

Inspecting Your Tires andWheel Valve StemsPeriodically inspect the tire treadsfor uneven or excessive wear andremove objects such as stones,nails or glass that may be wedgedin the tread grooves. Check the tireand valve stems for holes, cracks,or cuts that may permit airleakage and repair or replace thetire and replace the valve stem.Inspect the tire sidewalls forcracking, cuts, bruises and othersigns of damage or excessivewear. If internal damage to the tireis suspected, have the tiredemounted and inspected in caseit needs to be repaired or replaced.For your safety, tires that aredamaged or show signs ofexcessive wear should not be usedbecause they are more likely toblow out or fail.Improper or inadequate vehiclemaintenance can cause tires towear abnormally. Inspect all yourtires, including the spare,frequently, and replace them ifone or more of the followingconditions exist:

Tire Wear

E142546

When the tread is worn down toone sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),tires must be replaced to helpprevent your vehicle from skiddingand hydroplaning. Built-intreadwear indicators, or wear bars,which look like narrow strips ofsmooth rubber across the treadwill appear on the tire when thetread is worn down to onesixteenth of an inch (2 mm)When the tire tread wears downto the same height as these wearbars, the tire is worn out and mustbe replaced.DamagePeriodically inspect the tire treadsand sidewalls for damage (suchas bulges in the tread or sidewalls,cracks in the tread groove andseparation in the tread orsidewall). If damage is observed

221


Wheels and Tires

or suspected have the tireinspected by a tire professional.Tires can be damaged duringoff-road use, so inspection afteroff-road use is alsorecommended.Age

WARNINGTires degrade over timedepending on many factors

such as weather, storageconditions, and conditions of use(load, speed, inflation pressure,etc.) the tires experiencethroughout their lives.

In general, tires should bereplaced after six years regardlessof tread wear. However, heatcaused by hot climates orfrequent high loading conditionscan accelerate the aging processand may require tires to bereplaced more frequently.

You should replace your spare tirewhen you replace the road tires orafter six years due to aging even ifit has not been used.

U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)Both U.S. and Canada Federalregulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies and

describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and alsoprovides a U.S. DOT TireIdentification Number for safetystandard certification and in caseof a recall.This begins with the letters DOTand indicates that the tire meetsall federal standards. The nexttwo numbers or letters are theplant code designating where itwas manufactured, the next twoare the tire size code and the lastfour numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 317 meanthe 31st week of 1997. After 2000the numbers go to four digits. Forexample, 2501 means the 25thweek of 2001. The numbers inbetween are identification codesused for traceability. Thisinformation is used to contactcustomers if a tire defect requiresa recall.Tire ReplacementRequirementsYour vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide a safe rideand handling capability.

WARNINGSOnly use replacement tiresand wheels that are the same

size, load index, speed rating andtype (such as P-metric versusLT-metric or all-season versusall-terrain) as those originallyprovided by Ford. Therecommended tire and wheel size

222


Wheels and Tires

WARNINGSmay be found on either the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or the Tire Label whichis located on the B-Pillar or edgeof the driver’s door. If thisinformation is not found on theselabels then you should contactyour authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Use of any tire or wheelnot recommended by Ford canaffect the safety and performanceof your vehicle, which could resultin an increased risk of loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death.Additionally the use ofnon-recommended tires andwheels could cause steering,suspension, axle, transfer case orpower transfer unit failure. If youhave questions regarding tirereplacement, contact yourauthorized dealer as soon aspossible.

When mounting replacementtires and wheels, you should

not exceed the maximum pressureindicated on the sidewall of thetire to set the beads withoutadditional precautions listedbelow. If the beads do not seat atthe maximum pressure indicated,re-lubricate and try again

WARNINGSWhen inflating the tire formounting pressures up to 20 psi(1.38 bar) greater than themaximum pressure on the tiresidewall, the followingprecautions must be taken toprotect the person mounting thetire:

1. Make sure that you have thecorrect tire and wheel size.

2. Lubricate the tire bead andwheel bead seat area again.

3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft(3.66 m) away from the wheeland tire assembly.

4. Use both eye and earprotection.

For a mounting pressure morethan 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater thanthe maximum pressure, a Forddealer or other tire serviceprofessional should do themounting.

Always inflate steel carcass tireswith a remote air fill with theperson inflating standing at aminimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) awayfrom the wheel and tire assembly

Important: Remember to replacethe wheel valve stems when theroad tires are replaced on yourvehicle

223


Wheels and Tires

It is recommended that the twofront tires or two rear tiresgenerally be replaced as a pair.The tire pressure sensors mountedin the wheels (originally installedon your vehicle) are not designedto be used in aftermarket wheels.The use of wheels or tires notrecommended by Ford MotorCompany may affect theoperation of your tire pressuremonitoring system.If the TPMS indicator is flashing,your TPMS is malfunctioning. Yourreplacement tire might beincompatible with your TPMS, orsome component of the TPMSmay be damaged.Safety Practices

WARNINGSIf your vehicle is stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., do not

rapidly spin the tires; spinning thetires can tear the tire and causean explosion. A tire can explode inas little as three to five seconds.

Do not spin the wheels atover 35 mph (56 km/h). The

tires may fail and injure apassenger or bystander.

Driving habits have a great dealto do with your tire mileage andsafety.*Observe posted speed limits*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

*Avoid potholes and objects onthe road*Do not run over curbs or hit thetire against a curb when parkingHighway HazardsNo matter how carefully you drivethere’s always the possibility thatyou may eventually have a flat tireon the highway. Drive slowly to theclosest safe area out of traffic.This may further damage the flattire, but your safety is moreimportant.If you feel a sudden vibration orride disturbance while driving, oryou suspect your tire or vehiclehas been damaged, immediatelyreduce your speed. Drive withcaution until you can safely pulloff the road. Stop and inspect thetires for damage. If a tire isunder-inflated or damaged,deflate it, remove wheel andreplace it with your spare tire andwheel. If you cannot detect acause, have the vehicle towed tothe nearest repair facility or tiredealer to have the vehicleinspected.

224


Wheels and Tires

Tire and Wheel AlignmentA bad jolt from hitting a curb orpothole can cause the front endof your vehicle to becomemisaligned or cause damage toyour tires. If your vehicle seems topull to one side when you’redriving, the wheels may be out ofalignment. Have an authorizeddealer check the wheel alignmentperiodically.Wheel misalignment in the frontor the rear can cause uneven andrapid treadwear of your tires andshould be corrected by anauthorized dealer. Front-wheeldrive vehicles and those with anindependent rear suspension (ifequipped) may require alignmentof all four wheels.The tires should also be balancedperiodically. An unbalanced tireand wheel assembly may result inirregular tire wear.Tire RotationNote: If your tires show unevenwear ask an authorized dealer tocheck for and correct any wheelmisalignment, tire imbalance ormechanical problem involvedbefore tire rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may beequipped with a dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly. Adissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly is defined as a sparewheel and tire assembly that isdifferent in brand, size orappearance from the road tires andwheels. If you have a dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly it isintended for temporary use onlyand should not be used in a tirerotation.Note: After having your tiresrotated, inflation pressure must bechecked and adjusted to thevehicle requirements.Rotating your tires at therecommended interval (asindicated in the ScheduledMaintenance chapter) will helpyour tires wear more evenly,providing better tire performanceand longer tire life.Front-wheel drive vehicles (fronttires on the left side of thediagram)

E142547

Sometimes irregular tire wear canbe corrected by rotating the tires.

225


Wheels and Tires

Summer TiresYour Ford vehicle may beequipped with summer tires toprovide superior performance onwet and dry roads. Summer tiresdo not have the Mud and Snow(M+S or M/S) tire traction ratingon the tire side wall. Sincesummer tires do not have thesame traction performance asAll-season or Snow tires, Forddoes not recommend usingsummer tires when temperaturesdrop to approximately 40°F (5°C)or below (depending on tire wearand environmental conditions) orin snow and ice conditions. Likeany tire, summer tire performanceis affected by tire wear andenvironmental conditions. If youmust drive in those conditions,Ford recommends using Mud andSnow (M+S, M/S), All-season orSnow tires.

USING WINTER TIRES

WARNINGWhen you use winter tires on yourvehicle, you must make sure that youuse the correct lug nuts.

If winter tires are used, you must make surethat you use the correct tire pressures.

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGYour vehicle is not approved for usewith snow chains.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM

WARNINGThe tire pressure monitoring systemis not a substitute for manuallychecking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked periodically(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, seeInflating your tires in this chapter. Failureto properly maintain your tire pressurecould increase the risk of tire failure, lossof control, vehicle rollover and personalinjury.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflatedto the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

226


Wheels and Tires

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped witha TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be ableto detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occurfor a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternatetires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.The tire pressure monitoring systemcomplies with part 15 of the FCC rules andwith RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation.

Changing Tires With a TirePressure Monitoring System

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tirepressure sensor located inside the wheeland tire assembly cavity. The pressuresensor is attached to the valve stem. Thepressure sensor is covered by the tire and isnot visible unless the tire is removed. Takecare when changing the tire to avoiddamaging the sensorYou should always have your tires servicedby an authorized dealer.Check the tire pressure periodically (atleast monthly) using an accurate tiregauge. See Inflating Your Tires in thischapter.

Understanding Your Tire PressureMonitoring SystemThe tire pressure monitoring systemmeasures pressure in your four road tiresand sends the tire pressure readings toyour vehicle. The low tire pressure warninglight will turn on if the tire pressure issignificantly low. Once the light isilluminated, your tires are under-inflatedand need to be inflated to themanufacturer’s recommended tirepressure. Even if the light turns on and ashort time later turns off, your tire pressurestill needs to be checked.

227


Wheels and Tires

When Your Temporary Spare Tire isInstalledWhen one of your road tires needs to bereplaced with the temporary spare, thesystem will continue to identify an issue toremind you that the damaged road wheeland tire assembly needs to be repaired andput back on your vehicle.To restore the full function of the tirepressure monitoring system, have thedamaged road wheel and tire assemblyrepaired and remounted on your vehicle.

When You Believe Your System is NotOperating ProperlyThe main function of the tire pressuremonitoring system is to warn you whenyour tires need air. It can also warn you inthe event the system is no longer capableof functioning as intended. See thefollowing chart for information concerningyour tire pressure monitoring system:

228


Wheels and Tires

Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressurewarning light

Make sure tires are at the proper pres-sure. See Inflating your tires in thischapter. After inflating your tires to themanufacturer’s recommended pressureas shown on the Tire Label (located onthe edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),the vehicle must be driven for at leasttwo minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)before the light turns off.

Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light

Repair the damaged road wheel and tireassembly and reinstall it on the vehicleto restore system function. For adescription on how the system functions,see When your temporary spare tireis installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

If the tires are properly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

TPMS malfunction

Repair the damaged road wheel and tireassembly and reinstall it on the vehicleto restore system function. For adescription on how the system functions,see When your temporary spare tireis installed in this section.

Spare tire in useFlashing warninglight

If the tires are properly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

TPMS malfunction

When Inflating Your TiresWhen putting air into your tires (such as ata gas station or in your garage), the tirepressure monitoring system may notrespond immediately to the air added toyour tires.

It may take up to two minutes of drivingover 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turnoff after you have filled your tires to therecommended inflation pressure

229


Wheels and Tires

How Temperature Affects Your TirePressureThe tire pressure monitoring systemmonitors tire pressure in each pneumatictire. While driving in a normal manner, atypical passenger tire inflation pressuremay increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28kPa) from a cold start situation. If thevehicle is stationary overnight with theoutside temperature significantly lowerthan the daytime temperature, the tirepressure may decrease about 3 psi (21kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambienttemperature. This lower pressure valuemay be detected by the tire pressuremonitoring system as being significantlylower than the recommended inflationpressure and activate the system warninglight for low tire pressure. If the low tirepressure warning light is on, visually checkeach tire to verify that no tire is flat. If oneor more tires are flat, repair as necessary.Check the air pressure in the road tires. Ifany tire is under-inflated, carefully drivethe vehicle to the nearest location whereair can be added to the tires. Inflate all thetires to the recommended inflationpressure.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

WARNINGSThe use of tire sealants may damageyour tire pressure monitoring systemand should not be used. However, if

you must use a sealant, the tire pressuremonitoring system sensor and valve stemon the wheel must be replaced by anauthorized Ford dealer.

See Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (page 226). If the tirepressure monitor sensor becomes

damaged, it will no longer function.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring systemindicator light will illuminate when the sparetire is in use. To restore the full functionalityof the monitoring system, all road wheelsequipped with tire pressure monitoringsensors must be mounted on the vehicle.If you get a flat tire while driving, do notapply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease your speed. Hold the steeringwheel firmly and slowly move to a safeplace on the side of the road.Have a flat serviced by an authorizeddealer in order to prevent damage to thetire pressure monitoring system sensors.See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 226). Replace the spare tire with aroad tire as soon as possible. Duringrepairing or replacing of the flat tire, havean authorized dealer inspect the tirepressure monitoring system sensor fordamage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and TireAssembly Information

WARNINGFailure to follow these guidelinescould result in an increased risk ofloss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel andtire, then it is intended for temporary useonly. This means that if you need to use it,you should replace it as soon as possiblewith a road wheel and tire assembly thatis the same size and type as the road tiresand wheels that were originally providedby Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheelis damaged, it should be replaced ratherthan repaired.A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyis defined as a spare wheel and tireassembly that is different in brand, size orappearance from the road tires and wheelsand can be one of three types:

230


Wheels and Tires

1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tirebegins with the letter T for tire size andmay have Temporary Use Only molded inthe sidewall.2. Full-size dissimilar spare with labelon wheel: This spare tire has a label onthe wheel that states: THIS WHEEL ANDTIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USEONLY.When driving with one of the dissimilarspare tires listed above, do not:• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)• Load the vehicle beyond maximum

vehicle load rating listed on the SafetyCompliance Label.

• Tow a trailer.• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire

at a time.• Use commercial car washing

equipment.• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.Use of one of the dissimilar spare tireslisted above at any one wheel location canlead to impairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability (if

applicable).3. Full-size dissimilar spare withoutlabel on wheelWhen driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly, do not:• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).• Use more than one dissimilar spare

wheel and tire assembly at a time.• Use commercial car washing

equipment.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly can lead toimpairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capabilityWhen driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly additionalcaution should be given to:• Towing a trailer.• Driving vehicles equipped with a

camper body.• Driving vehicles with a load on the

cargo rack.Drive cautiously when using a full-sizedissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyand seek service as soon as possible.

Tire Change ProcedureWARNINGS

When one of the front wheels is offthe ground, the transmission alonewill not prevent the vehicle from

moving or slipping off the jack, even if thetransmission selector lever is in position P.

To help prevent your vehicle frommoving when you change a tire, besure to place the transmission

selector lever in position P, set the parkingbrake and block (in both directions) thewheel that is diagonally opposite (otherside and end of the vehicle) to the tirebeing changed.

Never get underneath a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack. If yourvehicle slips off the jack, you or

someone else could be seriously injured.

231


Wheels and Tires

WARNINGSDo not attempt to change a tire onthe side of the vehicle close tomoving traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit whenoperating the jack or changing the wheel.

Always use the jack provided asoriginal equipment with your vehicle.If using a jack other than the one

provided as original equipment with yourvehicle, make sure the jack capacity isadequate for the vehicle weight, includingany vehicle cargo or modifications.

Make sure there is no lubrication(grease or oil) on the threads or thesurface between the wheel lugs and

nuts. This can cause the lug nuts to loosenwhile driving.

Note: Passengers should not remain in thevehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.1. Park on a level surface, set the parking

brake and activate the hazard flashers.2. Place the transmission selector lever

in position P (automatic transmission)or position R (manual transmission)and turn the engine off.

3. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.4. Remove the spare tire bolt securing the

spare tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Remove the spare tire from the sparetire compartment.

E142550

6. Remove the lug wrench and jack fromthe foam holder.

E142551

7. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.8. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half

turn counterclockwise but do notremove them until the wheel is raisedoff the ground.

Note: Jack at the specified locations toavoid damage to the vehicle.9. The vehicle jacking points are shown

here, and are depicted on the yellowwarning label on the jack.

E145908

232


Wheels and Tires

10. Indentations in the sills show thelocation of the jacking points.

E142553

11. Remove the lug nuts with the lugwrench.

12. Replace the flat tire with the sparetire, making sure the valve stem isfacing outward. Reinstall the lug nutsuntil the wheel is snug against thehub. Do not fully tighten the lug nutsuntil the wheel has been lowered.

13. Lower the wheel by turning the jackhandle counterclockwise.

1 2

3

4

E90589

14. Remove the jack and fully tighten thelug nuts in the order shown. SeeTechnical Specifications (page234).

Stowing the flat tireThe full-size road wheel can be stowed inthe spare tire compartment.1. Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an

angle to access the spare tirecompartment.

2. Place the wheel in the spare tire wellwith the valve stem facing down. Usethe mini-spare bolt to secure the wheelthrough one of the lug holes.

3. Place the jack, tools and foam blockback into the spare tire compartment.

4. Replace the carpeted wheel cover.

E146026

233


Wheels and Tires

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications

WARNINGWhen a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materialspresent on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners

that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mountingsurfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at thewheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come offwhile your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.

Ib-ft (Nm)*Bolt size

100 (135)M12 x 1.5*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Fordrecommended replacement fasteners.Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after anywheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

E145950

Wheel pilot boreAInspect the wheel pilot bore andmounting surface prior to installation.Remove any visible corrosion or looseparticles.

234


Wheels and Tires

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

1.6L EcoBoost1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

1.0L EcoBoostEngine

989861Cubic inches

Minimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneRequired fuel

10:111:110:1Compressionratio

Drivebelt Routing1.0L EcoBoost

E163197

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

E163198

1.6L EcoBoost

E161372

235


Capacities and Specifications

MOTORCRAFT PARTS

1.6L EcoBoost1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

1.0L EcoBoostComponent

FA-1914Air filterelement1

FL-910SOil filter2

BXT-96R-500BatteryBXT-96R-590

SP-532SP-525SP-532Spark plugs3

FP-69Cabin air filter

WW-1613 (driver side)Windshieldwiper blade WW-2430 (passenger side)

1 Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Yourwarranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is notused.2 Only use the specified replacement oil filter. The use of a non-specified oil filter canresult in engine damage. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 371).3 For spark plug replacement, see an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at theappropriate intervals.Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specificationsfor your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts. Your warranty may bevoid for any damage to the engine if the correct spark plugs are not used.Do not use American Petroleum Institute S category oils labeled as SN, SM, SL or a lowercategory unless the label also displays the American Petroleum Institute certificationmark. These oils do not meet all of the requirements of your vehicle's engine and emissionssystem.

236



VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERThe vehicle identification number islocated on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX isrepresentative of your vehicle identificationnumber.The Vehicle Identification Number containsthe following information:

E142477

World manufacturer identifierABrake system, Gross VehicleWeight Rating, Restraint Devicesand their locations

B

Make, vehicle line, series, bodytype

C

Engine typeDCheck digitEModel yearFAssembly plantGProduction sequence numberH

VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

E167469

237



The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration Regulations require that aSafety Compliance Certification Label beaffixed to a vehicle and prescribe wherethe Safety Compliance Certification Labelmay be located. The Safety ComplianceCertification Label shall be affixed to eitherthe door hinge pillar, the door latch post,or the edge of the door near the door latch,next to the driver's seating position.

TRANSMISSION CODEDESIGNATION

E142806

The transmission code is on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. Thefollowing table shows the transmissioncode along with the transmissiondescription.

CodeDescription

ASix-speed automatic transmission

MSix-speed manual transmission

CFive-speed manual transmission

238



For a complete listing of the accessoriesthat are available for your vehicle, pleasecontact your dealer or visit our online storeat: Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).Ford Custom Accessories are available foryour vehicle through your local Ford or Fordof Canada dealer. Ford Motor Companywill repair or replace any properlydealer-installed Ford Custom Accessoriesfound to be defective in factory-suppliedmaterials or workmanship during thewarranty period, as well as any componentdamaged by the defective accessories. Theaccessories will be warranted forwhichever provides you the greatestbenefit:• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000

km) (whichever occurs first), or• the remainder of your new vehicle

limited warranty.Contact your dealer for details and a copyof the warranty.

Exterior style• Graphics kit• Hood deflectors• Side window deflectors• Splash guards• Rear spoiler• Wheels• Bumper protectors

Interior style• All-weather floor mats• Rear seat entertainment*• Premium carpeted floor mats• Lighted door sill plates

Lifestyle• Ash cup / smoker's packages• Roof racks and carriers*

Peace of mind• Remote start• Vehicle security systems• Wheel locks• Bumper-mounted parking sensor*• Locking fuel plug for capless fuel

system*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) arewarranted by the accessorymanufacturer's warranty. Ford LicensedAccessories are fully designed anddeveloped by the accessory manufacturerand have not been designed or tested toFord Motor Company engineeringrequirements. Contact your Ford dealer fordetails regarding the manufacturer'slimited warranty and a copy of the FLAproduct limited warranty offered by theaccessory manufacturer.For maximum vehicle performance, keepthe following information in mind whenadding accessories or equipment to yourvehicle:• When adding accessories, equipment,

passengers and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR or GAWR asindicated on the Safety ComplianceCertification label). Consult yourauthorized dealer for specific weightinformation.

• The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and CanadianRadio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) regulate the useof mobile communications systems —such as two-way radios, telephonesand theft alarms - that are equippedwith radio transmitters. Any suchequipment installed in your vehicleshould comply with FCC or CRTCregulations and should be installedonly by a qualified service technician.

239


Accessories

• Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if they are not properlydesigned for automotive use.

• To avoid interference with other vehiclefunctions, such as anti-lock brakingsystems, amateur radio users whoinstall radios and antennas onto theirvehicle should not locate the amateurradio antennas in the area of thedriver's side hood.

• Any non-Ford custom electrical orelectronic accessories or componentsthat are added to the vehicle by theauthorized dealer or the owner, mayadversely affect battery performanceand durability, and may also adverselyaffect the performance of otherelectrical systems in the vehicle.

240


Accessories

PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISINGCOST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORDEXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)More than 32 million Ford and Lincolnowners have discovered the powerfulprotection of Ford Extended Service Plan.It is the only extended service plan backedby Ford Motor Company, and providespeace of mind protection beyond the NewVehicle Limited Warranty coverage.

Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for ItselfOne service bill – the cost of parts andlabor – can easily exceed the price of yourFord Extended Service Plan. With FordESP, you minimize your risk for unexpectedrepair bills and rising repair costs.

Up to 500+ Covered VehicleComponentsThere are four Extended Service Plans withdifferent levels of coverage. Ask yourauthorized dealer for details.1. PremiumCARE - Our most

comprehensive coverage. With over500 covered components, this plan isso complete that we generally onlydiscuss what’s not covered.

2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,and includes many high-tech items.

3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical

components.Ford Extended Service Plan is honored byall authorized Ford and Lincoln dealers inthe U.S. and Canada. It is the only extendedservice plan authorized and backed by FordMotor Company.

That means you get:• Reliable, quality service anywhere you

go• Repairs performed by factory trained

technicians, using Genuine Ford andLincoln parts

Rental Car Reimbursement

1st day Rental BenefitYou take advantage of replacementtransportation if your vehicle is at yourauthorized dealer for same day coveredrepairs.

Extended Rental BenefitsIf your vehicle is kept overnight for coveredrepairs, you are eligible for rental carcoverage, including Bumper to Bumperwarranty repairs, or Field Service Actions.

Roadside AssistanceExclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,including:• Towing, flat-tire change and battery

jump starts• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance• Travel expense reimbursement for

lodging, meals and rental car• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,

rental car coverage and emergencytransportation

Transferable CoverageIf you sell your vehicle before your FordExtended Service Plan coverage expires,you can transfer any remaining coverageto the new owner. Whenever you sell yourvehicle, prospective buyers may have ahigher degree of confidence that vehiclewas properly maintained with Ford ESP,thereby improving resale value.

241


Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)

Avoid the Rising Cost of ProperlyMaintaining Your Vehicle!Ford Extended Service Plan also offers aPremium Maintenance Plan that covers allscheduled maintenance, and select itemsthat routinely wear out.The coverage is prepaid, so you never haveto worry about affording your vehiclemaintenance. It covers regular checkups,routine inspections, preventive care andreplacement of select items that requireperiodic attention for normal wear:• Windshield Wiper Blades• Spark Plugs (except in California)• The Clutch Disc• Brake Pads and Linings• Shock Absorbers• Belts and Hoses• Diesel Exhaust Fluid Replenishment

Contact your selling authorized Ford orLincoln dealership today so they cancustomize a Ford Extended Service Planthat fits your driving lifestyle and budget.

Interest Free Finance OptionsAvailableTake advantage of our interest freeinstallment payment plan. Just a 10%down payment will provide you with anaffordable, no interest, no fee paymentprogram.To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialistsat 800-367-3377. Don’t forget to ask aboutour interest free payment program,allowing you all the security and benefitsFord ESP has to offer while paying overtime. You are pre-approved with no creditchecks, no hassles!Complete the information below and mailto:Ford ESPP.O. Box 8072Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039

Name (PLEASE PRINT)

APT.#ADDRESS

ZIPSTATECITY

E-MAIL

242



SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)You can get more protection for yourvehicle by purchasing a Ford ExtendedService Plan. Ford Extended Service Planis the only service contract backed by FordMotor Company of Canada, Limited.Depending on the plan you purchase, FordExtended Service Plan provides benefitssuch as:• Rental reimbursement• Coverage for certain maintenance and

wear items• Protection against repair costs after

your New Vehicle Limited WarrantyCoverage expires

• Roadside Assistance benefitsThere are several Ford Extended ServicePlans available in various time, distanceand deductible combinations. Each planis tailored to fit your own driving needs,including reimbursement for towing andrental.When you purchase Ford Extended ServicePlan, you receive added peace-of-mindprotection throughout Canada and theUnited States, provided by a network ofparticipating authorized Ford MotorCompany dealers. The LincolnMaintenance Protection Plan is honoredat authorized Lincoln dealers.Note: Repairs performed outside of Canadaand the United States are not eligible forFord Extended Service Plan coverage.This information is subject to change.For more information, visit your local Fordof Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to findthe Ford Extended Service Plan that is rightfor you.

243



GENERAL INFORMATIONRadio Frequencies and Reception Factors

Radio reception factors

The further you travel away from an FM station, the weakerthe signal and the weaker the reception.

Distance and Strength

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Terrain

When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a strongersignal can override a weaker signal and can cause interfer-ence in the audio system.

Station overload

CD and CD Player InformationNote: CD units play commercially pressed4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compactdiscs only. Due to technical incompatibility,certain recordable and re-recordablecompact discs may not function correctlywhen used in Ford CD players.Note: Do not insert CDs with homemadepaper (adhesive) labels into the CD playeras the label may peel and cause the CD tobecome jammed. You should use apermanent felt tip marker rather thanadhesive labels on your homemade CDs.Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Pleasecontact an authorized dealer for furtherinformation.Note: Do not use any irregularly shapeddiscs or discs with a scratch protection filmattached.Always handle discs by their edges only.Clean the disc with an approved CDcleaner only. Wipe it from the center of thedisc toward the edge. Do not clean in acircular motion.Do not expose discs to direct sunlight orheat sources for extended periods.

MP3 and WMA Track and FolderStructureAudio systems capable of recognizing andplaying MP3 and WMA individual tracksand folder structures work as follows:• There are two different modes for MP3

and WMA disc playback: MP3 andWMA track mode (system default) andMP3 and WMA folder mode.

• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores anyfolder structure on the MP3 and WMAdisc. The player numbers each MP3and WMA track on the disc (noted bythe .mp3 or .WMA file extension) fromT001 to a maximum of T255. Themaximum number of playable MP3 andWMA files may be less depending onthe structure of the CD and exactmodel of radio present.

244


Audio System

• MP3 and WMA folder mode representsa folder structure consisting of onelevel of folders. The CD player numbersall MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc(noted by the .mp3 or .WMA fileextension) and all folders containingMP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)T001 (track) to F253 T255.

• Creating discs with only one level offolders helps with navigation throughthe disc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMAdiscs, it is important to understand howthe system reads the structures you create.While various files may be present, (fileswith extensions other than mp3 andWMA), only files with the .mp3 and WMAextension are played; other files areignored by the system. This enables you touse the same MP3 and WMA disc for avariety of tasks on your work computer,home computer and your in-vehiclesystem.

In track mode, the system displays andplays the structure as if it were only onelevel deep (all .mp3 files play, regardlessof being in a specific folder). In foldermode, the system only plays the .mp3 filesin the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:AM/FM/CD



245


Audio System

E156613

ED

O F

G

K

L

M

N

J HI

CA B

Eject: Press the button to eject a CD.ACursor arrows: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices.BCD slot: Where you insert a CD.COK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections.DClock: Press to set the time. Use the H and M buttons outside the audio displayto adjust the hours and minutes. Press OK to finish. (The clock can also be setby pressing MENU, then scrolling to the clock settings menu.)

E

Tune: Press the button to manual tune on AM and FM wavebands.FNumeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. Tostore a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns.

G

Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency bandor the next track on a CD.

H

On, Off and Volume: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off.Turn the dial to adjust the volume.

I

246


Audio System

Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequencyband or the previous track on a CD.

J

MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features.KINFO: Press the button to access radio or CD information.LSOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle,balance and fade.

M

MEDIA: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will alsocancel the menu or list browsing.

N

RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel themenu or list browsing.

O

Sound ButtonThis will allow you to adjust the soundsettings (for example bass, middle andtreble).1. Press the SOUND button.2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to

select the required setting.3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to

make the necessary adjustment. Thedisplay indicates the level selected.

4. Press the OK button to confirm thenew settings.

Waveband ButtonPress the RADIO button to select from thewavebands available.You can use the selector to return to radioreception when you have been listening toanother source.Alternatively, press the left arrow buttonto display the available wavebands. Scrollto the required waveband and press OK.

Station Tuning ControlSeek TuningSelect a waveband and briefly press oneof the seek buttons. The unit will stop atthe first station it finds in the direction youhave chosen.

Manual Tuning1. Press the MENU button.2. Select RADIO mode and then Manual.3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to

tune down or up the waveband in smallincrements or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.

4. Press OK to continue listening to astation.

Scan TuningScan allows you to listen to a few secondsof each station detected.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select RADIO mode and then Scan.3. Use the seek buttons to scan up or

down the selected waveband.4. Press OK to continue listening to a

station.

247


Audio System

Station Preset ButtonsThis feature allows you to store yourfavorite stations, they can be recalled byselecting the appropriate waveband andpressing one of the preset buttons.1. Select a waveband.2. Tune to the station required.3. Press and hold one of the preset

buttons. A progress bar and messagewill appear. When the progress barcompletes the station has been stored.The audio unit will also mutemomentarily as confirmation.

You can repeat this on each waveband andfor each preset button.Note: When you drive to another part of thecountry, stations that broadcast onalternative frequencies and are stored onpreset buttons, may be updated with thecorrect frequency and station name for thatarea.

Autostore ControlNote: This will store up to a maximum ofthe six strongest signals available, eitherfrom the AM or the FM waveband andoverwrite the previously stored stations. Youcan also store stations manually in the sameway as other wavebands.• Press and hold the RADIO button.• When the search is complete, sound is

restored and the strongest signals arestored on the autostore presets.

Automatic Volume ControlWhen available, automatic volume controladjusts the volume level to compensatefor engine noise and road speed noise.1. Press the MENU button and select

Audio Settings.2. Select Spd. Comp. Vol.

3. Use the left or right arrow button toadjust the setting.

4. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.

5. Press the MENU button to return.

News BroadcastsYour audio unit may interrupt normalreception to broadcast news bulletins fromstations on the FM waveband, radio datasystem or other enhanced network linkedstations.The display will indicate there is anincoming announcement during newsbroadcasts. When the audio unit interruptsfor a news broadcast the preset volumelevel will be the same as trafficannouncements.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select Audio Settings.3. Scroll to News and turn on or off with

the OK button.4. Press the MENU button to return.

Alternative FrequenciesThe majority of programs that broadcaston the FM waveband have a programidentification code that can be recognizedby audio units.When your vehicle moves from onetransmission area to another with thealternative frequencies tuning switchedon, this function will search for thestrongest station signal.Under certain conditions, alternativefrequencies tuning may temporarily disruptnormal reception.

248


Audio System

When selected, the unit continuallyevaluates signal strength and if a bettersignal becomes available, the unit willswitch to that alternative. It mutes whileit checks a list of alternative frequenciesand if necessary, it will search once acrossthe selected waveband for a genuinealternative frequency.It will restore radio reception when it findsone or if one is not found, the unit willreturn to the original stored frequency.When selected, AF will be shown in thedisplay.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select Audio Settings.3. Scroll to Alternat. freq. or Alt.

Frequency and turn on or off with theOK button.


Regional ModeRegional mode controls the behavior ofalternative frequencies switching betweenregionally related networks of a parentbroadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairlylarge network across a large part of thecountry. At various times of the day thislarge network may be broken down into anumber of smaller regional networks,typically centered on major towns or cities.When the network is not split into regionalvariants, the whole network carries thesame programming.Regional mode ON: This prevents randomalternative frequency switches whenneighboring regional networks are notcarrying the same programming.

Regional mode OFF: This allows a largercoverage area if neighboring regionalnetworks are carrying the sameprogramming, but can cause randomalternative frequency switches if they arenot.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select Audio Settings.3. Scroll to RDS regional and turn on or

off with the OK button.4. Press the MENU button to return.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:AM/FM/CD/SYNC



Note: An integrated multi function displayis situated above the unit. This showsimportant information regarding control ofyour system. Additionally, there are variousicons placed around the display screenwhich light up when a function is active (forexample CD, Radio or Aux).

249


Audio System

E156629

J I

ED

T F

H

G

P

Q

R

S

MNO KL

CA B

Eject: Press the button to eject a CD.ACursor arrows: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices.BCD slot: Where you insert a CD.COK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections.DINFO: Press the button to access radio, CD, USB and IPod information.ETUNE -: Press the button to manual tune down the waveband.FTUNE +: Press the button to manual tune up the waveband.GNumeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. Tostore a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns.

H

Function button 4: Press the button to select different functions of the audiosystem depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

I


J

250


Audio System

Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency bandor the next track on a CD.

K


L

Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequencyband or the previous track on a CD.

M


N


O

MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features.PSOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle,balance and fade.

Q

PHONE: Press the button to access the phone feature of the SYNC system bypressing PHONE then MENU. See separate manual.

R

MEDIA: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will alsocancel the menu or list browsing.

S

RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel themenu or list browsing.

T

E104157 A

1 2 3 4

Descriptions for function buttons1-4

A

Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. The description for thecurrent function displays in the screen.

Sound ButtonThis will allow you to adjust the soundsettings (for example bass, middle andtreble).1. Press the SOUND button.2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to

select the required setting.3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to

make the necessary adjustment. Thedisplay indicates the level selected.

4. Press the OK button to confirm thenew settings.

251


Audio System

Waveband ButtonPress the RADIO button to select from thewavebands available.You can use the selector to return to radioreception when you have been listening toanother source.Alternatively, press the left arrow buttonto display the available wavebands. Scrollto the required waveband and press OK.

Station Tuning ControlSeek TuningSelect a waveband and briefly press oneof the seek buttons. The unit will stop atthe first station it finds in the direction youhave chosen.

Manual Tuning1. Press function button 2.2. Use the left and right arrow buttons to

tune down or up the waveband in smallincrements or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.

3. Press OK to continue listening to astation.

Scan TuningScan allows you to listen to a few secondsof each station detected.1. Press function button 3.2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or

down the selected waveband.3. Press function button 3 again or OK

to continue listening to a station.

Station Preset ButtonsThis feature allows you to store yourfavorite stations, they can be recalled byselecting the appropriate waveband andpressing one of the preset buttons.

1. Select a waveband.2. Tune to the station required.3. Press and hold one of the preset

buttons. A progress bar and messagewill appear. When the progress barcompletes the station has been stored.The audio unit will also mutemomentarily as confirmation.

You can repeat this on each waveband andfor each preset button.Note: When you drive to another part of thecountry, stations that broadcast onalternative frequencies, and are stored onpreset buttons, may be updated with thecorrect frequency and station name for thatarea.

Autostore ControlNote: This will store up to a maximum ofthe 10 strongest signals available, eitherfrom the AM or the FM waveband, andoverwrite the previously stored stations. Youcan also store stations manually in the sameway as other wavebands.• Press and hold the RADIO button.• When the search is complete, sound is

restored and the strongest signals arestored on the autostore presets.

Automatic Volume ControlWhen available, automatic volume controladjusts the volume level to compensatefor engine noise and road speed noise.1. Press the MENU button and

selectAudio Settings.2. Select Spd. Comp. Vol.3. Use the left or right arrow button to

adjust the setting.4. Press the OK button to confirm your

selection.5. Press the MENU button to return.

252


Audio System

News BroadcastsYour audio unit may interrupt normalreception to broadcast news bulletins fromstations on the FM waveband, radio datasystem or other enhanced network linkedstations.The display will indicate there is anincoming announcement, during newsbroadcasts. When the audio unit interruptsfor a news broadcast the preset volumelevel will be the same as trafficannouncements.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select Audio Settings.3. Scroll to News and turn on or off with

the OK button.4. Press the MENU button to return.

Alternative FrequenciesThe majority of programs that broadcaston the FM waveband have a programidentification code, it can be recognized byaudio units.When your vehicle moves from onetransmission area to another with thealternative frequencies tuning switchedon, this function will search for thestrongest station signal.Under certain conditions, alternativefrequencies tuning may temporarily disruptnormal reception.When selected, the unit continuallyevaluates signal strength and, if a bettersignal becomes available, the unit willswitch to that alternative. It mutes whileit checks a list of alternative frequenciesand if necessary, it will search once acrossthe selected waveband for a genuinealternative frequency.It will restore radio reception when it findsone or if one is not found, the unit willreturn to the original stored frequency.

When selected, AF will be shown in thedisplay.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select Audio Settings.3. Scroll to Alternat. freq. or Alt.

Frequency. and turn on or off with theOK button.


Regional ModeRegional mode controls the behavior ofalternative frequencies switching betweenregionally related networks of a parentbroadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairlylarge network across a large part of thecountry. At various times of the day thislarge network may be broken down into anumber of smaller regional networks,typically centered on major towns or cities.When the network is not split into regionalvariants, the whole network carries thesame programming.Regional mode ON: This prevents randomalternative frequency switches whenneighboring regional networks are notcarrying the same programming.Regional mode OFF: This allows a largercoverage area if neighboring regionalnetworks are carrying the sameprogramming, but can cause randomalternative frequency switches if they arenot.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select Audio Settings.3. Scroll to RDS regional and turn on or

off with the OK button.4. Press the MENU button to return.

253


Audio System

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY



Note: The MyFord Touch® system controlsmost of the audio features. See MyFordTouch™ (page 295).

E143843

Tune: Press these buttons when in radio mode to manually search up or downthrough the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, press these buttons to findthe next or previous available satellite radio station.

A


B

Eject: Press the button to eject a CD.C

254


Audio System

SEEK Press these buttons when you are in radio mode to go to the next stationup or down the radio frequency band, or to go to the next or previous track ona CD. In SIRIUS mode, press these buttons to select the next or previous channel.If a specific category is selected (for example Jazz, Rock or News), use thesebuttons to find the next or previous channel in the selected category.

D

SOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle,balance and fade.

E

SOURCE: Press the button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FMand A/V input.

F

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:SONY AUDIO SYSTEM/TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY



Note: The MyFord Touch® system controlsmost of the audio features. See MyFordTouch™ (page 295).

255


Audio System

E156663

A B C D E

J I FGH

On, Off: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off.ACD Slot Where you insert a CD.BTUNE +: In radio mode, press this button to manually search forward throughthe radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, press this button to find the nextavailable satellite radio station.

C

Seek up In radio mode, press this button to go to the next station up the radiofrequency band. Press to go to the next track on a CD. In SIRIUS mode, pressthis button to select the next channel. If a specific category is selected (forexample Jazz, Rock or News), use this button to find the next channel in theselected category.

D

Eject: Press the button to eject a CD.ESOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle,balance and fade.

F

Volume Turn the dial to adjust the volume.G

256


Audio System

TUNE -: In radio mode, press this button to manually search backward throughthe radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, press this button to find the previousavailable satellite radio station.

H

Seek down In radio mode, press this button to go to the next station down theradio frequency band. Press to go to the previous track on a CD. In SIRIUS mode,press this button to select the previous channel. If a specific category is selected(for example Jazz, Rock or News), use this button to find the previous channelin the selected category.

I

SOURCE: Press the button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FMand A/V input.

J

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

WARNINGSDriving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that


For safety reasons, do not connector adjust the settings on yourportable music player while your

vehicle is moving.Store the portable music player in asecure location, such as the centerconsole or the glove box, when your

vehicle is moving. Hard objects maybecome projectiles in a collision or suddenstop, which may increase the risk of seriousinjury. The audio extension cable must belong enough to allow the portable musicplayer to be safely stored while yourvehicle is moving.

E149149

The auxiliary input jack allows you toconnect and play music from your portablemusic player through your vehicle speakers.You can use any portable music playerdesigned for use with headphones. Youraudio extension cable must have male1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors ateach end.1. Switch off the engine, radio and

portable music player. Set the parkingbrake and put the transmission inposition P (vehicle with an automatictransmission) or neutral (vehicle witha manual transmission).

2. Plug the extension cable from theportable music player into the auxiliaryinput jack.

3. Switch the radio on. Select either atuned FM station or a CD.

4. Adjust the volume as desired.

257


Audio System

5. Switch your portable music player onand adjust its volume to half itsmaximum level.

6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE INappears in the display. You should hearmusic from your device even if it is low.

7. Adjust the volume on your portablemusic player until it reaches the volumelevel of the FM station or CD. Do thisby switching back and forth betweenthe AUX and FM or CD controls.

AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING

RectificationAudio unit display

General error message for CD fault conditions, such ascannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Make surethe disc is loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, orreplace disc with known music disc. If error persists

contact your dealer.

PLEASE CHECK CD

General error message for CD fault conditions such aspossible mechanism fault.

CD DRIVE MALFUNCTION

Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work untilit has cooled down.

CD DRIVE HIGH TEMP

258


Audio System

GENERAL INFORMATION

E142598

SYNC is an in-vehicle communicationssystem that works with yourBluetooth-enabled cellular phone andportable media player. This allows you to:• Make and receive calls.• Access and play music from your

portable music player.• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report

and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions& Information).*

• Use applications, such as Pandora andStitcher, via SYNC AppLink.

• Access phonebook contacts and musicusing voice commands.

• Stream music from your connectedphone.

• Text message.

• Use the advanced voice recognitionsystem

• Charge your USB device (if your devicesupports this).

*These features require activation.Make sure that you review your device'smanual before using it with SYNC.

SupportThe SYNC support team is available tohelp you with any questions you cannotanswer on your own.Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.

259


SYNC™

Times are subject to change due toholidays.

SYNC Owner AccountWhy do I need a SYNC owner account?• Required to activate Vehicle Health

Report and to view the reports online.• Required to activate the

subscription-based SYNC Services andto personalize your Saved Points andFavorites.

• Essential for keeping up with the latestsoftware downloads available forSYNC.

• Access to customer support for anyquestions you may have.

Driving RestrictionsFor your safety, certain features arespeed-dependent and restricted when yourvehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Safety InformationWARNING

Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that


When using SYNC:• Do not operate playing devices if the

power cords or cables are broken, splitor damaged. Place cords and cablesout of the way, so they do not interferewith the operation of pedals, seats,compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in yourvehicle during extreme conditions as itcould cause them damage. See yourdevice's manual for further information.

• Do not attempt to service or repair thesystem. See an authorized dealer.

Privacy InformationWhen a cellular phone is connected toSYNC, the system creates a profile withinyour vehicle that is linked to that cellularphone. This profile is created in order tooffer you more cellular features and tooperate more efficiently. Among otherthings, this profile may contain data aboutyour cellular phone book, text messages(read and unread), and call history,including history of calls when your cellularphone was not connected to the system.In addition, if you connect a media device,the system creates and retains an index ofsupported media content. The system alsorecords a short development log ofapproximately 10 minutes of all recentsystem activity. The log profile and othersystem data may be used to improve thesystem and help diagnose any problemsthat may occur.The cellular profile, media device index,and development log will remain in thevehicle unless you delete them and aregenerally accessible only in the vehiclewhen the cellular phone or media playeris connected. If you no longer plan to usethe system or the vehicle, we recommendyou perform a Master Reset to erase allstored information.

260


SYNC™

System data cannot be accessed withoutspecial equipment and access to thevehicle's SYNC module. Ford MotorCompany and Ford of Canada will notaccess the system data for any purposeother than as described absent consent, acourt order, or where required by lawenforcement, other governmentauthorities, or other third parties actingwith lawful authority. Other parties mayseek to access the informationindependently of Ford Motor Company andFord of Canada. For further privacyinformation, see the sections on 911 Assist,Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,Directions and Information.

USING VOICE RECOGNITIONThis system helps you control manyfeatures using voice commands. Thisallows you to keep your hands on thewheel and focus on what is in front of you.

Initiating a Voice Session

E142599

Push the voice icon. A tonesounds and Listening appears inthe display. Say any of the

following:

If You Want ToSay

Stream audio from your phone."Bluetooth audio"

Cancel the requested action."Cancel"

Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack."Line in"

Access mobile applications."Mobile apps" *

Make calls."Phone"

Access the SYNC Services portal."Services" *

Return to the main menu."SYNC"

Access the device connected to your USB port."USB"

Run a vehicle health report."Vehicle health report" *

Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback."Voice settings"

Hear a list of voice commands available in the currentmode.

"Help"

* This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.

261


SYNC™

System Interaction and FeedbackThe system provides feedback throughaudible tones, prompts, questions andspoken confirmations depending on thesituation and the chosen level ofinteraction (voice settings). You cancustomize the voice recognition system toprovide more or less instruction andfeedback.

The default setting is to a higher level ofinteraction in order to help you learn to usethe system. You can change these settingsat any time.

Adjusting the Interaction Level

E142599

Push the voice icon. Say "Voicesettings" when prompted, thenany of the following:

The system:When you say:

Provides more detailed interaction andguidance.

"Interaction mode standard"

Provides less audible interaction and moretone prompts.

"Interaction mode advanced"

The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.

Confirmation prompts are short questionsthe system asks when it is not sure of yourrequest or when there are multiple possibleresponses to your request. For example,the system may ask "Phone, is thatcorrect?". If turned off, the system simplymakes a best guess as to what yourequested and may ask you to confirmsettings.


Makes a best guess from the command;you may still occasionally be asked to

confirm settings.

"Confirmation prompts off"

Clarifies your voice command with a shortquestion.

"Confirmation prompts on"

The system creates candidate lists whenit has the same confidence level of severaloptions based on your voice command.When turned on, it may prompt you withas many as four possibilities forclarification.

For example, say "Say 1 after the tone tocall John Doe at home. Say 2 after the toneto call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 afterthe tone to call Jane Doe at home." Youcould also say "Say 1 after the tone to playJohn Doe, Say 2 after the tone to playJohnny Doe."

262


SYNC™


Makes a best guess from the mediacandidate list. You may still occasionally

be asked questions.

"Media candidate lists off"

Clarifies your voice command for mediacandidates.

"Media candidate lists on"

Makes a best guess from the phonecandidate list. You may still occasionally

be asked questions.

"Phone candidate lists off"

Clarifies your voice command for phonecandidates

"Phone candidate lists on"

Helpful Hints• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is

as quiet as possible. Wind noise fromopen windows and road vibrations mayprevent the system from correctlyrecognizing spoken commands.

• After pressing the voice icon, wait untilafter the tone sounds and Listeningappears before saying a command. Anycommand spoken before this does notregister with the system.

• Speak naturally, without long pausesbetween words.

• At any time, you can interrupt thesystem while it is speaking by pressingthe voice icon.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOURPHONEHands-free calling is one of the mainfeatures of SYNC. While the systemsupports a variety of features, many aredependent on your cellular phone'sfunctionality. At a minimum, most cellularphones with Bluetooth wireless technologysupport the following functions:• Answering an incoming call.• Ending a call.• Using privacy mode.• Dialing a number.• Redialing.• Call waiting notification.• Caller ID.Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.To check your phone's compatibility, seeyour phone's manual and visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.

263


SYNC™

Pairing a Phone for the First TimeNote: SYNC can support downloading upto approximately 1000 entries perBluetooth-enabled cellular phone.Note: Make sure to switch on the ignitionand the radio. Put the transmission inposition P.Note: To scroll through the menus, pressthe up and down arrows on your audiosystem.Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNCallows you to make and receive hands-freecalls.1. Press the phone button. When the

display indicates there is no phonepaired, press OK.

2. When Find SYNC appears in thedisplay, press OK.

3. Put your phone into Bluetoothdiscovery mode. See your device'smanual if necessary.

4. When prompted on your phone'sdisplay, enter the six-digit PIN providedby SYNC in the radio display. Thedisplay indicates when the pairing issuccessful.

Depending on your phone's capability andyour market, the system may prompt youwith questions, such as setting the currentphone as the primary phone (the phoneSYNC automatically tries to connect withfirst upon vehicle start-up) anddownloading your phonebook.

Pairing Subsequent PhonesNote: Make sure to switch on the ignitionand the radio. Put the transmission inposition P.Note: To scroll through the menus, pressthe up and down arrows on your audiosystem.

1. Press the phone button, and then scrollto System Settings. Press OK.

2. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. Press OK.3. Scroll to Add Bluetooth Device. Press

OK.4. When Find SYNC appears in the

display, press OK.5. Put your phone into Bluetooth

discovery mode. See your phone'smanual if necessary.

6. When prompted on your phone'sdisplay, enter the six-digit PIN providedby SYNC in the radio display. Thedisplay indicates when the pairing issuccessful.

The system then prompts with questions,such as if you would like to set the currentphone as the primary phone (the phoneSYNC automatically tries to connect withfirst upon vehicle start-up) and downloadyour phone book.

Phone Voice CommandsPress the voice icon and say "Phone". Sayany of the following:

"PHONE"

"Call <name>"1,2

"Call <name> at home"1,2

"Call <name> at work"1,2

"Call <name> in office"1,2

"Call <name> on mobile OR cell"1,2

"Call <name> on other"1,2

"Call history incoming"2

"Call history missed"2

264


SYNC™

"PHONE"

"Call history outgoing"2

"Connections"2

"Dial"1,3

"Go to privacy"

"Hold"

"Join"

"Menu"2,4

"Phone book <name>"2

"Phone book <name> at home"2

"Phone book <name> at office"2

"Phone book <name> at work" 2

"Phone book <name> on mobile ORcell"2

"Phone book <name> on other"2

1 This command does not require you tosay "Phone" first.2 This command is not available untilphone information is completelydownloaded using Bluetooth.3 See Dial table below.4 See Menu table below.

Phone book commands: When you askSYNC to access things such as aphonebook name or number, therequested information appears in thedisplay to view. Press the phone buttonand say, "Call" to call the contact.

"DIAL"

"411 (four-one-one)", "911" (nine-one-one)

"700" (seven hundred)

"800" (eight hundred)

"900" (nine hundred)

"Pound" (#)

"Number <0-9>"

"Asterisk" (*)

"Clear" (deletes all entered digits)

"Delete" (deletes one digit)

"Plus"

"Star"

Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold thephone button or press MENU to go to thephone menu.

"MENU"

"(Phone) connections"

"(Phone) settings (message) notificationoff"

"(Phone) settings (message) notificationon"

"(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1"



"(Phone) settings (set) ringer off"

"Battery"

"Phone name"

265


SYNC™

"MENU"

"Signal"

"Text message inbox"

Words in ( ) are optional and do not haveto be spoken for the system to understandthe command.

Making CallsPress the voice icon and when promptedsay:1. Say "Call <name>" or "Dial", then the

desired number.2. When the system confirms the number,

say, "Dial" again to initiate the call.To erase the last spoken digit, say, "Delete"or press the left arrow button. To erase allspoken digits, say "Clear" or press and holdthe left arrow button.To end the call, press and hold the phonebutton.

Receiving CallsWhen receiving a call, you can:• Answer the call by pressing the phone

button.• Reject the call by pressing and holding

the phone button.• Ignore the call by doing nothing.

Phone Options during an ActiveCallDuring an active call, you have more menufeatures that become available, such asputting a call on hold or joining calls. Usethe arrow buttons to scroll through themenu options.1. Press MENU during an active call.2. After selecting Active Call Menu, press

OK.3. Scroll to cycle through the following

options:

You can:When you select:

Mute the call.Mute Call?

Switch a call from an active hands-free environment toyour cellular phone for a more private conversation.

Privacy

Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The displayindicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call.)

Put an active call on hold.Call HoldPress OK when Hold on/off appears. To answer anothercall at this time, press the phone button.

Enter "tones", such as numbers for passwords.Enter TonesScroll until the desired number appears in the display, thenpress OK; a tone sounds as confirmation. Repeat asnecessary.

Join two separate calls. (SYNC supports a maximum ofthree callers on a multiparty call or conference call.)

Join Calls

1. Press the phone button.

266


SYNC™


2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voicecommands to place the second call. Once actively in thesecond call, press MENU.3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press OK. Press OK again whenJoin Calls? appears.

Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook1. Press OK to select, and then scroll through your phone-book contacts.2. Press OK again when the desired selection appears inthe display.3. Press the phone button.

Access your call history log.Call History1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your call historyoptions (incoming, outgoing or missed).2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in thedisplay.3. Press the phone button to call the selection.

Exit the current menu.Return

Accessing Features through thePhone MenuSYNC's phone menu allows you to rediala number, access your call history andphonebook and sends text messages aswell as access phone and system settings.You can also access advanced features,such as 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Reportand SYNC Services.

1. Press the phone button to enter thephone menu.

2. Scroll to cycle through:


Redial the last number called (if available). Press OK toselect, and then press OK again to confirm.

Phone Redial

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls afteryou connect your Bluetooth-enabled phone to SYNC.Call History1

1. Press OK to select.2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming, Call HistoryOutgoing or Call History Missed. Press OK to make yourselection.3. Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selec-tion.

267


SYNC™


Note: The system attempts to automatically re-downloadyour phonebook and call history each time your phoneconnects to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on andyour Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports thisfeature).

Access and call any contacts in your previously down-loaded phonebook.Phonebook1,2

1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your phonebook hasfewer than 255 listings, they appear alphabetically in flatfile mode. If there are more than 255 entries, the systemorganizes them into alphabetical categories.2. Scroll until the desired contact appears, then press OK.3. Press OK or the phone button.

Send, download and delete text messages.Text Message1

View your phone's status, set ring tones, select yourmessage notification, change phone book entries andautomatically download your cellular phone among otherfeatures.

Phone Settings 1

Access the SYNC Services portal where you can requestvarious types of information, traffic reports and directions.SYNC Services3

Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after anaccident, when used properly.911 Assist4

Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle.Vehicle Health Report3

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on yoursmartphone.Mobile Apps3

Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (Add, Connect,Set as Primary, On and Off, Delete) as well as Advancedmenu listings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset,install application and system information).

System Settings

Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.Exit Phone Menu1 This is a phone-dependent feature.2 This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.3 This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.4 This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only.

268


SYNC™

Text MessagingNote: This is a phone-dependent feature.SYNC allows you to receive, send,download and delete text messages. Thesystem can also read incoming textmessages to you so that you do not haveto take your eyes off the road.

Receiving a Text MessageNote: This is a phone-dependent feature.Your phone must support downloading textmessages using Bluetooth to receiveincoming text messages.When a new message arrives, an audibletone sounds and the display indicates youhave a new message. You have theseoptions:• Press the voice button, wait for the

prompt and say "Read message" tohave SYNC read the message to you.

• Press OK to receive and open the textmessage or do nothing and themessage goes into your text messageinbox. Press OK again and SYNC readsyour message aloud as you are not ableto view the message. You can then alsochoose to reply or forward themessage.

• Press OK and scroll to choosebetween:• Reply to Text Message: Press OK

to access and then scroll throughthe list of pre-defined messages tosend.

• Forward Text Message: Press OKto forward the message to anyonein your Phonebook or Call History.You can also choose Enter Number.

Sending, Downloading and DeletingYour Text MessagesNote: Forwarding a text message is aspeed-dependent feature and is onlyavailable when your vehicle is traveling at 3mph (5 km/h) or less.Note: You can only have one recipient pertext message.Text messaging is a phone-dependentfeature. If your phone is compatible, SYNCallows you to receive, send, download anddelete text messages.1. Press the phone button.2. Scroll to Text Message, and then press

OK.Scroll to select from the following options:• Send Text Message? allows you to

send a new text message based on apre-defined set of 15 messages.

• Download Unread Msgs allows youto download your unread messages(only) to SYNC. To download themessages, press OK to select. Thedisplay indicates that it is downloadingyour messages. When it is complete,SYNC takes you to your inbox.

• Delete All Messages? allows you todelete current text messages fromSYNC (not your phone). To delete themessages, press OK to select. Thedisplay indicates when it is finisheddeleting all your text messages. SYNCreturns you to the text message menu.

• Return exits the current menu whenyou press OK.

If you select Send Text Message?:1. Press OK to select. If the system

detects your phone does not supportthis feature, Unsupported appears inthe display and SYNC returns to themain menu.

2. Scroll to cycle through the messageoptions in the following chart.

269


SYNC™

3. Press OK when the desired selectionis in the display.

4. Enter the name of the recipient. Scrollto cycle through Phonebook or CallHistory entries. You can also selectEnter Number to say the desirednumber.

5. Press OK to enter the desired menuand scroll to select the specificcontact.

6. Press OK when the contact appearsand press OK again to confirm whenthe system asks if you would like tosend the message. The system sendseach text message with the followingsignature: "This message was sentfrom my <Ford or Lincoln>".

Pre-defined text message options

Can't talk right now

Call me

Call U later

Be there in 10 minutes

Be there in 20 minutes

Yes

Pre-defined text message options

No

Why?

Thanks

Where R you?

I need more directions

I love you

Too funny

Can't wait to see you

I'm stuck in traffic

Accessing Your Phone SettingsThese are phone-dependent features. Yourphone settings allow you to access andadjust features such as your ring tone, textmessage notification, modify yourphonebook and set up automaticdownload.1. Press the phone button.2. Scroll to Phone Settings, and then

press OK.3. Scroll to select from the following

options:


See the provider, name, signal power, battery power androaming status of your connected phone.

Phone Status

Press OK to select and scroll to view the information.When done, press OK again to return to the phone statusmenu.

Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call (oneof the system's or your phone's).

Set Ringer

1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1, Ringer 2,Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer.2. Press OK to select.

270


SYNC™


If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone plays when you choose Phone Ringer.

Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify youwhen a text message arrives.

Message Notification

1. Press OK to select and scroll between Message Notific-ation On and Message Notification Off.2. Press OK to select.

Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,delete or download). Press OK to choose between:

Modify Phonebook

Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts from yourphone book. Push the desired contact(s) on your phone.See your phone's manual on how to push contacts.

Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the current phonebook and call history. When Delete Phonebook appears,press OK to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the PhoneSettings menu.

Download Phonebook: Press OK to select, then and pressOK again when Confirm Download? appears.

Automatically download your phone book each time yourphone connects to SYNC.*

Auto Download

Press OK to select. When Auto Download On? appears,press OK to have your phonebook automatically down-loaded each time.**

Select Off if you do not want to download your phonebookevery time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook,call history and text messages can only be accessed whenyour specific phone is connected to SYNC.

Exit the current menu.Return*Downloading times are phone-dependent and quantity-dependent.**When Auto Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletionssaved since your last download.

System SettingsThis menu provides access to yourBluetooth Devices and Advanced menufeatures. Use the arrow buttons to scrollthrough the menu options.

Bluetooth DevicesThe Bluetooth Devices menu allows youto add, connect and delete devices, set aphone as primary as well as turn yourBluetooth feature on and off.

271


SYNC™

1. Press the phone button to enter thephone menu

2. Scroll to System Settings. Press OK.

3. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. Press OK.4. Scroll to select from the following

options:

You can:If you select:

See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 263).Add Bluetooth Device*

Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.**Connect Bluetooth Device1. Press OK to select and view a list of previously pairedphones.2. Scroll until you find the desired device, and then pressOK to connect the phone.

Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone.Set as Primary PhonePress OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.Press OK to confirm.SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at everyignition cycle. When you select a phone as a primary phone,it appears first in the list and the system marks it with anasterisk.

Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.Set BluetoothPress OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. Makea selection, and then press OK.Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devicesand turns off all Bluetooth features.

Delete a paired phone.Delete DevicePress OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK toconfirm.

Delete all previously paired phones (and all informationoriginally saved with those phones).

Delete All Devices

Press OK to select.

Exit the current menu.Return* This is a speed-dependent feature.**You can only connect one device at a time. When another phone is connected, theprevious one is disconnected.

272


SYNC™

AdvancedThe Advanced menu allows you to accessand set prompts, languages, defaults,perform a master reset, install anapplication and view system information.

1. Press the phone button to enter thephone menu

2. Scroll to System Settings. Press OK.3. Scroll to Advanced. Press OK.4. Scroll to select from the following

options:


Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints orasking you for a specific action. To turn these prompts onor off:

Prompts

1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between On andOff.2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in thedisplay. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Choose between English, Français and Español. Onceselected, all of the radio displays and prompts are in theselected language.

Languages

1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in thedisplay. If you change the language setting, the displayindicates that the system is updating. When complete,SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Return to the factory default settings. This selection doesnot erase your indexed information (phonebook, callhistory, text messages and paired devices).

Factory Defaults

1. Press OK to select and then press OK again whenRestore Defaults? appears in the display.2. Press OK to confirm.

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC(phonebook, call history, text messages and paireddevices) and return to the factory default settings.

Master Reset

Press OK to select. The display indicates when completeand SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Install applications you have downloaded.Install Application?Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to confirm.

Delete all previously paired phones (and all informationoriginally saved with those phones).

Delete All Devices

Press OK to select.

Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDNnumber.

System Info

273


SYNC™


Press OK to select.

This is a Bluetooth component, which can further helpyour phone with the exchange of text messages.

MAP Profile


SYNC™ APPLICATIONS ANDSERVICESIn order for the following features to work,your cellular phone must be compatiblewith SYNC. To check your phone'scompatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.• SYNC Services*: Provides access to

traffic, directions and information suchas travel, horoscopes, stock prices andmore.

• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event ofan emergency.

• Vehicle Health Report*: Provides adiagnostic and maintenance reportcard of your vehicle.

*This is an optional feature and availablein the United States only.

911 AssistWARNINGS

Unless the 911 Assist setting is set onbefore a crash, the system will notdial for help which could delay

response time, potentially increasing therisk of serious injury or death after a crash.

WARNINGSDo not wait for 911 Assist to make anemergency call if you can do ityourself. Dial emergency services

immediately to avoid delayed responsetime which could increase the risk ofserious injury or death after a crash. If youdo not hear 911 Assist within five secondsof the crash, the system or phone may bedamaged or non-functional.

Always place your phone in a securelocation in your vehicle so it does notbecome a projectile or get damaged

in a crash. Failure to do so may causeserious injury to someone or damage thephone which could prevent 911 Assist fromworking properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must beset on before the incident.Note: Before setting this feature on, makesure that you read the 911 Assist PrivacyNotice later in this section for importantinformation.Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,that setting applies for all paired phones. If911 Assist is turned off, either a voicemessage plays or a display message (oricon) comes on (or both) when your vehicleis started after a previously paired phoneconnects.Note: Every phone operates differently.While SYNC 911 Assist works with mostcellular phones, some may have troubleusing this feature.

274


SYNC™

If a crash deploys an airbag (excludingknee airbags and rear inflatable safetybelts [if equipped]) or activates the fuelpump shut-off, your SYNC-equippedvehicle may be able to contact emergencyservices by dialing 911 through a paired andconnected Bluetooth-enabled phone. Youcan learn more about the 911 Assistfeature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.See Supplementary Restraints System(page 34). Important information aboutairbag deployment is in this chapter.See Roadside Emergencies (page 166).Important information about the fuel pumpshut-off is in this chapter.

Setting 911 Assist On1. Press the phone button to enter the

phone menu.2. Scroll to select 911 Assist.3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911

Assist menu.4. Scroll to select between On and Off.5. Press OK when the desired option

appears in the radio display. Set On orSet Off appears in the display asconfirmation.

Off selections include:• Off with reminder: Provides a display

and voice reminder at phoneconnection at vehicle start.

• Off without reminder: Provides adisplay reminder only without a voicereminder at phone connection.

To make sure that 911 Assist worksproperly:• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident andthroughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set onbefore the incident.

• You must pair and connect aBluetooth-enabled and compatiblecell phone to SYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phonemust have the ability to make andmaintain an outgoing call at the timeof the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phonemust have adequate network coverage,battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery powerand be located in the U.S., Canada orin a territory in which 911 is theemergency number.

In the Event of a CrashNot all crashes will deploy an airbag oractivate the fuel pump shut-off (thetriggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cellphone sustains damage or loses itsconnection to SYNC during a crash, SYNCwill search for and try to connect to apreviously paired cell phone; SYNC willthen attempt to call the emergencyservices.Before making the call:• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.If you fail to cancel the call, SYNCattempts to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similarmessage: "SYNC will attempt to call911, to cancel the call, press Cancel onyour screen or press and hold thephone button on your steering wheel."

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNCmakes a successful call, a pre-recordedmessage plays for the 911 operator, andthen the occupant(s) in your vehicle is ableto talk with the operator. Be prepared toprovide your name, phone number andlocation immediately, because not all 911systems are capable of receiving thisinformation electronically.

275


SYNC™

911 Assist May Not Work If• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist

hardware sustains damage in a crash.• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle

are the ones paired and connected tothe system.

911 Assist Privacy NoticeWhen you turn on 911 Assist, it maydisclose to emergency services that yourvehicle has been in a crash involving thedeployment of an airbag or activation ofthe fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions orupdates to 911 Assist may also be capableof electronically or verbally disclosing to911 operators your vehicle location or otherdetails about your vehicle or crash to assist911 operators to provide the mostappropriate emergency services. If you donot want to disclose this information, donot turn the feature on.

Vehicle Health ReportWARNING

Always follow scheduledmaintenance instructions, regularlyinspect your vehicle, and seek repair

for any damage or problem you suspect.Vehicle Health Report supplements, butcannot replace, normal maintenance andvehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Reportonly monitors certain systemselectronically monitored by your vehicleand will not monitor or report the statusof any other system, (such as brake liningwear). Failure to perform scheduledmaintenance and regularly inspect yourvehicle may result in vehicle damage andserious injury.

Note: This feature is only available in theUnited States.

Note: Your Vehicle Health Report featurerequires activation before use. Visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com to register. Thereis no fee or subscription associated withVehicle Health Report, but you must registerto use this feature.Note: This feature may not functionproperly if you have enabled caller IDblocking on your cellular phone. Beforerunning a report, review the Vehicle HealthReport Privacy Notice.Note: In order to allow a break-in period foryour vehicle, you may not be able to createa Vehicle Health Report until your vehicleodometer has reached 200 miles.Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges mayapply when making a report.Register for Vehicle Health Report and setyour report preferences atwww.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,you can request a Vehicle Health Report(inside your vehicle). Return to youraccount at www.SYNCMyRide.com to viewyour report. You can also choose for SYNCto remind you automatically to run reportsat specific mileage intervals.The system allows you to check yourvehicle's overall health in the form of adiagnostic report card. The vehicle healthreport contains valuable information suchas:• Vehicle diagnostic information• Scheduled maintenance• Open recalls and Field Service Actions• Items noted during vehicle inspections

by an authorized dealer that still needservicing.

You can run a report (after your vehicle hasbeen running a minimum of 60 seconds)by pressing the voice button and saying"Vehicle health report", or pressing thephone button.To run a report using the phone button:

276


SYNC™

1. Press the phone button to enter phonemenu.

2. Scroll to select Vehicle Health, andthen press OK.

3. Scroll to select from the followingoptions:

Vehicle health report options

Automatic Reports: Press OK to and select On or Off.Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to runa health report at certain mileage intervals.*

User Preferences: Press OKto select and enter themenu. Scroll to select from:

Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select between5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals and press OK to makeyour selection.

Return: Press OK to exit the menu.

Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle'sdiagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where itcombines with scheduled maintenance information, openrecalls and other field service actions and vehicle inspec-tion items that still need servicing from an authorizeddealer.

Run Report?

*You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval.

Vehicle Health Report Privacy NoticeWhen you create a Vehicle Health Report,Ford Motor Company may collect yourcellular phone number (to process yourreport request) and diagnostic informationabout your vehicle. Certain versions orupdates to Vehicle Health Report may alsocollect more vehicle information. Ford mayuse your vehicle information it collects forany purpose. If you do not want to discloseyour cellular phone number or vehicleinformation, do not run the feature or setup your Vehicle Health Report profile atwww.SYNCMyRide.com. Seewww.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle HealthReport Terms and Conditions, and PrivacyStatement) for more information.

SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions& Information (TDI)Note: SYNC Services requires activationbefore use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com toregister and check your eligibility forcomplimentary services. Standard phoneand message rates may apply. Subscriptionmay be required. You must also have theactive SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabledcellular phone paired and connected to thesystem in order to connect to, and use,SYNC Services. See Using SYNC™ WithYour Phone (page 263).Note: This feature does not functionproperly if you have enabled caller IDblocking on your cellular phone. Make sureyour cellular phone is not blocking caller IDbefore using SYNC Services.

277


SYNC™

Note: The driver is ultimately responsiblefor the safe operation of the vehicle, andtherefore, must evaluate whether it is safeto follow the suggested directions. Anynavigation features provided are only an aid.Make your driving decisions based on yourobservations of local conditions and existingtraffic regulations. Do not follow the routesuggestions if doing so would result in anunsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in anunsafe situation, or if you would be directedinto an area that you consider unsafe. Mapsused by this system may be inaccuratebecause of errors, changes in roads, trafficconditions or driving conditions.Note: When you connect, the service usesGPS technology and advanced vehiclesensors to collect your vehicle's currentlocation, travel direction and speed to helpprovide you with the directions, trafficreports, or business searches you request.Further, to provide the services you request,for continuous improvement, the servicemay collect and record call details and voicecommunications. For more information, seeSYNC Services Terms and Conditions atwww.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not wantFord or its service providers to collect yourvehicle travel information or otherinformation identified in the Terms andConditions, do not subscribe or use theservice.SYNC Services uses advanced vehiclesensors, integrated GPS technology andcomprehensive map and traffic data, togive you personalized traffic reports,precise turn-by-turn directions, businesssearch, news, sports, weather and more.For a complete list of services, or to learnmore, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Connecting to SYNC Services UsingVoice Commands1. Press the voice button.

2. When prompted, say "Services". Thisinitiates an outgoing call to SYNCServices using your paired andconnected Bluetooth-enabled cellularphone.

3. Once you connect to the service, followthe voice prompts to request thedesired service, such as Traffic orDirections. You can also say, "What aremy choices?" to receive a list ofavailable services from which tochoose.

4. Say, "Services" to return to the Servicesmain menu or for help, say, "Help".

Connecting to SYNC Services Usingthe Phone Menu1. Press the phone button to enter the

phone menu.2. Scroll to Services.3. Press OK to confirm and enter the

Services menu. The display indicatesthe system is connecting.

4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to theServices portal.

5. Once you connect to the service, followthe voice prompts to request thedesired service, such as Traffic orDirections. You can also say, "What aremy choices?" to receive a list ofavailable services from which tochoose.


Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions1. When connected to SYNC Services,

say "Directions" or "Business search".To find the closest business or type ofbusiness to your current location, justsay "Business search" and then"Search near me". If you need furtherassistance in finding a location you cansay "Operator" at any time within a

278


SYNC™

Directions or Business search to speakwith a live operator. The system mayprompt you to speak with an operatorwhen it has difficulty matching yourvoice request. The live operator canassist you by searching for businessesby name or by category, residentialaddresses by street address or byname or specific street intersections.Operator Assist is a feature of yourSYNC Services subscription. For moreinformation on Operator Assist, visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com/support.

2. Follow the voice prompts to select yourdestination. Once you select yourdestination, the system uploads yourcurrent vehicle location, calculates aroute based on current trafficconditions and sends it back to yourvehicle. After the route download iscomplete, the phone call automaticallyends. You then receive audible andvisual driving instructions as you traveltoward your destination.

3. While on an active route, you can selector say "Route summary" or "Routestatus" to view the Route Summaryturn list or the Route Status ETA. Youcan also turn voice guidance on or off,cancel the route or update the route.

If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asksif you want the route updated. Just say,"Yes" when prompted and the systemsends a new route to your vehicle.

Disconnecting from SYNC Services1. Press and hold the phone button on

the steering wheel.2. Say "Goodbye" from the SYNC

Services main menu.

SYNC Services quick tips

You can personalize your Services feature to providequicker access to your most used or favorite information.You can save address points such as work or home. Youcan also save favorite information like sports teams or anews category. You can learn more about personalizationby logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Personalizing

Press the voice button at any time (while connected toSYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audioclip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.

Push to interrupt

Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (VehicleIdentification Number). You can pair and connect yourphone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services andcontinue enjoying your personalized services.

Portable

You can even access your account outside your vehicle.Just use the number on your phone's call history. Trafficand Directions features do not function properly butinformation services and the 411 connect and text messagefeatures are available.

279


SYNC™

SYNC AppLinkNote: This feature is only available in theUnited States.Note: You must pair and connect yoursmartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.Note: iPhone users need to connect thephone to the USB port in order to start theapplication. We recommend you lock youriPhone after starting an application.Note: The AppLink feature is not availableif your vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch or MyLincoln Touch system.Note: Depending on your display type, youcan access AppLink from the media menu,the phone menu, or by using voicecommands. Once an app is running throughAppLink, you can control main features ofthe app through voice commands andsteering wheel controls.

To Access Using the Phone Menu1. Press the phone button to access the

SYNC phone menu on-screen.2. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to

access a list of available applications.3. Scroll through the list of available

applications and press OK to select aparticular app.

4. Once an app is running through SYNC,you can access an app’s menu bypressing the MENU button to firstaccess the SYNC menu.

5. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.6. Scroll until "<App name> Menu" is

displayed (such as, Pandora Menu),then press OK. From here, you canaccess an application's features, suchas Thumbs up and Thumbs down. Formore information, please visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com.

To Access Using the Media Menu1. Press the AUX button on the center

console.2. Press MENU to access the SYNC

menu.3. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.4. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to

access a list of available applications.5. Scroll through the list of available

applications and press OK to select aparticular app.

6. Once an app is running through SYNC,you can access an app’s menu bypressing the MENU button to firstaccess the SYNC menu.

7. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.8. Scroll until "<App name> Menu" is

displayed (such as, Pandora Menu),then press OK. From here, you canaccess an application's features, suchas Thumbs up and Thumbs down. Formore information, please visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com.

To Access Using Voice Commands1. Press the voice icon.2. When prompted, say "Mobile Apps".3. Say the name of the application after

the tone.4. The app should start. While an app is

running through SYNC, you can pressthe voice button and speak commandsspecific to the app, such as "PlayStation Quickmix". Say "Help" todiscover available voice commands.

280


SYNC™

USING SYNC™ WITH YOURMEDIA PLAYERYou can access and play music from yourdigital music player over your vehicle'sspeaker system using the system's mediamenu or voice commands. You can alsosort and play your music by specificcategories, such as artist and album.SYNC is capable of hosting nearly anydigital media player including: iPod®,Zune™, Plays from device players, andmost USB drives. SYNC also supportsaudio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAVand ACC.

Connecting Your Digital MediaPlayer to the USB PortNote: If your digital media player has apower switch, make sure you switch it onbefore plugging it in.

To Connect Using Voice Commands1. Plug the device into the USB port.2. Press the voice icon and when

prompted, say "USB".3. You can now play music by saying any

of the appropriate voice commands.See the media voice commands.

To Connect Using the System Menu1. Plug the device into the USB port.2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the media menu.3. Scroll to Select Source. Press OK.4. Scroll to USB. Press OK.5. Depending on how many digital media

files are on your connected device,Indexing may appear in the radiodisplay. When indexing is complete, thescreen returns to the Play menu.

Press OK and scroll through selections of:• Play All• Albums• Genres• Playlists• Tracks• Explore USB• Similar Music• Return

What's Playing?At any time when a track is playing, youcan press the voice icon and ask thesystem "What's playing?". The systemreads the metadata tags (if populated) ofthe playing track to you.

Media Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice icon. Whenprompted, say "USB", then anyof the following:

"USB"

"Autoplay off"

"Autoplay on"

"Connections"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play album <name>"1,2

"Play all"

"Play artist <name>"1,2

"Play genre <name>"1,2

"Play next folder"3

"Play next track"

281


SYNC™

"USB"

"Play playlist <name>"1,2

"Play previous folder"3

"Play previous track"

"Play song <name>"1,2

"Play track <name>"1,2

"Refine album <name>"1,2

"Refine artist <name>"1,2

"Refine song <name>"1,2

"Refine track <name>"1,2

"Repeat off"

"Repeat on"

"Search album <name>"1,2

"USB"

"Search artist <name>"1,2

"Search genre <name>"1,2

"Search song <name>"1,2

"Search track <name>"1,2

"Shuffle off"

"Shuffle on"

"Similar music"

"What's playing?"1 <name> is a dynamic listing, meaning thatit could be the name of anything, such asa group, artist or song.2 This voice command is not available untilindexing is complete.3 This voice command is only available infolder mode.

Voice command guide

Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed duringindexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing processto finish before the system plays any of your music.*

"Autoplay"

The system searches all the data from your indexed musicand, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music.You can only play genres of music that are present in theGENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital mediaplayer.

"Search genre" or "Playgenre"

The system compiles a playlist and then plays musicsimilar to what is currently playing from the USB port usingindexed metadata information.

"Similar music"

282


SYNC™

Voice command guide

The system searches for specific artist, track or albuminformation from the music indexed through the USB port.

"Search" or "Play" artist,track or album

This allows you to make your previous command morespecific. For example, if you asked to search and play allmusic by a certain artist, you could then say, "Refinealbum" and choose a specific album from the list to view.If you then select Play, the system only plays music fromthat specific album.

"Refine"

*Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songsthe system needs to process.

Press the voice icon. When prompted, say,"Bluetooth audio", then any of thefollowing:

"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"

"Connections"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play next track"


Media Menu FeaturesThe media menu allows you to select yourmedia source, how to play your music(such as by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat),and also to add, connect or delete devices.1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the media menu.2. Scroll to cycle through:


Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlist, track,similar music or play all music. You can also choose toExplore USB to view the supported digital music files onyour playing device.

Play Menu

Select and play music from your USB port, auxiliary inputjack (line in) or stream music from your Bluetooth-enabledphone.

Select Source

SYNC USB: Press OK to access music plugged into yourUSB port. You can also plug in devices to charge them (ifsupported by your device). Once connected, the systemindexes any readable media files.1

283


SYNC™


Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent feature thatallows you to stream music playing on your Bluetooth-enabled phone. If supported by your device, you can pressSEEK to play the previous or next track.

SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play music from yourportable music player over your vehicle's speakers.2

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select yourAutoplay settings. Once you turn these selections on, theyremain on you turn them off. Press SEEK to play theprevious or next track.3

Media Settings

Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media files in thecurrent playlist. To shuffle all media tracks, you must selectPlay All in the play menu and then select Shuffle.

Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song.

Autoplay: Turn autoplay on to listen to music processedduring indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexingprocess to finish before the system plays any of yourmusic.4

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on yoursmartphone.

Mobile Apps

284


SYNC™


Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (Add, Connect, Setas Primary, On and Off, Delete) as well as Advanced menulistings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, installapplication and system information).

System Settings

Press OK to exit the media menu.Exit Media Menu1The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needsto index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplayis off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capableof indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximumindexing file size.2If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line infeature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream dataand music separately.3Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and musicseparately4Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songsthe system needs to process.

Accessing Your Play MenuThis menu allows you to select and playyour media by artist, album, genre, playlist,track, similar music or even to explore whatis on your USB device.Note: If your digital media player has apower switch, make sure you switch it onbefore plugging it in.

1. Press AUX and then MENU to enterthe media menu.

2. Scroll to Play. Press OK.If there are no media files to access, thedisplay indicates there is no media. If thereare media files, you have the followingoptions:


Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing devicein flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.

Play All

Press OK to select. The first track title appears in thedisplay.

Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the systemlists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically. Ifthere are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system liststhem alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are morethan 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.

Artists

285


SYNC™


1. Press OK to select. You can select to play All Artists orany indexed artist.2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press OK.

Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than255 indexed albums, the system lists them alphabeticallyin flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the systemcategorizes them alphabetically.

Albums

1. Press OK to enter the album menu and select fromplaying all albums or from any individual indexed album.2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press OK.

Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC liststhe genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are morethan 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.

Genres

1. Press OK to select.2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press OK.

Access your playlists (from formats, such as .ASX, .M3U,.WPL or .MTP). The system lists your playlists alphabetic-ally in flat-file mode. If there are more than 255, the systemcategorizes them alphabetically.

Playlists

1. Press OK to select.2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press OK.

Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC listsyour tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there aremore than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetic-ally.

Tracks

1. Press OK to select.2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press OK.

Explore all supported digital media on your media deviceconnected to the USB port. You can only view mediacontent which is compatible with SYNC; other files savedare not visible.

Explore USB

1. Press OK to select.2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.

Play music similar to what is currently playing from theUSB port. The system uses the metadata information ofeach song to compile a playlist for you.

Similar Music*

286


SYNC™


Press OK to select. The system creates a new list of similarsongs and begins playing. This feature does not includetracks with incomplete metadata information.

Exit the current menu.Return*With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are notavailable in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place thesetracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voicerecognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown itemsinto any unpopulated metadata tag.

System SettingsBluetooth DevicesThe Bluetooth Devices menu allows youto add, connect and delete a device as turnthe Bluetooth feature on and off.


2. Scroll to System Settings. Press OK.3. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. Press OK.


Pair more devices to the system.Add Bluetooth Device*

1. Press OK to select and press OK again when Find SYNCappears in the display.2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put yourphone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in thedisplay.3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enterthe PIN.

Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled device.Connect Bluetooth Device1. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paireddevices.2. Scroll until you find the desired device, and then pressOK to connect the device.

Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.**Set Bluetooth1. Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off.2. Make a selection, and then press OK.

Delete a paired media device.Delete Device1. Press OK and scroll to select the device.2. Press OK to confirm.

Delete all previously paired devices.Delete All Devices

287


SYNC™


Press OK to select.

Exit the current menu.Return*This is a speed-dependent feature.**Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetoothfeatures.

AdvancedThe Advanced menu allows you to accessand set prompts, languages, defaults andperform a master reset.


2. Scroll to System Settings. Press OK.3. Scroll to Advanced. Press OK.


Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hintsor ask you for a specific action.

Prompts

1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on oroff.2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in thedisplay. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Choose from English, Français or Español. The displaysand prompts are in the selected language.

Languages

1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in thedisplay.3. If you change the language setting, the display indicatesthat the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takesyou back to the Advanced menu.

Return to the factory default settings. This selection doesnot erase your indexed information (phonebook, callhistory, text messages and paired devices).

Factory Defaults

1. Press OK to select.2. Press OK again when Restore Defaults? appears inthe display.3. Press OK to confirm.

288


SYNC™


Completely erase all information stored on SYNC (allphonebook, call history, text messages and all paireddevices) and return to the factory default settings.

Master Reset

Download new software applications (if available) andthen load the desired applications through your USB port.See the web site for more information.

Application


SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTINGYour SYNC system is easy to use. However,should questions arise, see the tablesbelow.

Use the website at any time to check yourphone's compatibility, register youraccount and set preferences as well asaccess a customer representative via anonline chat (during certain hours). Visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca for moreinformation.

Phone issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

Review your phone's manualabout audio adjustments.

The audio control settingson your phone may beaffecting SYNC perform-ance.

There is excessive back-ground noise during a phonecall.

Try turning off the device,resetting the device,removing the device'sbattery, then trying again.

This may be a possiblephone malfunction.

During a call, I can hear theother person but theycannot hear me.

· Go to the website to reviewyour phone's compatibility.

· This is a phone-dependentfeature.

SYNC is not able to down-load my phonebook.

· Try turning off the device,resetting the device orremoving the device'sbattery, then trying again.

· This may be a possiblephone malfunction.

· Try pushing your phone-book contacts to SYNC byusing the Add Contactsfeature.· Use the SYNCmyphonefeature available on thewebsite.

289


SYNC™

Phone issues


· Try pushing your phone-book contacts to SYNC byusing the Add Contactsfeature.

This may be a limitation onyour phone's capability.

The system says PhonebookDownloaded but thephonebook in SYNC isempty or missing contacts.

· If the missing contacts arestored on your SIM card, trymoving them to the devicememory.· Remove any pictures orspecial ring tones associ-ated with the missingcontact.



I am having troubleconnecting my phone toSYNC. · Try turning off the device,

resetting the device orremoving the device'sbattery, then trying again.


· Try deleting your devicefrom SYNC, deleting SYNCfrom your device and tryingagain.· Check the security and autoaccept and prompt alwayssettings relative to the SYNCBluetooth connection onyour phone.· Update your device's firm-ware.· Turn off the Auto phone-book download setting.



Text messaging is notworking on SYNC.

· Try turning off the device,resetting the device orremoving the device'sbattery, then trying again.


290


SYNC™

USB and media issues


· Try turning off the device,resetting the device,removing the device'sbattery, then trying again.

This may be a possibledevice malfunction.

I am having troubleconnecting my device.

· Make sure you are using themanufacturer's cable.· Make sure you insert theUSB cable properly into thedevice and the USB port.· Make sure that the devicedoes not have an auto-install program or activesecurity settings.

Make sure you are notleaving the device in yourvehicle during very hot orcold temperatures.

This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognizemy device when I turn on thecar.

Make sure you properlyconnect the device to SYNCand that you have pressedplay on your device.

· This is a phone-dependentfeature.· The device is notconnected.

Bluetooth audio does notstream.

· Make sure that all songdetails are populated.

· Your music files may notcontain the proper artist,song title, album or genreinformation.

SYNC does not recognizemusic that is on my device.

· Some devices require youto change the USB settingsfrom mass storage to MTPclass.

· The file may be corrupted.· The song may have copy-right protection, which doesnot allow it to play.

Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues


· This is a free feature, butyou must first register onlineto use it.

· You did not activate youraccount on the website.· You may have the wrongVIN (vehicle identificationnumber) listed.

I received a text that I didnot activate Vehicle HealthReport.

291


SYNC™

Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues


· Make sure that your VIN iscorrectly listed in youraccount.

When you register youraccount, you must choose apreferred dealer. If it alreadylists a dealer, try selectinganother dealer and loggingout. Log back in, change itback to your preferreddealer, and retrieve thereport.

The preferred dealerinformation did not loadcorrectly.

I am unable to retrieve thereport on the website, or Ireceive a system error.

· Update your cellularnumber in your account onthe website.

· This could be due to yourphone's compatibility.· Bad signal strength.

I am unable to submit areport.

· Make sure you have fullsignal strength and that yourBluetooth volume level hasbeen turned up.

· You did not activate yourphone on the website.

· Try deleting your phoneand performing a cleanpairing.

· This is a free feature, butyou must first register onlineto use it.

· You did not activate thisphone for this service.· Your phone has ID blockeractive.

I heard a commercial whenI tried to use Traffic, Direc-tions and Information.

· Turn off ID blocker on yourphone as the system recog-nizes you by your phonenumber.· Make sure the currentlyconnected phone is thesame one that is registeredon your SYNCMyRideaccount.

292


SYNC™

Voice command issues


· Review the phone voicecommands and the mediavoice commands at thebeginning of their respectivesections.

· You may be using thewrong voice commands.· You may be speaking toosoon or at the wrong time.

SYNC does not understandwhat I am saying.

· Be aware that SYNC'smicrophone is either in yourrear view mirror or in theheadliner just above thewindshield.

· Review the media voicecommands at the beginningof the media section.

· You may be using thewrong voice commands.· You may be saying thename differently than theway you saved it.

SYNC does not understandthe name of a song or artist.

· Say the song or artistexactly as listed. If you say"Play Artist Prince", thesystem does not play musicby Prince and the Revolutionor Prince and the NewPower Generation.

· The system may not bereading the name the sameway you are saying it.

· Make sure you are sayingthe complete title, such as"California remix featuringJennifer Nettles".· If the song titles are in allCAPS, you have to spellthem. LOLA requires you tosay "L-O-L-A".· Do not use special charac-ters in the title. The systemdoes not recognize them.

· Review the Phone voicecommands at the beginningof the phone section.

· You may be using thewrong voice commands.· You may be saying thename differently than theway you saved it.

SYNC does not understandor is calling the wrongcontact when I want tomake a call. · Make sure you are saying

the contacts exactly as theyare listed. For example, ifyou save a contact as JoeWilson, say "Call JoeWilson".

· Contacts in your phone-book may be very short andsimilar, or they may containspecial characters.

293


SYNC™

Voice command issues


· The system works better ifyou list full names, such as"Joe Wilson" rather than"Joe".

· Your phonebook contactsmay be in CAPS.

· Do not use special charac-ters, such as 123 or ICE, asthe system does not recog-nize them.· If a contact is in CAPS, youhave to spell it. JAKErequires you to say "Call J-A-K-E".

294


SYNC™

GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGDriving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any handheld devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving

E162500

PhoneANavigationBSettingsCHome iconDInformation iconEEntertainmentF

295


MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

This system uses a four-corner strategy toprovide quick access to several vehiclefeatures and settings. The touchscreenprovides easy interaction with your cellphone, entertainment, information andsystem settings. The corners display activemodes within the menus, for example; yourcell phone's status.Note: Some features are not available whileyour vehicle is moving.Note: You can access the Home orInformation menus by pressing the releventbutton on the steering wheel controls.Note: You can access the entertainmentfeatures for 30 minutes after you switch theignition off, and no doors are opened.PHONEPress to select any of the following:• Phone• Quick Dial• Phonebook• History• Messaging• SettingsNAVIGATIONPress to select any of the following:• My Home• Favorites• Previous Destinations• Point of Interest• Emergency• Street Address• Intersection• City Center• Map• Edit Route Cancel Route

E142607

SETTINGS

Press to select any of the following:• Clock• Display• Sound• Vehicle• Settings• Help

E142613

HOMEPress to access the homescreen.

Note: Depending on your vehicle’s optionpackage and software, the screens may varyin appearance from the descriptions in thissection. The features may also be limiteddepending on the market. Check with anauthorized dealer for availability.

E142608

INFORMATION

Press to select any of the following:• Services• Travel Link• Alerts• Calendar• AppsENTERTAINMENTPress to select any of the following:• AM• FM• SIRIUS• CD• USB• BT Stereo• SD Card• Line In

296



Using the Touch-SensitiveControlsTo turn a feature on or off using thetouch-sensitive controls:• Make sure your hands are clean and

dry.• Press firmly on the center of a control

graphic or menu item.• Keep metal objects or other conductive

material away from the surface of thetouchscreen.

Depending on your vehicle’s optionpackage and software, it may also havethe following controls:• Power: Switch the media features on

or off.• VOL: Adjust the volume of playing

media.• Seek: Use as you normally would in

media modes.• Tune: Use as you normally would in

media modes.• Eject: Eject a CD from the

entertainment system.• SOURCE: Touch the control

repeatedly to switch between mediamodes.

• SOUND: Adjust the settings for:• Bass• Treble• Midrange• Balance• Fade• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)• Occupancy Mode• Speed Compensated Volume.

• Hazard warning flasher: Switch thehazard warning flashers on or off.

Cleaning the Touchscreen DisplayUse a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt orfingerprints are still visible, apply a smallamount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pouror spray alcohol onto the display. Do notuse detergent or any type of solvent toclean the display.

SupportThe SYNC support team is available:• Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm

EST.• United States: 1-888-270-1055• Canada: 1-800-565-3673Note: Times are subject to change due toholidays.

Safety InformationWARNING

Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any handheld devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving

• Do not attempt to service or repair thesystem. Have your vehicle checked byan authorized dealer.

• Do not operate media devices if thepower cables are broken or damaged.

297



• Make sure the power cables do notinterfere with the safe operation of yourvehicle's controls or affect your safedriving abilities.

• Some SYNC functions arespeed-dependent. Their use is limitedto when your vehicle is travelling atspeeds below 3 mph (5 km/h).

Make sure that you review your device'smanual before using it with SYNC.

Speed-restricted FeaturesSome features of this system are restrictedfrom use unless your vehicle is stationary.• Screens crowded with information, for

example:• Point of Interest reviews and ratings• SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores• Movie times• Ski conditions.

• Any action that requires keyboard use,for example: entering a navigationdestination or editing information.

• All lists are limited, for example: phonecontacts.

See the following chart for more specificexamples.

Restricted Features

Pairing a cell phoneCell phone

Adding or editing phonebook contacts

Phone contacts and recent phone call entries

Enabling Valet ModeSystem Functionality

Editing settings while the rear view camera or active parkassist are active

Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless

Editing the list of wireless networks

Adding or editing wallpaperPhotos and Graphics

Composing text messagesText Messages

Viewing received text messages

Editing preset text messages

Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation

Demo navigation route

Adding or editing Address Book or Avoid Area entries

298



Privacy InformationWhen you connect a cell phone to SYNC,the system creates a profile within yourvehicle that links to that cell phone. Thisprofile helps in offering you more cellularfeatures and operating more efficiently.Among other things, this profile maycontain data about your cell phone book,text messages (read and unread), and callhistory, including history of calls when yourcell phone was not connected to thesystem. In addition, if you connect a mediadevice, the system creates and retains anindex of supported media content. Thesystem also records a short developmentlog of approximately 10 minutes of allrecent system activity. The log profile andother system data may be used to improvethe system and help diagnose anyproblems that may occur.The cellular profile, media device index,and development log remain in yourvehicle unless you delete them, and aregenerally accessible only in your vehiclewhen your cell phone or media player isconnected. If you no longer plan to use thesystem or your vehicle, we recommend youcarry out a Master Reset to erase all storedinformation.System data cannot be accessed withoutspecial equipment and access to yourvehicle's SYNC module. Ford MotorCompany and Ford of Canada do notaccess the system data for any purposeother than as described without consent,

a court order, or where required by lawenforcement, other governmentauthorities, or other third parties actingwith lawful authority. Other parties mayseek to access the informationindependently of Ford Motor Company andFord of Canada. For further privacyinformation, see the sections on 911Assist®, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,Directions and Information.

Using Voice CommandsThis system helps you control manyfeatures using voice commands. Thisallows you to keep your hands on thewheel and focus on what is in front of you.The system provides feedback throughaudible tones, prompts, questions andspoken confirmations depending on thesituation and the chosen level ofinteraction (voice settings).The system also asks short questions(confirmation prompts) when it is not sureof your request or when there are multiplepossible responses to your request.When using voice commands, words andicons may appear in the lower left statusbar indicating the status of the voicecommand session (such as Listening,Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).

How to Use Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice command icon.After the tone, speak your voicecommand clearly.

These voice commands can be said at any time during a voice command session

"Main menu"

"List of commands"

"What can I say?"

"Next page"

"Previous page"

299



These voice commands can be said at any time during a voice command session

"Go back"

"Cancel"

"Exit"

"Help"

What Can I Say?To access the available voice commandsfor the current voice command session, doone of the following:• During a voice command session, press

the Help icon ? in the lower left statusbar of the screen.

• Say, "What can I say?" for anon-screen listing of the possible voicecommands associated with yourcurrent voice command session.

• Press the voice command icon. Afterthe tone, say, "Help" to hear a list ofpossible voice commands.

Helpful Hints• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is

as quiet as possible. Wind noise fromopen windows and road vibrations mayprevent the system from correctlyrecognizing spoken voice commands.

• After pressing the voice command icon,wait until after the tone sounds andListening appears before saying a voicecommand. Any voice command spokenprior to this will not register with thesystem.

• Speak naturally, without long pausesbetween words.

• At any time, you can interrupt thesystem while it is speaking by pressingthe voice command icon.

Accessing a List of Available VoiceCommandsIf you use the touchscreen, press:1. Settings.2. Help.3. Voice Command List.If you use the steering wheel control, pressthe voice command button. After the tone,speak your voice command clearly.

Available Voice Commands

"Radio list of commands""Audio list of commands"

"SD card list of commands""Bluetooth audio list of commands"

"Sirius satellite list of commands" *"Browse list of commands"

300



Available Voice Commands

"Travel link list of commands" *"CD list of commands"

"USB list of commands""Climate control list of commands"

"Voice instructions list of commands""List of commands"

"Voice settings list of commands""Navigation list of commands" *

"Help""Phone list of commands"* These voice commands are only available when your vehicle is fitted with a navigationsystem, and the navigation system SD card is in the SD card slot.

Voice Command SettingsThese allow you to customize the level ofsystem interaction, help and feedback. Thesystem defaults to standard interactionthat uses candidate lists and confirmationprompts as these provide the highest levelof guidance and feedback.• Interaction Mode: Novice mode

provides detailed interaction andguidance. Advanced mode has lessaudible interaction and more toneprompts.

• Confirmation Prompts: The systemuses these short questions to confirmyour voice command. If turned off, thesystem simply makes a best guess asto what you requested. The systemmay still occasionally ask you toconfirm a voice command.

• Phone and Media Candidate Lists:Candidate lists are lists of possibleresults from your voice commands. Thesystem creates these lists when it hasthe same confidence level of severaloptions based on your voice command.

To access these settings using thetouchscreen, press:1. Settings icon.2. Settings.3. Voice Control.Then select from the following:• Interaction Mode• Confirmation Prompts• Media Candidate Lists• Phone Candidate Lists• Voice Control Volume.To access these settings using voicecommands, press the voice command icon.Wait for the prompt "Please say acommand". Another tone sounds to let youknow the system is listening.

301



Voice command settings

"Interaction mode novice"

"Interaction mode advanced"

"Confirmation prompts on"

"Confirmation prompts off"

"Phone candidate lists on"

"Phone candidate lists off"

"Media candidate lists on"

"Media candidate lists off"

"Help"

Using Voice Commands with theTouchscreen OptionsThe voice command system has a dualmode feature which allows you to switchbetween using voice commands andmaking on-screen selections. This isavailable only when the system displays alist of candidates generated during a voicecommand session. For example, whenentering a street address or trying to call acontact from a cell phone paired to thesystem.

302



SETTINGS

A

B

C

D

E

F

E161968

ClockADisplayBSoundCVehicleDSettingsEHelpF

E142607

Under this menu, you can setyour clock, access and adjust thedisplay, sound and vehicle

settings as well as access settings forspecific modes or the help feature.

ClockTo make adjustments using thetouchscreen, press:Note: You cannot manually set the date.Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.

Note: If the battery has been disconnected,your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signalto update the clock. Once your vehicleacquires the signal, it may take a fewminutes for the update to display the correcttime.

E142607

1. Settings icon.2. Clock.3. + or - to adjust the time.

303



From this screen, you can also make otheradjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hourmode, activate GPS time synchronizationand have the system automatically updatenew time zones.You can also turn the outside airtemperature display off and on. It appearsat the top center of the touchscreen, nextto the time and date.The system automatically saves anyupdates you make to the settings.

DisplayYou can adjust the touchscreen displaythrough the touchscreen or by pressing thevoice button on the steering wheel controlsand when prompted, say, "Displaysettings".

E142607

To make adjustments using thetouchscreen, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Display.Then select from the following:• Brightness allows you to make the

screen display brighter or dimmer.• Mode allows you to turn the display

off. It also allows you to set the screento a certain brightness or have thesystem automatically change basedon the outside light level.• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you

have the options of turning thedisplay's Auto Dim feature on or offand changing the Auto Dim ManualOffset feature.

• Edit Wallpaper allows you to displaythe default photo or upload your own.

Uploading Photos for Your HomeScreen WallpaperNote: You cannot load photos directly fromyour camera. You must access the photoseither from your USB mass storage deviceor from an SD card.Note: Photographs with extremely largedimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may notbe compatible and appear as a blank(black) image on the display.Your system allows you to upload and viewup to 32 photos.

E142607

To access, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Display.3. Edit Wallpaper.4. follow the system prompts to upload

your photographs.Only the photograph(s), which meets thefollowing conditions, display:• Compatible file formats are as follows:

.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384

Sound

E142607


1. Settings icon.2. Sound.Then select from the following:• Bass• Midrange• Treble• Set Balance and Fade• Occupancy Mode

304



• Speed Compensated Volume• DSP.*

Note: * Your vehicle may not have thesesound settings.

Vehicle

E142607


1. Settings icon.2. Vehicle.Then select from the following:• Active Park Assist• Vehicle Health Report• Rear View Camera• Enable Valet Mode• MyKey• Traction Control• Electronic Stability Control• Hill Start Assist

Active Park AssistWhen activated, your system displaysdirections for you regarding the active parkassist process.You can find more information on theactive park assist system in anotherchapter. See Parking Aids (page 138).

Vehicle Health ReportTurn Automatic Reminders on and offand set the mileage interval at which youwould like to receive the reports. Press the? for more information on these selections.When done making your selections, pressRun Vehicle Health Report Now if youwant your report.You can find more information on VehicleHealth Report in this chapter.

Rear View CameraThis menu allows you to access settingsfor your rear view camera.

E142607


1. Settings icon.2. Vehicle.3. Rear View Camera.Then select from the following:• Rear Camera Delay• Visual Park Aid Alert• Guidelines.You can find more information on the rearview camera system in another chapter.See Parking Aids (page 138).

Enable Valet ModeNote: If the system locks, and you need toreset the PIN, enter 3681 and the systemunlocks.Valet mode allows you to lock the system.No information is accessible until thesystem is unlocked with the correct PIN.

E142607

To access, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Vehicle.3. Enable Valet Mode.4. ContinueNote: After you press Continue the systemlocks until you enter the PIN again.

SettingsAccess and adjust system settings, voicefeatures, as well as phone, navigation andwireless settings.

305



System

E142607

To access, press:1. Settings icon.2. Settings.3. System.Then select from the following:

System

Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanishor French.

Language

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature

Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume

Select to have the system beep to confirm choices madethrough the touchscreen.

Touch Screen Button Beep

Select to have the system beep to confirm button choicesmade through the climate or audio system.

Touch Panel Button Beep

Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY orABC format.

Keyboard Layout

Install any downloaded applications or view the currentsoftware licenses.

Install Applications

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personalsettings and personal data.

Master Reset

Voice Control

E142607

To access, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Settings.3. Voice Control.Then select from the following:

Voice Control

Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter-action and guidance. Advanced mode has less audibleinteraction and more tone prompts.

Interaction Mode

Have the system ask you short questions if it has notclearly heard or understood your request.

Confirmation Prompts

306



Voice Control

Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, thesystem may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.

Candidate lists are possible results from your voicecommands. The system simply makes a best guess atyour request with these turned off.

Media Candidate Lists

Candidate lists are possible results from your voicecommands. The system simply makes a best guess atyour request with these turned off.

Phone Candidate Lists

This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume

Media Player

E142607

To access, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Settings.3. Media Player.Then select from the following:

Media Player

When this feature is on, the system automatically switchesto the media source upon initial connection. This allowsyou to listen to music during the indexing process. Whenthis feature is off, the system does not automaticallyswitch to the inserted media source.

Autoplay

Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. Youcan also set a device as your favorite so that the systemautomatically attempts to connect to that device at everyignition cycle.

Bluetooth Devices

This allows you to view the version level of the GracenoteDatabase.

Gracenote® Database Info

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database suppliesmetadata information for your music files. This overridesinformation from your device. This feature defaults to off.

Gracenote® Mgmt

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database suppliedcover art for your music files. This overrides any art fromyour device. This feature defaults to Media Player.

Cover Art Priority

307



Navigation

E142607

To access, press:1. Settings icon,2. Settings,3. Navigation,Then select from the following:

Navigation

Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences

Have the system display your turn list top to bottom orbottom to top.

Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.

Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route asyour preferred route. This route will be displayed first.

Route Preferences

Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system willonly calculate a single route. This speeds up your destina-tion entry process.

Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculatedecological route. This may incur a time penalty.

Have the system avoid freeways.

Have the system avoid tollroads.

Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.

Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.

Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences

Have the system automatically fill-in State/Provinceinformation.

Have the system automatically avoid traffic concerns orallow you to accept or decline an alternative route.

Traffic Preferences

Have the system automatically alert you to traffic concernsthat occur on your route.

Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs.

Have the system display incident icons.

Have the system display areas where difficult drivingconditions may occur.

308



Navigation

Have the system display areas with snow and ice on theroad may occur.

Have the system display any smog alerts.

Have the system display weather warnings.

Have the system display where there may be reducedvisibility.

Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announce-ments.

Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on plannednavigation routes.

Avoid Areas

Phone

E142607

To access, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Settings.3. Phone.Then select from the following:

Phone

Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well assave it as a favorite.

Bluetooth Devices

Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth

Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ringinside your vehicle. With this feature turned on, textmessage notifications are also suppressed and do not ringinside your vehicle.

Do Not Disturb

Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information(page 337).

911 Assist

Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.

Phone Ringer

Select the type of notification for text messages - alerttone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.

Text Message Notification

309



Phone

If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internetdata connection. Select to make your connection profilewith the personal area network or to turn off yourconnection. You can also choose to adjust your settingsor have the system always connect, never connect whenroaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.

Internet Data Connection

Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,re-download your phonebook, add contacts from yourphone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Manage Phonebook

Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning

Wireless & InternetYour system has a Wi-Fi feature thatcreates a wireless network within yourvehicle, thereby allowing other devices(such as personal computers or phones)in your vehicle to speak to each other,share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fifeature, everyone in your vehicle can alsogain access the internet if you have a USBmobile broadband connection inside yourvehicle, your phone supports personal areanetworking and if you park outside awireless hotspot.

E142607

To access, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Settings.3. Wireless & Internet.Then select from the following:

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature onand off in your vehicle. Make sure you turn it on forconnectivity purposes.

Wi-Fi Settings

Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previ-ously stored wireless network. You can categorize byalphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You canalso choose to search for a network, connect to a network,disconnect from a network, receive more information,prioritize a network or delete a network.

Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an accesspoint for a phone or a computer when turned on. Thisforms the local area network within your vehicle for things,such as game playing, file transfer and internet browsing.Press ? for more information.

310



Wi-Fi

Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to viewand change settings for using SYNC as the internetgateway.

Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to viewrecent connections to your Wi-Fi system.

Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USBmobile broadband connection to access the internet. (Youmust turn on your mobile broadband device on yourpersonal computer before connecting it to the system.)This screen allows you to set up what is your typical areafor your USB mobile broadband connection. (USB mobilebroadband settings may not display if the device is alreadyon.) You can select the following: Country, Carrier, PhoneNumber, User Name and Password.

USB Mobile Broadband

Shows you the currently paired devices as well as givingyou your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect,set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is aregistered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.

Bluetooth Settings

Choose your connection methods and change them asneeded. You can select to Change Order and have thesystem either always attempt to connect using a USBmobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.

Prioritize ConnectionMethods

E142626

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certificationmark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Help

E142607

To access, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Help.Then select from the following:

311



Help

View your vehicle's current location, if your vehicle isequipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not equippedwith navigation, nothing displays.

Where Am I?

Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information

Your vehicle identification number (VIN)

Touchscreen system software version

Navigation system version

Map database version

Sirius satellite radio ESN

Gracenote® Database Information and Library version

View the licenses for any software and applicationsinstalled on your system.

Software Licenses

Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle ismoving.

Driving Restrictions

Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Informa-tion (page 337).

911 Assist

In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you tosave up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick accessif there is an emergency. Select Edit to access yourphonebook and then select the desired contacts. Thenumbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select appearat the end of the 911 Assist call process.

View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List

To access Help using the voice commands,press the voice button, then, after the tone,say "Help". The system provides allowablevoice commands for the current mode.

312



ENTERTAINMENT

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

E161892

AM 1, and AM ASTAFM 1, FM 2 and FM ASTBSIRIUSCCDDUSBETouch this button to scroll down for more options, such as SD Card, BT Stereoand Line In

F

These buttons change with the media mode you are in.GRadio memory presets and CD controls.H

Note: Some features may not be availablein your area. Contact an authorized dealerfor more information.You can access these options using thetouchscreen or voice commands.

Browsing Device ContentWhen listening to any type of audio, youcan browse through other devices withouthaving to change sources. For example, ifyou are currently listening to the radio, youcan browse all the artists that are storedon your USB device.

E142599

Press the voice icon on thesteering wheel. When prompted,you can say:

313



"BROWSE" within devices

"Browse"*

"Browse <league> games"**

"Browse <Sirius category> channels"**

"Browse SD card"

"Browse Sirius channel guide"**

"Browse USB"

"Help"* If you only say, "Browse", you can then say any commands in the following chart.**This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to SIRIUS® satelliteradio.

"BROWSE"

"<League> Games"*

"<Sirius category> channels"*

"SD card"*

"Sirius Channel Guide"*

"USB"**

"Help"* This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to SIRIUS® satelliteradio.** For more commands in SD card or USB mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port" sectionof this chapter.

314



Sample commands

"<87.9-107.9>"

"<530-1710>"

"<Channel name>"*

"AM <530-1710>"

"FM <87.9-107.9>"

"Play [album] <name>"**

"Play [artist] <name>"**

"Play [genre] <name>"**

"Play [playlist] <name>"**

"Play [song] <name>"**

"Play <name>"

"Play <name (song or album)> by <artist name>"

"Sirius <0-223>"*

"Sports games"*

* This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio.** The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is optional. Forexample, if you say, "Play Metallica", this is the same as the voice command, "Play [artist]<name>".

AM/FM Radio

E142611

Touch the AM or FM tab to listento the radio.

To change between AM and FM presets,just touch the AM or FM tab.

Memory PresetsSave a station by pressing and holding oneof the memory preset areas. There is a briefmute while the radio saves the station.Sound returns when finished.

315



HD RadioTouch this button to turn HD Radio on. Thelight on the button illuminates when thefeature is on. HD Radio allows you toreceive radio broadcasts digitally, whereavailable, providing free, crystal-clearsound. See HD Radio information later inthis chapter.

ScanTouch this button to go to the next strongAM or FM radio station. The light on thebutton illuminates when the feature is on.

Options

Sound SettingsTouch this button to adjust settings for:• Bass• Midrange• Treble• Balance and Fade• DSP (Digital Signal processing)• Occupancy Mode• Speed Compensated Volume.Note: Your vehicle may not have all thesesound settings.

Set PTY for Seek/ScanThis allows you to select a category ofmusic you would like to search for. You canthen choose to either seek or scan for thestations playing that category.

RDS Text DisplayThis allows you to view the informationbroadcast by FM stations.

ASTAST (Autostore) allows you to have thesystem automatically store the sixstrongest stations in your current location.

TAG ButtonThis feature is available when HD Radio ison, and allows you to tag a song todownload later. When you select On, TAGappears on-screen when HD Radio isactive. You can touch TAG to save theinformation of the song that is playing.When you plug in your portable musicplayer, the information transfers, ifsupported by your device. When you areconnected to iTunes®, the tags appear toremind you of the songs you would like todownload. See HD Radio information laterin this chapter.

Direct TuneTouch this button to enter the desiredstation number when prompted. TouchEnter when you are done.

HD Radio™ Information (If Available)Note: HD Radio broadcasts are notavailable in all markets.HD Radio technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yoursystem has a special receiver that allowsit to receive digital broadcasts (whereavailable) in addition to the analogbroadcasts, it already receives. Digitalbroadcasts provide a better sound qualitythan analog broadcasts with free,crystal-clear audio and no static ordistortion. For more information, and aguide to available stations andprogramming, please visitwww.hdradio.com.When HD Radio is on and you tune to astation broadcasting HD Radio technology,you may notice the following indicators onyour screen:

316



E142616

The HD Radio logo blinks when acquiringa digital station and stays solid whendigital audio is playing. When this logo isavailable, you may also see Title and Artistfields on-screen.

The multicast indicator appears in FMmode (only) if the current station isbroadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.The highlighted numbers signify availabledigital channels where new or differentcontent is available. HD1 signifies the mainprogramming status and is available inanalog and digital broadcasts. Othermulticast stations (HD2 through HD7) areonly available digitally.TAG allows you to save a song todownload later when you are on anacquired HD Radio station and the featureis on. To turn the feature on and use it,press:1. AM or FM.2. Options.3. TAG Button.4. On.5. When you hear a song you like, press

TAG.

The system automatically saves the song'sinformation and transfers it to yourportable music player (if supported) whenyou connect it to the system. The systemautomatically transfers the tag to yourplayer (if already connected) and a pop-upconfirms the transfer.When you access iTunes® with yourportable music player, the tags appear toyou as a reminder. The system allows youto tag up to approximately 100 songs. Fora list of devices that support tagging, seewww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.When HD Radio broadcasts are active, youcan access the following functions:• Scan allows you to hear a brief

sampling of all available stations. Thisfeature still works when HD Radioreception is on, although it does notscan for HD2-HD7 channels. You maysee the HD logo appear if the stationhas a digital broadcast.

• Memory presets allow you to save anactive channel as a memory preset.Touch and hold a memory preset slotuntil the sound returns. There is a briefmute while the radio saves the station.Sound returns when finished. Whenswitching to an HD2 or HD3 memorypreset, the sound mutes before thedigital audio plays, because the systemhas to reacquire the digital signal.

Note: As with any saved radio station, youcannot access the saved station if yourvehicle is outside the station’s receptionarea.

317



HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting

Potential reception issues

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are onthe fringe of the reception area, the station may mute dueto weak signal strength.

Reception area

If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back tothe analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is availableagain. However, if you are listening to any of the possibleHD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and staysmuted unless it is able to connect to the digital signalagain.

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in theanalog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is anHD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Dependingon the station quality, you may hear a slight sound changewhen the station changes from analog to digital. Blendingis the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back toanalog sound.

Station blending

In order to provide the best possibleexperience, use the contact form to reportany station issues found while listening toa station broadcasting with HD Radiotechnology. Independent entities own andoperate each station. These stations areresponsible for ensuring all audio streamsand data fields are accurate.

318



Potential station issues

ActionCauseIssues

No action required. This is abroadcast issue.

This is poor time alignmentby the radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip or repeatin audio.Increase or decrease inaudio volume.

No action required. Thereception issue may clear upas you continue to drive.

The radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Sound fading or blending inand out.

No action required. This isnormal behavior. Wait untilthe audio is available.

The digital multicast is notavailable until the HD Radiobroadcast is decoded. Oncedecoded, the audio is avail-able.

There is an audio mutedelay when selecting HD2 orHD3, multicast preset orDirect Tune.

No action required. Thestation is not available inyour current location.

The previously storedmulticast preset or directtune is not available in yourcurrent reception area.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3multicast channel whenrecalling a preset or from adirect tune.

Fill out the station issueform at website listedbelow.*

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Text information does notmatch currently playingaudio.

Fill out the station issueform at website listedbelow.*

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

There is no text informationshown for currently selectedfrequency.

No action required. This isnormal behavior.

Pressing Scan disablesHD2-HD7 channel search.

HD2-HD7 stations not foundwhen Scan is pressed.

* http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

HD Radio Technology manufactured underlicense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. andforeign patents. HD Radio and the HD andHD Radio logos are proprietary trademarksof iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford MotorCompany and iBiquity Digital Corp. are notresponsible for the content sent using HDRadio technology. Content may bechanged, added or deleted at any time atthe station owner's discretion.

Radio Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to the radio,press the voice button on thesteering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the followingcommands.If you are not listening to the radio, pressthe voice button and, after the tone, say"Radio", then any of the followingcommands.

319



"RADIO"

"FM autoset preset <#>""<87.9-107.9>"

"FM preset <#>""<87.9-107.9> HD"1

"FM 1""<530-1710>"

"FM 1 preset <#>""AM"

"FM 2""AM <530-1710>"

"FM 2 preset <#>""AM autoset"

"HD <#>"1"AM autoset preset <#>"

"Preset <#>""AM preset <#>"

"Radio off""Browse"2

"Radio on""FM"

"Set PTY""FM <87.9-107.9>"

"Tune"3"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"1

"Help""FM autoset"1 If available2 If you have said "Browse", see the "Browse" chart later in this section.3 If you have said "Tune", see the following "Tune" chart.

"TUNE"

"FM autoset""<530-1710>"

"FM autoset preset <#>""<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"*

"FM preset <#>""AM"

"FM1""AM <530-1710>"

"FM1 preset <#>""AM preset <#>"

"FM2""AM autoset"

"FM2 preset <#>""AM autoset preset <#>"

320



"TUNE"

"HD <#>"*"<87.9-107.9>"

"Preset <#>""FM"

"Help""FM <87.9-107.9>"

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"*

* If available

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (IfActivated)

E142611

Press the lower left corner of thetouchscreen, and then select theSIRIUS tab.

Memory PresetsSave a channel by pressing and holdingone of the memory preset areas. There isa brief mute while the radio saves thechannel. Sound returns when finished.

ALERTSave the current song, artist, or team as afavorite. The system alerts you when itplays again on any channel.

ReplayReplay audio on the current channel. Youcan replay approximately 45 minutes ofaudio as long as you have remained tunedto the current station. Changing stationserases the previous audio.While in replay mode:• Press and release the seek buttons to

hear the previous or next song.• Press and hold the seek buttons to

reverse or fast forward in the currenttrack.

• Press play or pause to play or pausethe audio.

• Press Replay to return to live audio ifyou have been using the feature toreplay audio.

ScanTouch this button to hear a brief samplingof channels.

OptionsTouch this button to view and adjustvarious media settings.

Sound SettingsTouch this button to adjust settings for:• Bass• Midrange• Treble• Balance and Fade• DSP (Digital Signal processing)• Occupancy Mode• Speed Compensated Volume.Note: Your vehicle may not have all thesesound settings.

Set Category for Seek/ScanThis allows you to select a category ofmusic you would like to search for. You canthen choose to either seek or scan for thestations playing that category.

321



Parental LockoutThis allows you to lock and unlockchannels, change or reset your PIN orunlock all channels. To use this feature,you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.

Artist/Title/Team AlertsThis feature allows you to select Artists,Titles and Teams that you would like thesystem to alert you to when they areplaying on other channels. Press Edit Alertsto delete or turn off alerts. You can alsoset all alerts to on or off. When an alertappears on the screen, you can choose toTune to the channel, to Cancel the alert orto Disable Alerts. If you are listening to asporting event, you can save your favoriteteams so that the system can alert youwhen they are playing on a satellite radiochannel.Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alertfeature on all channels. Ford MotorCompany shall not be responsible for Alertfeature variation.

Electronic Serial Number (ESN)SIRIUS requires this number whencommunicating with you about youraccount.

Direct TuneTouch this button to enter the satellitechannel number when prompted. TouchEnter when you are done.

BrowseTouch this button to view a list of allavailable stations. Scroll to see morecategories. Touch the station you want tolisten to.Touch Skip if you want to skip thischannel.Touch Lock if you do not want anyone tolisten to this channel.

Touch Title or Artist to see song andartists on other stations.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio InformationNote: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted rightto change, rearrange, add or deleteprogramming including canceling, movingor adding particular channels, and its prices,at any time, with or without notice to you.Ford Motor Company shall not beresponsible for any such programmingchanges.

E142593

SIRIUS satellite radio is asubscription-based satellite radio servicethat broadcasts a variety of music, sports,news, weather, traffic and entertainmentprogramming. Your factory-installedSIRIUS satellite radio system includeshardware and a limited subscription termthat begins on the date of sale or lease ofyour vehicle. See an authorized dealer foravailability.

For more information on extendedsubscription terms (a service fee isrequired), the online media player and alist of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, andother features, please visitwww.siriusxm.com in the United States,www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at1-888-539-7474.Note: This receiver includes the eCosreal-time operating system. eCos ispublished under the eCos License.

322



Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number(ESN)You need your ESN to activate, modify ortrack your satellite radio account. The ESNis on the System Information Screen (SR

ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access yourESN, press the bottom left corner of thetouchscreen, then Press:1. SIRIUS.2. Options.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting

Potential reception issues

For optimal reception performance, keep the antennaclear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and othermaterials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeatingtower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one andthe audio system may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate theinterference and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer-ence

Troubleshooting tips

ActionCauseRadio display

No action required. Thismessage should disappearshortly.

Radio requires more thantwo seconds to produceaudio for the selectedchannel.

Acquiring...

If this message does notclear shortly, or with an igni-tion key cycle, your receivermay have a fault. See anauthorized dealer for service.

There is an internal moduleor system failure present.

Sat Fault/SIRIUS SystemFailure.

Tune to another channel orchoose another preset.

The channel is no longeravailable.

Invalid Channel.

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe tothe channel, or tune toanother channel.

Your subscription does notinclude this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel.

323



Troubleshooting tips

ActionCauseRadio display

The signal is blocked. Whenyou move into an open area,the signal should return.

The signal is lost from theSIRIUS satellite or SIRIUStower to your vehicleantenna.

No Signal.

No action required. Theprocess may take up tothree minutes.

Update of channelprogramming in progress.

Updating.

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to resolvesubscription issues.

Your satellite service is nolonger available.

Call SIRIUS1-888-539-7474.

Use the channel guide toturn off the Lock or Skipfunction on that station.

All the channels in theselected category are eitherskipped or locked.

No Channels Available.

No action required.SIRIUS has updated thechannels available for yourvehicle.

Subscription Updated.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio VoiceCommands

E142599

If you are listening to SIRIUSsatellite radio, press the voicebutton on the steering wheel

controls. When prompted, say any of thefollowing commands.

If you are not listening to SIRIUS satelliteradio, press the voice button and, after thetone, say "SIRIUS", then any of thefollowing commands.

"SIRIUS"

"SAT 2 preset <#>""SIRIUS <0-223>"

"SAT 3""<Channel name>"

"SAT 3 preset <#>""Preset <#>"

"SIRIUS off""SAT"

"SIRIUS on""SAT preset <#>"

"Sports game"*"SAT 1"

324



"SIRIUS"

"Tune"**"SAT 1 Preset <#>"

"Help""SAT 2"* If you have said "Sports game", see the following "Sports game" chart.** If you have said "Tune", see the following "Tune" chart.

"SPORTS GAME"

"Tune to the <college name> game"

"Tune to the <team city> game"

"Tune to the <team city> <team name> game"

"Tune to the <team name> game"

"Help"

"TUNE"

"<0-223>"

"<Channel Name>"

"Preset <#>"

"SAT"

"SAT 1"

"SAT 1 preset <#>"

"SAT 2"

"SAT 2 preset <#>"

"SAT 3"

"SAT 3 preset <#>"

"Help"

325



CD

E142611

Press the lower left corner of thetouchscreen and press the CDtab.

You can also advance and reverse thecurrent track or current folder, if applicable.

RepeatTouch this button to repeat the currentlyplaying track, all tracks on the disc or turnthe feature off if already on.

ShuffleTouch this button to play the tracks orentire albums in random order, or turn thefeature off if already on.

ScanTouch this button to hear a brief samplingof all available tracks.

More InfoTouch this button to see disc information.

Options

Sound SettingsTouch this button to adjust settings for:

• Bass• Midrange• Treble• Balance and Fade• DSP (Digital Signal processing)• Occupancy Mode• Speed Compensated Volume.Note: Your vehicle may not have all thesesound settings.

CompressionTouch this button to turn the compressionfeature on and off.

BrowseTouch this button to look through allavailable CD tracks.

CD Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a CD, pressthe voice button on the steeringwheel controls. When prompted,

say any of the following commands.If you are not listening to a CD, press thevoice button and, after the tone, say "CD",then any of the following commands.

"CD"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play next track"


"Play track <1-512>"

"Repeat"

"Repeat folder"*

326



"CD"

"Repeat off"

"Repeat track"

"Shuffle"

"Shuffle CD"*

"Shuffle folder"*

"Shuffle off"

"Help"*This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.

SD Card Slot and USB PortSD CardNote: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.To remove the SD card, press the card inand the system ejects it. Do not attempt topull the card to remove it as this could causedamage.Note: The navigation system also uses thiscard slot. See Navigation (page 346).

E142619

The SD card slot is located either in thecenter console or behind a small accessdoor in the instrument panel. To accessand play music from your device, press thelower left corner of the touchscreen.

E142620

SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

USB Port

E142621

The USB ports are located either in thecenter console or behind a small accessdoor in the instrument panel. To accessand play music from your device, press thelower left corner of the touchscreen.

327



This feature allows you to plug in mediaplaying devices, memory sticks, flash drivesor thumb drives, and charge devices if theysupport this feature.In order to playback video from your iPod®or iPhone®, you must have a specialcombination USB/RCA composite videocable (which you can buy from Apple®).When the cable is connected to your iPod®or iPhone®, plug the other end into boththe RCA jacks and the USB port.

Playing Music from Your Device

E142611

Insert your device and select theSD Card or USB tab once thesystem recognizes it. You can

then select from the following options:

RepeatThis feature replays the currently playingsong or album.

ShuffleTouch this button to play music on theselected album or folder in random order.

Similar MusicThis feature allows you to choose musicsimilar to what is currently playing.

More InfoTouch this button to see disc informationsuch as current track, artist name, albumand genre.

OptionsTouch this button to view and adjustvarious media settings.Sound Settings allows you to adjustsettings for:• Bass• Midrange

• Treble• Balance and Fade• DSP (Digital Signal processing)• Occupancy Mode• Speed Compensated Volume.Note: Your vehicle may not have all thesesound settings.Media Player Settings allows you toselect more settings, which is under MediaPlayer. See Settings (page 303).Device Information displays softwareand firmware information about thecurrently connected media device.Update Media Index indexes your deviceeach time you connect it to make sure youhave the latest voice commands availablefor all media on the device.

BrowseThis feature allows you to view thecontents of the device. It also allows youto search by categories, such as genre,artist or album.If you want to view song information suchas Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, andGenre, touch the on-screen album art.You can also touch What’s Playing tohear how the system pronounces thecurrent band and song. This can be helpfulwhen using voice commands to make surethe system correctly plays your request.

SD Card and USB Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a USBdevice or an SD card, press thevoice button on the steering

wheel controls. When prompted, say anyof the following commands.If you are not listening to a USB device oran SD card, press the voice button and,after the tone, say "USB" or "SD card",then any of the following commands.

328



"USB" or "SD CARD"

"Play podcast episode <name>""Browse"*

"Play similar music""Next"

"Play song <name>""Pause"

"Play TV show <name>"**"Play"

"Play TV show episode <name>"**"Play album <name>"

"Play video <name>"**"Play all"

"Play video podcast episode <name>"**"Play artist <name>"

"Play video playlist <name>"**"Play audiobook <name>"

"Previous""Play author <name>"

"Repeat all""Play composer <name>"

"Repeat off""Play folder <name>"

"Repeat one""Play genre <name>"

"Shuffle""Play movie <name>"**

"Shuffle off""Play music video <name>"**

"What's this?""Play playlist <name>"

"Help""Play podcast <name>"

"Play video podcast <name>"* If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the system prompts youto specify what you would like to browse. When prompted, see the following "Browse"chart.** These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.

329



"BROWSE"

"All video podcasts"*"Album <name>"

"All videos"*"All albums"

"Artist <name>""All artists"

"Audiobook <name>""All audiobooks"

"Author <name>""All authors"

"Composer <name>""All composers"

"Folder <name>""All folders"

"Genre <name>""All genres"

"Playlist <name>""All movies"*

"Podcast <name>""All music videos"*

"TV show <name>"*"All playlists"

"Video <name>"*"All podcasts"

"Video playlist <name>"*"All songs"

"Video podcast <name>"*"All TV shows"*

"Help""All video playlists"*

* These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.

Supported Media Players, Formatsand Metadata InformationSYNC is capable of hosting nearly anydigital media player, including iPod®,Zune™, plays from device players, andmost USB drives. Supported audio formatsinclude MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.

It is also able to organize your indexedmedia from your playing device bymetadata tags. Metadata tags, which aredescriptive software identifiers embeddedin the media files, provide informationabout the file.If your indexed media files contain noinformation embedded in these metadatatags, SYNC may classify the emptymetadata tags as Unknown.

330



In order to playback video from your iPod®or iPhone®, you must have a specialcombination USB/RCA composite videocable (which you can buy from Apple®).When the cable is connected to your iPod®or iPhone®, plug the other end into boththe RCA jacks and the USB port.

Bluetooth AudioYour system allows you to stream audioover your vehicle's speakers from yourconnected, Bluetooth-enabled cellularphone.

E142611

To access, press the lower leftcorner on the touchscreen, thenselect the BT Stereo tab.

Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a Bluetoothaudio device, press the voicebutton on the steering wheel

control. When prompted, say "Next song","Pause", "Play" or "Previous song".If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audiodevice, press the voice button and, afterthe tone, say "Next song", "Pause", "Play"or "Previous song".

PHONE

A

B

C

D

E

F

E161968

PhoneAQuick DialBPhonebookCHistoryDMessagingESettingsF

331



Hands-free calling is one of the mainfeatures of SYNC®. Once you pair yourphone, you can access many options usingthe touchscreen or voice commands. Whilethe system supports a variety of features,many are dependent on your cellularphone’s functionality.At a minimum, most cellular phones withBluetooth wireless technology support thefollowing functions:• Answering an incoming call.• Ending a call.• Using privacy mode.• Dialing a number.• Redialing.• Call waiting notification.• Caller ID.Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.To check your phone’s compatibility, seeyour phone’s user manual and visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.

Pairing Your Phone for the FirstTime



The first thing you must do to use thephone features of SYNC is to pair yourBluetooth-enabled cellular phone withSYNC. This allows you to use your phonein a hands-free manner.Note: Put the transmission in position P.Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left

corner of the touchscreen. Find SYNCappears on the screen, and instructsyou to begin the pairing process fromyour device.

2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to Onand that your cellular phone is in theproper mode. See your phone’s manualif necessary.

Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PINappears on your device.3. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on

your device, it does not support SecureSimple Pairing. To pair, enter the PINdisplayed on the touchscreen. Skip thenext step.

4. When prompted on your phone’sdisplay, confirm that the PIN providedby SYNC matches the PIN displayedon your cellular phone.

5. The display indicates when the pairingis successful.

SYNC may prompt you with more phoneoptions. For more information on yourphone's capability, see your phone'smanual and visit the website.

Pairing Subsequent PhonesNote: Put the transmission in position P.Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On andthat your cellular phone is in the propermode. See your device's manual ifnecessary. To pair a subsequent phone,press:1. Phone.

332



2. Settings.3. BT Devices.4. Add Device.5. When prompted on your phone's

display, enter the six-digit PIN providedby SYNC on the screen. The displayindicates when the pairing issuccessful.

SYNC may prompt you with more phoneoptions. For more information on yourphone's capability, see your phone'smanual and visit the website.

Making Calls

E142599

Press the voice button on thesteering wheel controls. Whenprompted, say, "Call <name>"

or say "Dial", then the desired number.

To end the call or exit phonemode, press and hold the phonebutton.

Receiving CallsDuring an incoming call, an audible tonesounds. Call information appears in thedisplay if it is available.

Accept the call by pressingAccept on the touchscreen orby pressing the phone button on

the steering wheel.

Reject the call by pressingReject on the touchscreen or bypressing the phone button on the

steering wheel.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logsit as a missed call.

Phone Menu OptionsPress the top left corner on yourtouchscreen to select from the followingoptions:

PhoneTouch this button to access the on-screennumerical pad to enter a number and placea call. During an active call, you can alsochoose to:• Mute the call.• Put the call on hold.• Turn on the privacy feature.• Join two calls.• End the call.

Quick DialSelect and call contacts stored in yourphonebook contacts and call history folder.

PhonebookTouch this button to access and call anycontacts in your previously downloadedphone book. The system places the entriesin alphabetical categories summarized atthe top of the screen.To turn on contact picture settings, if yourdevice supports this feature, press:1. Phone.2. Settings.3. Manage Phonebook.4. Download photos from Phonebook.5. On.Certain smartphones may supporttransferring street addresses when listedwith phone book contact information. Ifyour phone supports this feature, you canselect and use these addresses asdestinations and save them as favorites.

HistoryAfter you connect your Bluetooth-enabledphone to SYNC, you can access anypreviously dialed, received or missed calls.You can also choose to save these to yourFavorites or to Quick Dial.

333



Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.If your phone does not support downloadingcall history using Bluetooth, SYNC keepstrack of calls made with the SYNC system.

MessagingSend text messages using yourtouchscreen. See Text messaging laterin this section.

SettingsTouch this button to access various phonesettings, such turning Bluetooth on and off,managing your phonebook and more. SeePhone settings later in this section.

Text MessagingNote: Downloading and sending textmessages using Bluetooth arephone-dependent features.Note: Certain features in text messagingare speed-dependent and not availablewhen your vehicle is traveling at speeds over3 mph (5 km/h).Note: SYNC does not download read textmessages from your phone.You can send and receive text messagesusing Bluetooth, read them aloud andtranslate text messaging acronyms, suchas LOL.1. Touch the top left corner of the display

to access the Phone menu.

2. Select Messaging.3. Choose from the following:• Listen (speaker icon)• Dial• Send Text• View• Delete.

Composing a Text MessageNote: This is a speed-dependent feature.It is unavailable when your vehicle istraveling at speeds over 5 mph (8 km/h).Note: Downloading and sending textmessages using Bluetooth arephone-dependent features.1. Press Phone .2. Messaging.3. Send Text.4. Enter a phone number or choose from

your phonebook.You can select from the following options:• Send, which sends the message as it

is.• Edit Text, which allows you to

customize the pre-defined message orcreate a message on your own.

You can then preview the message, verifythe recipient as well as update themessage list, and send it to a connecteddevice (such as a USB drive).

Text message options

I’ll call you back in a few minutes.

I just left, I’ll be there soon.

Can you give me a call?

I’m on my way.

I’m running a few minutes late.

334



Text message options

I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.

I’m outside.

I’ll call you when I get there.

OK

Yes

No

Thanks

Stuck in traffic.

Call me later.

LOL

Receiving a Text MessageNote: If you select View and your vehicle istraveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the systemoffers to read the message to you insteadof allowing you to view it while driving.When a new message arrives, an audibletone sounds and the screen displays apop-up with the caller name and ID, ifsupported by your phone. You can press:• View to view the text message.• Listen for SYNC to read the message

to you.• Dial to call the contact.• Ignore to exit the screen.

Phone SettingsTo enter the phone settings menu press:1. Phone.2. Settings.3. Choose from the following:

Bluetooth DevicesTouch this tab to connect, disconnect, addor delete a device, as well as save it as afavorite.

BluetoothTouch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.

Do Not DisturbTouch this tab if you want all calls to godirectly to your voice mail and not ring inthe vehicle. When this feature is on, textmessage notifications do not ring insidethe cabin either.

911 AssistTurn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature.See Information (page 337).

Phone RingerSelect the ring tone you want to hear whenyou receive a call. Choose from possiblesystem ring tones, your currently pairedphone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speechor a silent notification.

335



Text Message NotificationSelect a text message notification, ifsupported by your phone. Choose frompossible system alert tones,text-to-speech or silent.

Internet Data ConnectionIf your phone is compatible, use this screento adjust your internet data connection.Select to make your connection profilewith the personal area network or to turnoff your connection. You can also chooseto adjust your settings or have the systemalways connect, never connect whenroaming or query on connect. Press ? formore information.

Manage PhonebookTouch this button to access features suchas automatic phonebook download,re-download your phonebook, addcontacts from your phone as well as deleteor upload your phonebook.

Roaming WarningTouch this button to have the system alertyou when your phone is in roaming mode.

Phone Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on thesteering wheel controls. Whenprompted, say any of the

following commands:

"PHONE"

"Join calls"1"Call"

"Listen to text message <#>""Call <name>"

"Listen to text messages""Call <name> at home"

"Messages"2"Call <name> at work"

"Mute call"1"Call <name> on cell"

"Pair phone""Call <name> on other"

"Privacy on"1"Call voicemail"

"Read text message""Dial"

"Reply to text messages""Do not disturb off"

"Turn ringer off""Do not disturb on"

"Turn ringer on""Forward text messages"

"Unmute call"1"Go to hands free"1

336



"PHONE"

"Help""Hold call off"1

"Hold on"1

1 These commands are only available during an active call.2 If you say "Messages", see the following "Messages" chart for additional commands.

"MESSAGES"

"Call"

"Forward text messages"

"Listen to text message <#>"

"Listen to text messages"

"Reply to text messages"

"Help"

INFORMATION

A

B

C

D

E

E161889

337



SYNC ServicesASIRIUS Travel LinkBAlertsCCalendarDSYNC ApplicationsE

Under the Information menu, you canaccess features such as:• SYNC Services• SIRIUS Travel Link• Alerts• Calendar• SYNC Applications

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped withNavigation, press theInformation button to access

these features. If your vehicle is notequipped with Navigation, press the cornerof the touchscreen with the green tab.

SYNC Services (If Equipped,United States Only)Note: SYNC Services requires activationbefore use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com toregister and check your eligibility forcomplimentary services. Standard phoneand message rates may apply. Subscriptionmay be required. You must also have theactive SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabledcellular phone paired and connected to thesystem in order to connect to, and use,SYNC Services. See Phone (page 331).Note: This feature does not functionproperly if you have enabled caller IDblocking on your cellular phone. Make sureyour cellular phone is not blocking caller IDbefore using SYNC Services.

Note: The driver is ultimately responsiblefor the safe operation of the vehicle, andtherefore, must evaluate whether it is safeto follow the suggested directions. Anynavigation features provided are only an aid.Make your driving decisions based on yourobservations of local conditions and existingtraffic regulations. Do not follow the routesuggestions if doing so would result in anunsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would beplaced in an unsafe situation, or if you wouldbe directed into an area that you considerunsafe. Maps used by this system may beinaccurate because of errors, changes inroads, traffic conditions or drivingconditions.Note: When you connect, the service usesGPS technology and advanced vehiclesensors to collect your vehicle's currentlocation, travel direction and speed to helpprovide you with the directions, trafficreports, or business searches you request.Further, to provide the services you request,for continuous improvement, the servicemay collect and record call details and voicecommunications. For more information, seeSYNC Services Terms and Conditions atwww.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not wantFord or its service providers to collect yourvehicle travel information or otherinformation identified in the Terms andConditions, do not subscribe or use theservice.

338



SYNC Services uses advanced vehiclesensors, integrated GPS technology andcomprehensive map and traffic data, togive you personalized traffic reports,precise turn-by-turn directions, businesssearch, news, sports, weather and more.For a complete list of services, or to learnmore, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Connecting to SYNC Services UsingVoice Commands

E142599

1. Press the voice button.2. When prompted, say "Services". This

initiates an outgoing call to SYNCServices using your paired andconnected Bluetooth-enabled cellularphone.

3. Once you connect to the service, followthe voice prompts to request thedesired service, such as "Traffic" or"Directions". You can also say, "Whatare my choices?" to receive a list ofavailable services from which tochoose.


Connecting to SYNC Services Usingthe Touchscreen

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped withNavigation, press theInformation button.

If your vehicle is not equipped withNavigation, press the green tab on yourtouchscreen.1. Select Connect to Services to initiate

an outgoing call to SYNC Servicesusing your phone.

2. Once connected, follow the voiceprompts to request your desiredService, such as "Traffic" or"Directions". You can also say, "Whatare my choices?" to receive a list ofavailable services from which tochoose.


Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions1. When connected to SYNC Services,

say "Directions" or "Business search".To find the closest business or type ofbusiness to your current location, justsay "Business search" and then"Search near me". If you need furtherassistance in finding a location you cansay "Operator" at any time within aDirections or Business search to speakwith a live operator. The system mayprompt you to speak with an operatorwhen it has difficulty matching yourvoice request. The live operator canassist you by searching for businessesby name or by category, residentialaddresses by street address or byname or specific street intersections.Operator Assist is a feature of yourSYNC Services subscription. For moreinformation on Operator Assist, visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com/support.

2. Follow the voice prompts to select yourDestination. After the route downloadis finished, the phone call automaticallyends.

339



If your vehicle is not equipped withNavigation:• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the

information display, in the status barof your touchscreen system and on theSYNC Services screen. You also receivedriving instructions from audibleprompts.

• When on an active route, you canselect Route Summary or RouteStatus using the touchscreen controlsor voice commands to view the RouteSummary Turn List or the RouteStatus ETA. You can also turn voiceguidance on or off, cancel the route orupdate the route.

If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asksif you want the route updated. Just say,"Yes" when prompted and the systemdelivers a new route to your vehicle.If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,SYNC Services downloads your requesteddestination to the navigation system. Thenavigation system then calculates theroute and provides driving instructions.See Navigation (page 346).

Disconnecting from SYNC Services1. Press and hold the hang-up phone

button on the steering wheel.2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC

Services main menu.

SYNC Services quick tips

You can personalize your Services feature to providequicker access to your most used or favorite information.You can save address points, such as work or home. Youcan also save favorite information like sports teams, suchas Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn moreabout personalization by logging ontowww.SYNCMyRide.com.

Personalizing

Press the voice button at any time (while connected toSYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audioclip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.

Push to interrupt

Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (VehicleIdentification Number). You can pair and connect yourphone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services andcontinue enjoying your personalized services.

Portable

SYNC Services Voice Commands

E142599

When a route has beendownloaded (non-navigationsystems), press the voice button

on the steering wheel controls. Whenprompted, say any of the followingcommands:

"SERVICES"

"Cancel route"

"Navigation voice off"

"Navigation voice on"

"Next turn"

340



"SERVICES"

"Route status"

"Route summary"

"Services"

"Update route"

"Help"

SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped)



Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link,your vehicle must be equipped withnavigation and your navigation SD cardmust be in the SD card slot.Note: A paid subscription is required toaccess and use these features. Go towww.siriusxm.com/travellink for moreinformation.Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# andclick on Coverage map and details for acomplete listing of all traffic areas coveredby SIRIUS Travel Link.Note: Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is responsiblefor any errors or inaccuracies in the SIRIUSTravel Link services or its use in vehicles.

When you subscribe to SIRIUS Travel Link,it can help you locate the best gas prices,find movie listings, get current traffic alerts,view the current weather map, getaccurate ski conditions and see scores tocurrent sports games.

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped withNavigation, touch the i(Information) button to access

these features. If your vehicle is notequipped with Navigation, touch the cornerof the touchscreen with the green tab.

Traffic On Route and Traffic NearbyTouch these buttons to identify trafficincidents on your route, nearby yourvehicle’s current location or near any ofyour favorite places, if programmed.

Fuel PricesTouch this button to view fuel prices atstations close to your vehicle’s location oron an active navigation route.

Movie ListingsTouch this button to view nearby movietheaters and their show times, if available.

WeatherTouch this button to view the nearbyweather, current weather, or the five dayforecast for the chosen area. Select Mapto see the weather map, which can showstorms, radar information, charts andwinds. Select Area to select from a listingof weather locations.

Sports InfoTouch this button to view scores andschedules from a variety of sports. You canalso save up to 10 favorite teams for easieraccess. The score automatically refresheswhen a game is in progress.

341



Ski ConditionsTouch this button to view ski conditionsfor a specific area.

SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on thesteering wheel controls. Whenprompted, say any of the

following commands:

"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"

"5-day weather forecast"

"Fuel prices"

"Movie listings"

"Sports headlines"*

"Sports schedules"*

"Sports scores"*

"Traffic"

"Weather"

"Weather map"

"Help"* If you say "Sports headlines", "Sportsschedules" or "Sports scores", you canthen say any of the commands in thefollowing chart.

Sports-related commands

"Baseball"

"College basketball"

"College football"

"Golf"

"MLS"

Sports-related commands

"My teams"

"NBA"

"NFL"

"NHL"

"WNBA"

"Help"

Additional sports-related voicecommands

"Baseball headlines"

"Baseball schedule"

"Baseball scores"

"College basketball headlines"

"College basketball schedule"

"College basketball scores"

"College football headlines"

"College football schedule"

"College football scores"

"Golf headlines"

"Golf leaderboard"

"Golf schedule"

"MLS headlines"

"MLS schedule"

"MLS scores"

"Motor sports headlines"

"Motor sports order"

"Motor sports schedule"

"My team headlines"

342



Additional sports-related voicecommands

"My teams schedule"

"My teams scores"

"NBA headlines"

"NBA schedule"

"NBA scores"

"NFL headlines"

"NFL schedule"

"NFL scores"

"NHL headlines"

"NHL schedule"

"NHL scores"

"WNBA headlines"

"WNBA schedule"

"WNBA scores"

"Help"

Alerts

E142608



Press Alerts, and then choose from anyof the following services:• View the complete message.• Delete the message.• Delete All messages.This screen displays any system messages(such as an SD card fault).

Note: The system alerts you to anymessages by turning the information iconyellow. After you read or delete themessages, the icon returns to white.

Calendar

E142608



Press Calendar. You can view the currentcalendar by day, week or month.

911 Assist (If Equipped)

WARNINGSUnless the 911 Assist setting is set onbefore a crash, the system will notdial for help, which could delay

response time, potentially increasing therisk of serious injury or death after a crash.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make anemergency call if you can do ityourself. Dial emergency services

immediately to avoid delayed responsetime, which could increase the risk ofserious injury or death after a crash. If youdo not hear 911 Assist within five secondsof the crash, the system or phone may bedamaged or non-functional.

Always place your phone in a securelocation in your vehicle so it does notbecome a projectile or damaged in

a crash. Failure to do so may cause seriousinjury to someone or damage the phone,which could prevent 911 Assist fromworking properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must beset on prior to the incident.

343



Note: Before setting this feature on, makesure that you read the 911 Assist PrivacyNotice later in this section for importantinformation.Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,that setting applies for all paired phones. If911 Assist is turned off, either a voicemessage plays or a display message (oricon) comes on (or both) when your vehicleis started after a previously paired phoneconnects.Note: Every phone operates differently.While SYNC 911 Assist works with mostcellular phones, some may have troubleusing this feature.If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes kneeairbags and rear inflatable safety belts [ifequipped]) or activates the fuel pumpshut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle maybe able to contact emergency services bydialing 911 through a paired and connectedBluetooth-enabled phone. You can learnmore about the 911 Assist feature, visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.See Supplementary Restraints System(page 34). Important informationregarding airbag deployment is in thischapter.See Roadside Emergencies (page 166).Important information regarding the fuelpump shut-off is in this chapter.

Setting 911 Assist On

E142608



Touch Apps > 911 Assist, then select On.

E142607

You can also access 911 Assistby:

• Pressing the Settings icon > Settings> Phone > 911 Assist, or

• Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911Assist.

To make sure that 911 Assist worksproperly:• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident andthroughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set onprior to the incident.

• You must pair and connect aBluetooth-enabled and compatiblephone to SYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phonemust have the ability to make andmaintain an outgoing call at the timeof the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phonemust have adequate network coverage,battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery powerand be located in the United States,Canada or in a territory in which 911 isthe emergency number.

In the Event of a CrashNot all crashes deploy an airbag or activatethe fuel pump shut-off (which wouldtrigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries tocontact emergency services if 911 Assisttriggers. If a connected phone sustainsdamage or loses connection to SYNC,SYNC searches for, and tries to connectto, any available previously paired phoneand tries to make the call to 911.

344



Before making the call:• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.If you fail to cancel the call, SYNCattempts to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similarmessage: "SYNC will attempt to call911, to cancel the call, press Cancel onyour screen or press and hold thephone button on your steering wheel."

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNCmakes a successful call, a pre-recordedmessage plays for the 911 operator, andthen the occupant(s) in your vehicle is ableto talk with the operator. Be prepared toprovide your name, phone number andlocation immediately, because not all 911systems are capable of receiving thisinformation electronically.

911 Assist May Not Work If• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist

hardware sustains damage in a crash.• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle

are the ones paired and connected tothe system.

911 Assist Privacy NoticeWhen you turn on 911 Assist, it maydisclose to emergency services that yourvehicle has been in a crash involving thedeployment of an airbag or activation ofthe fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions orupdates to 911 Assist may also be capableof electronically or verbally disclosing to911 operators your vehicle location or otherdetails about your vehicle or crash to assist911 operators to provide the mostappropriate emergency services. If you donot want to disclose this information, donot turn the feature on.

Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)

WARNINGAlways follow scheduledmaintenance instructions, regularlyinspect your vehicle, and seek repair

for any damage or problem you suspect.Vehicle Health Report supplements, butcannot replace, normal maintenance andvehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Reportonly monitors certain systemselectronically monitored by your vehicleand will not monitor or report the statusof any other system, (such as brake liningwear). Failure to perform scheduledmaintenance and regularly inspect yourvehicle may result in vehicle damage andserious injury.

Note: This feature is only available in theUnited States.Note: Your Vehicle Health Report featurerequires activation prior to use. Visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com to register. Thereis no fee or subscription associated withVehicle Health Report, but you must registerto use this feature.Note: This feature may not functionproperly if you have enabled caller IDblocking on your cellular phone. Beforerunning a report, review the Vehicle HealthReport Privacy Notice.Note: In order to allow a break-in period foryour vehicle, you may not be able to createa Vehicle Health Report until your vehicleodometer has reached 200 miles.Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges mayapply when making a report.

345



Register for Vehicle Health Report and setyour report preferences atwww.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,you can request a Vehicle Health Report(inside your vehicle). Return to youraccount at www.SYNCMyRide.com to viewyour report. You can also choose for SYNCto remind you automatically to run reportsat specific mileage intervals. Cellular phoneairtime usage may apply when reporting.The system allows you to check yourvehicle’s overall health in the form of adiagnostic report card. The Vehicle HealthReport contains valuable information, suchas:• Vehicle diagnostic information• Scheduled maintenance• Open recalls and Field Service Actions• Items noted during vehicle inspections

by your authorized dealer that still needservicing.

Making a Report

E142608

If you want to run a report byusing the touchscreen, touchApps > Vehicle Health Report.

E142599

To run a report by voicecommand, press the voicebutton on the steering wheel

and, when prompted, say "Vehicle healthreport".

Vehicle Health Report Privacy NoticeWhen you create a Vehicle Health Report,Ford Motor Company may collect yourcellular phone number (to process yourreport request) and diagnostic informationabout your vehicle. Certain versions orupdates to Vehicle Health Report may alsocollect more vehicle information. Ford may

use your vehicle information it collects forany purpose. If you do not want to discloseyour cellular phone number or vehicleinformation, do not run the feature or setup your Vehicle Health Report profile atwww.SYNCMyRide.com. Seewww.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle HealthReport Terms and Conditions, and PrivacyStatement) for more information.

NAVIGATIONNote: The navigation SD card must be inthe SD card slot to operate the navigationsystem. If you need a replacement SD card,see an authorized dealer.Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. Toremove the SD card, just push the card inand release it. Do not attempt to pull thecard out to remove it; this could causedamage.For SD card slot location: SeeEntertainment (page 313).Your navigation system is comprised oftwo main features, destination mode andmap mode.To set a destination, press the green cornerof your touchscreen, then the Dest buttonwhen it appears. See Setting adestination later in this chapter.To view the navigation map and yourvehicle's current location, touch the greenbar in the upper right hand corner of thetouchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. SeeMap mode later in this chapter.

Setting a DestinationPress the green corner of your touchscreen,then the Dest button when it appears.Choose any of the following:

346



Destination

Street AddressMy Home

IntersectionFavorites

City CenterPrevious Destinations

MapPoint of Interest (POI)

Edit Route Cancel RouteEmergency

1. Enter the necessary information intothe highlighted text fields (in anyorder). For address destination entry,the Go! button appears once all thenecessary information has beenentered. Pressing the Go! buttonmakes the address location appear onthe map. If you choose PreviousDestination, the last 20 destinationsyou have selected appear.

2. Select Set as Dest to make this yourdestination. You can also choose to setthis as a waypoint (have the systemroute to this point on the way to yourcurrent destination) or save it as afavorite. The system considers anyAvoid Areas selections in its routecalculation.

3. Choose from up to three different typesof routes, and then select Start Route.

• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roadspossible.

• Shortest: Uses the shortest distancepossible.

• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficientroute.

You can cancel the route or have thesystem demo the route for you. SelectRoute Prefs to set route preferences likeavoiding freeways, tollroads, ferries andcar trains as well as to use or not usehigh-occupancy vehicle lanes.(High-occupancy vehicle lanes also knownas carpool or diamond lanes. People whoride in buses, vanpools or carpools usethese lanes.)Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized roadand you do not press the Start Routebutton, the system defaults to the FastestRoute option and begins guidance.During route guidance, you can press thetalking bubble icon that appears in theupper right navigation corner (green bar)if you want the system to repeat routeguidance information. When the systemrepeats the last guidance instruction, itupdates the distance to the next guidanceinstruction, since it detects when thevehicle is moving.

347



Point of Interest (POI) Categories

Main Categories

AutomotiveFood/Drink & Dining

ShoppingTravel & Transportation

Entertainment & ArtsFinancial

Recreation & SportsEmergency

GovernmentCommunity

Domestic ServicesHealth & Medicine

Subcategories

Restaurant

Golf

Parking

Home & Garden

Personal Care Services

Auto Dealership

Government Office

Public Transit

Education

To expand these listings, press the + infront of the listing.When programming a point of interestdestination, the system allows you to sortthe resulting lists alphabetically, bydistance or by cityseekr listings (ifavailable).Pressing the Search Area button allowsyou to search for points of interest nearby,near a city or state or near a destination, ifa route is active.

Pressing the Search By Name buttonallows you to directly enter the point ofinterest name into the system by using thekeyboard.

cityseekrNote: cityseekr point of interest informationis limited to approximately 912 cities (881in the U.S., 20 in Canada and 11 in Mexico).

348



E142634

cityseekr, when available, is a service thatprovides more information about certainpoints of interest such as restaurants,hotels and attractions.

When you have selected a point of interest,the location and information appear, suchas address and phone number. If cityseekrlists the point of interest, more informationis available, such as a brief description,hotel check-in and checkout times orrestaurant hours.Press More Information for a longerreview, a list of services and facilities, theaverage room or meal price as well as thewebsite link.This screen displays either a facility photo(if available) or point of interest icons, suchas:

E143884

Hotel

E142636

Coffeehouse

E142637

Food & Drink

E142638

Nightlife

E142639

Attraction

E142640

This icon appears when yourselection exists in multiplecategories within the system.

When you are viewing more informationfor hotels, cityseekr also tells you if thehotel has certain services and facilitiesusing icons.For restaurants, cityseekr can provideinformation such as star rating, averagecost, review, handicap access, hours ofoperation, and website address.For hotels, cityseekr can provideinformation such as star rating, pricecategory, review, check in/out times, hotelservice icons and website address.

Setting Your NavigationPreferencesSelect settings for the system to take intoaccount when planning your route.

E142607

To access, press:

1. Settings icon.2. Settings.3. Navigation.

Map Preferences

BreadcrumbsDisplay your vehicle’s previously traveledroute with white dots. Turn this feature ONor OFF.

Turn List FormatHave the system display your turn list Topto Bottom or Bottom to Top.

349



Parking POI NotificationSet the automatic parking points ofinterest notification. Turn this feature ONor OFF. When parking points of interestnotification is on, the icons display on themap when you get close to yourdestination. This may not be very useful indense areas, and may clutter the mapwhen other points of interest display.

Route Preferences

Preferred RouteChoose to have the system display theShortest, Fastest or most Ecological route.

Always Use Preferred RouteBypass route selection in destinationprogramming. The system only calculatesone route based on preferred routesettings.

Eco Time PenaltySelect a low, medium or high cost for thecalculated Eco Route. The higher thesetting, the longer the time allotment is forthe route.

AvoidThese features allow you to choose tohave the system avoid freeways, toll roads,ferries and car trains when planning yourroute. Turn these features ON or OFF.

Use HOV LanesHave the system use high-occupancyvehicle lanes, if available, when planningyour route.

Navigation Preferences

Guidance PromptsHave the system use Voice & Tones orTone Only on your programmed route.

Auto - Fill State/ProvinceHave the system automatically fill in thestate and province based on theinformation already entered into thesystem. Turn this feature ON or OFF.

Traffic Preferences

Avoid Traffic ProblemsChoose how you want the system tohandle traffic problems along your route.• Automatic: Have the system reroute

you to avoid traffic incidents thatdevelop and impact the current route.The system does not provide a trafficalert notification.

• Manual: Have the system alwaysprovide a traffic alert notification fortraffic incidents along the plannedroute. You have a choice to accept orignore the notification before makingthe route deviation.

Traffic Alert NotificationHave the system display traffic alertnotifications.Other traffic alert features allows you toturn on certain, or all, traffic icons on themap such as road work, incident, accidentsand closed roads. Scroll down to view allthe different types of alerts. Turn thesefeatures ON or OFF.

Avoid AreasChoose areas which you want the systemto avoid when calculating a route for you.Press Add to program an entry. Once youmake a selection, the system tries to avoidthe area(s) if possible for all routes. Todelete a selection, choose the listing onthe screen. When the screen changes toAvoid Areas Edit, you can press Deleteat the bottom right of the screen.

350



Map ModePress the green bar in the upper right areaof the touchscreen to view map mode. Mapmode shows advanced viewing comprisedof both 2D city maps as well as 3Dlandmarks (when available).2D city maps show detailed outlines ofbuildings, visible land use and landelements and detailed railwayinfrastructure for the most essential citiesaround the globe. These maps also containfeatures, such as town blocks, buildingfootprints, and railways.3D landmarks appear as clear, visibleobjects that are typically recognizable andhave a certain tourist value. The 3Dlandmarks appear in 3D map mode only.Coverage varies, and improves withupdated map releases.

E162051

Change the appearance of the map displayby repeatedly pressing the arrow button inthe upper left corner of the screen. Ittoggles between three different mapmodes: Heading up, North up, and 3D.

E142642

Heading up (2D map) alwaysshows the direction of forwardtravel to be upward on the screen.This view is available for map

scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). Thesystem remembers this setting for largermap scales, but shows the map in Northup only. If the scale returns below this level,the system restores Heading up.

E142643

North up (2D map) always showsthe northern direction to beupward on the screen.

E142644

3D map mode provides anelevated perspective of the map.This viewing angle can be adjustedand the map can be rotated 180

degrees by touching the map twice, andthen dragging your finger along the shadedbar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

View toggles between full map, street listand exit view in route guidance.Menu allows access to navigation settings,view or edit route, SIRIUS Travel Link,guidance mute and cancel route.

E146188

Re-centering the map bypressing this icon whenever youscroll the map away from your

vehicle’s current location.

Auto ZoomPress the green bar to access map mode,then select the + or - zoom button to bringup the zoom level and Auto buttons on thetouchscreen. When you press Auto, AutoZoom turns on and Auto displays in thebottom left corner of the screen in the mapscale. The map zoom level thensynchronizes with vehicle speed. Theslower your vehicle is traveling, the fartherin the map zooms; the faster your vehicleis traveling, the farther the map zooms out.To turn the feature off, just press the + or- button again.In 3D mode, rotate the map view byswiping your finger across the shaded barwith the arrows.

Map Icons

E142646

Vehicle mark shows the currentlocation of your vehicle. It staysin the center of the map display,except when in scroll mode.

351



E142647

Scroll cursor allows you to scrollthe map; the fixed icon is in thecenter of the screen. The mapposition closest to the cursor is in

a window on the top center part of thescreen.

E142648

Address book entry defaulticon(s) indicates the location onthe map of an address book entry.This is the default symbol shown

after the entry has been stored to theAddress Book by any method other thanthe map. You can select from any of the22 icons available. You can use each iconmore than once.

E142649

Home indicates the location onthe map currently stored as thehome position. You can only saveone address from the Address

Book as your Home entry. You cannotchange this icon.

E142650

POI (Point Of Interest) iconsindicate locations of any point ofinterest categories you choose todisplay on the map. You can

choose to display three point of interestcategories on the map at one time.

E142651

Starting point indicates thestarting point of a planned route.

E142652

Waypoint indicates the locationof a waypoint on the map. Thenumber inside the circle is differentfor each waypoint and represents

the position of the waypoint in the routelist.

E142653

Destination symbol indicates theending point of a planned route.

E142654

Next maneuver point indicatesthe location of the next turn on theplanned route.

E142655

No GPS symbol indicates thatinsufficient GPS satellite signalsare available for accurate mappositioning. This icon may display

under normal operation in an area withpoor GPS access.

Quick-touch ButtonsWhen in map mode, touch anywhere onthe map display to access the followingoptions:

Set as DestTouch this button to select a scrolledlocation on the map as your destination.You may scroll the map by pressing yourindex finger on the map display. When youreach the desired location, simply let goand then touch Set as Dest.

Set as WaypointTouch this button to set the currentlocation as a waypoint.

Save to FavoritesTouch this button to save the currentlocation to your favorites.

POI IconsTouch this button to select icons to displayon the map. You can select up to threeicons to display on the map at the sametime. Turn these ON or OFF.

Cancel RouteTouch this button to cancel the activeroute.

View/Edit RouteAccess these features when a route isactive:• View Route• Edit Destination/Waypoints

352



• Edit Turn List• Detour• Edit Route Preferences• Edit Traffic Preferences• Cancel Route.Navteq is the digital map provider for thenavigation application. If you find map dataerrors, you may report them directly toNavteq by going tohttp://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteqevaluates all reported map errors andresponds with the result of theirinvestigation by e-mail.

Navigation Map UpdatesAnnual navigation map updates areavailable for purchase through yourdealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (inMexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or goingto www.navigation.com/ford. You need tospecify the make and model of your vehicleto determine if there is an update available.

Navigation Voice Commands

E142599

When in navigation mode, pressthe voice button on the steeringwheel controls. After the tone,

say any of the following commands:

Navigation System Voice Commands

"Navigation"3"Cancel next waypoint" 1

"Repeat instruction"1"Cancel route"1

"Show 3D""Destination"2

"Show heading up""Destination <nametag>"

"Show map""Destination <POI category>"

"Show north up""Destination favorites"

"Show route"1"Destination home"

"Show turn list"1"Destination intersection"

"Voice off""Destination nearest <POI category>"

"Voice on""Destination nearest POI"

"Voice volume decrease""Destination play nametags"

"Voice volume increase""Destination POI"

"Where am I?""Destination POI category"

"Zoom in""Destination previous destination"

353



Navigation System Voice Commands

"Zoom out""Destination street address"

"Help""Detour"1

1 These commands are only available when a navigation route is active.2 If you say "Destination", you can then say any command in the following "Destination"chart.3 If you say "Navigation", you can then say any command in the following "Navigation"chart.

"DESTINATION"

"<nametag>"

"<POI category>"

"Favorites"

"Home"

"Intersection"

"Nearest <POI category>"

"Nearest POI"

"Play nametags"

"POI category"

"Previous destination"

"Street address"

"Help"

"NAVIGATION"

"Destination"*

"Zoom city"

"Zoom country"

"Zoom minimum"

354



"NAVIGATION"

"Zoom maximum"

"Zoom province"

"Zoom state"

"Zoom street"

"Zoom to <distance>"

"Help"* If you say "Destination", you can then say any command in the "Destination" chart.

One-shot Destination Street AddressIf your vehicle is equipped with the SD cardnavigation feature, you have the ability toenter in a street address using a featurecalled one-shot street address. When yousay either "Navigation destination streetaddress" or "Destination street address",the system asks you to say the full address.The system displays an exampleon-screen. You can then speak the addressnaturally, such as "One two three four MainStreet, Anytown".

355



END USER LICENSEAGREEMENTSYNC® End User LicenseAgreement (EULA)• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")

that includes software licensed by FordMotor Company and its affiliates("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from anaffiliate of Microsoft Corporation("MS") . Those installed softwareproducts of MS origin, as well asassociated media, printed materials,and "online" or electronicdocumentation ("MS SOFTWARE")are protected by internationalintellectual property laws and treaties.The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, notsold. All rights reserved.

• The MS SOFTWARE may interface withand/or communicate with, or may belater upgraded to interface with and/orcommunicate with additional softwareand/or systems provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY. The additionalsoftware and systems of FORDMOTOR COMPANY origin, as well asassociated media, printed materials,and "online" or electronicdocumentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")are protected by internationalintellectual property laws and treaties.The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, notsold. All rights reserved.

• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORDSOFTWARE may interface with and/orcommunicate with, or may be laterupgraded to interface with and/orcommunicate with additional softwareand/or systems provided by third partysoftware and service suppliers. Theadditional software and services ofthird party origin, as well as associatedmedia, printed materials, and "online"or electronic documentation ("THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE") are protected byinternational intellectual property lawsand treaties. The THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. Allrights reserved.

• The MS SOFTWARE, FORDSOFTWARE and THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE hereinafter collectivelyand individually will be referred to as"SOFTWARE".

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPYTHE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THESOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILLCONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TOTHIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANYPREVIOUS CONSENT).GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: ThisEULA grants you the following license:• You may use the SOFTWARE as

installed on the DEVICE and asotherwise interfacing with systemsand/or services provide by or throughFORD MOTOR COMPANY or its thirdparty software and service providers.

356


Appendices

Description of Other Rights andLimitations• Speech Recognition: If the

SOFTWARE includes speechrecognition component(s), you shouldunderstand that speech recognition isan inherently statistical process andthat recognition errors are inherent inthe process. Neither FORD MOTORCOMPANY nor its suppliers shall beliable for any damages arising out oferrors in the speech recognitionprocess.

• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,Decompilation and Disassembly:You may not reverse engineer,decompile, or disassemble nor permitothers to reverse engineer, decompileor disassemble the SOFTWARE, exceptand only to the extent that such activityis expressly permitted by applicablelaw notwithstanding this limitation.

• Limitations on Distributing,Copying, Modifying and CreatingDerivative Works: You may notdistribute, copy, make modificationsto or create derivative works based onthe SOFTWARE, except and only to theextent that such activity is expresslypermitted by applicable lawnotwithstanding this limitation.

• Single EULA: The end userdocumentation for the DEVICE andrelated systems and services maycontain multiple EULAs, such asmultiple translations and/or multiplemedia versions (e.g., in the userdocumentation and in the software).Even if you receive multiple EULAs, youare licensed to use only one (1) copy ofthe SOFTWARE.

• SOFTWARE Transfer: You maypermanently transfer your rights underthis EULA only as part of a sale ortransfer of the DEVICE, provided youretain no copies, you transfer all of theSOFTWARE (including all componentparts, the media and printed materials,any upgrades, and, if applicable, theCertificate(s) of Authenticity), and therecipient agrees to the terms of thisEULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,any transfer must include all priorversions of the SOFTWARE.

• Termination: Without prejudice to anyother rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANYor MS may terminate this EULA if youfail to comply with the terms andconditions of this EULA.

• Security Updates/Digital RightsManagement: Content owners usethe WMDRM technology included inyour DEVICE to protect theirintellectual property, includedcopyrighted content. Portions of theSOFTWARE on your DEVICE useWMDRM software to accessWMDRM-protected content. If theWMDRM software fails to protect thecontent, content owners may askMicrosoft to revoke the SOFTWARE'sability to use WMDRM to play or copyprotected content. This action doesnot affect unprotected content. Whenyour DEVICE downloads licenses forprotected content, you agree thatMicrosoft may include a revocation listwith the licenses. Content owners mayrequire you to upgrade the SOFTWAREon your DEVICE to access their content.If you decline an upgrade, you will notbe able to access content that requiresthe upgrade.

357


Appendices

• Consent to Use of Data: You agreethat MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and systems suppliers, theiraffiliates and/or their designated agentmay collect and use technicalinformation gathered in any manner aspart of product support services relatedto the SOFTWARE or related services.MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and services suppliers, theiraffiliates and/or their designated agentmay use this information solely toimprove their products or to providecustomized services or technologies toyou. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and systems suppliers, theiraffiliates and/or their designated agentmay disclose this information to others,but not in a form that personallyidentifies you.

• Internet-Based ServicesComponents: The SOFTWARE maycontain components that enable andfacilitate the use of certainInternet-based services. Youacknowledge and agree that MS,Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTORCOMPANY, third party software andservice suppliers, their affiliates and/ortheir designated agent mayautomatically check the version of theSOFTWARE and/or its componentsthat you are utilizing and may provideupgrades or supplements to theSOFTWARE that may be automaticallydownloaded to your DEVICE.

• Additional Software/Services: TheSOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTORCOMPANY, third party software andservice suppliers, MS, MicrosoftCorporation, their affiliates and/or theirdesignated agent to provide or makeavailable to you SOFTWARE updates,

supplements, add-on components, orInternet-based services componentsof the SOFTWARE after the date youobtain your initial copy of theSOFTWARE ("SupplementalComponents").

If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third partysoftware and services suppliers provide ormake available to you SupplementalComponents and no other EULA terms areprovided along with the SupplementalComponents, then the terms of this EULAshall apply.If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliatesand/or their designated agent makeavailable Supplemental Components, andno other EULA terms are provided, thenthe terms of this EULA shall apply, exceptthat the MS, Microsoft Corporation oraffiliate entity providing the SupplementalComponent(s) shall be the licensor of theSupplemental Component(s).FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, MicrosoftCorporation, their affiliates and/or theirdesignated agent reserve the right todiscontinue without liability anyInternet-based services provided to you ormade available to you through the use ofthe SOFTWARE.

358


Appendices

• Links to Third Party Sites: The MSSOFTWARE may provide you with theability to link to third party sites throughthe use of the SOFTWARE. The thirdparty sites are not under the control ofMS, Microsoft Corporation, theiraffiliates and/or their designatedagent. Neither MS nor MicrosoftCorporation nor their affiliates nor theirdesignated agent are responsible for(i) the contents of any third party sites,any links contained in third party sites,or any changes or updates to thirdparty sites, or (ii) webcasting or anyother form of transmission receivedfrom any third party sites. If theSOFTWARE provides links to thirdparty sites, those links are provided toyou only as a convenience, and theinclusion of any link does not imply anendorsement of the third party site byMS, Microsoft Corporation, theiraffiliates and/or their designatedagent.

• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:You recognize your obligation to driveresponsibly and keep attention on theroad. You will read and abide with theDEVICE operating instructionsparticularly as they pertain to safetyand assumes any risk associated withthe use of the DEVICE.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY separate from theDEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CDROM disk(s) or via web download or othermeans, and is labeled "For UpgradePurposes Only" or "For Recovery PurposesOnly" you may install one (1) copy of suchSOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as areplacement copy for the existingSOFTWARE, and use it in accordance withthis EULA, including any additional EULAterms accompanying the upgradeSOFTWARE.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:All title and intellectual property rights inand to the SOFTWARE (including but notlimited to any images, photographs,animations, video, audio, music, text and"applets" incorporated into theSOFTWARE), the accompanying printedmaterials, and any copies of theSOFTWARE, are owned by MS, MicrosoftCorporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ortheir affiliates or suppliers. TheSOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You maynot copy the printed materialsaccompanying the SOFTWARE. All titleand intellectual property rights in and tothe content which may be accessedthrough use of the SOFTWARE is theproperty of the respective content ownerand may be protected by applicablecopyright or other intellectual propertylaws and treaties. This EULA grants you norights to use such content. All rights notspecifically granted under this EULA arereserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and service providers, theiraffiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-lineservices which may be accessed throughthe SOFTWARE may be governed by therespective terms of use relating to suchservices. If this SOFTWARE containsdocumentation that is provided only inelectronic form, you may print one copy ofsuch electronic documentation.EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: Youacknowledge that the SOFTWARE issubject to U.S. and European Union exportjurisdiction. You agree to comply with allapplicable international and national lawsthat apply to the SOFTWARE, includingthe U.S. Export Administration Regulations,as well as end-user, end-use anddestination restrictions issued by U.S. andother governments. For additionalinformation, seehttp://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

359


Appendices

TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grantyou any rights in connection with anytrademarks or service marks of FORDMOTOR COMPANY, MS, MicrosoftCorporation, third party software or serviceproviders, their affiliates or suppliers.PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product supportfor the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,its parent corporation MicrosoftCorporation, or their affiliates orsubsidiaries. For product support, pleaserefer to FORD MOTOR COMPANYinstructions provided in the documentationfor the DEVICE. Should you have anyquestions concerning this EULA, or if youdesire to contact FORD MOTORCOMPANY for any other reason, pleaserefer to the address provided in thedocumentation for the DEVICE.No Liability for Certain Damages:EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION ANDTHEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NOLIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES ARISING FROM OR INCONNECTION WITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THISLIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANYREMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIALPURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/ORTHEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANYAMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWOHUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER

THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLYBE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEWVEHICLE.

AdobeContains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or[AIR®] technology by Adobe SystemsIncorporated. This [Licensee Product]contains [Adobe® Flash® Player][Adobe® AIR®] software under licensefrom Adobe Systems Incorporated,Copyright ©1995-2009 AdobeMacromedia Software LLC. All rightsreserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR aretrademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated.

End User Notice

Microsoft® Windows® Mobile forAutomotive Important SafetyInformationThis system Ford SYNC™ containssoftware that is licensed to ManufacturerFORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliateof Microsoft Corporation pursuant to alicense agreement. Any removal,reproduction, reverse engineering or otherunauthorized use of the software from thissystem in violation of the licenseagreement is strictly prohibited and maysubject you to legal action.Read and follow instructions: Beforeusing your Windows Automotive- basedsystem, read and follow all instructionsand safety information provided in this enduser manual ("User's Guide"). Notfollowing precautions found in this User'sGuide can lead to an accident or otherserious consequences.Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When keptin the vehicle, the User's Guide will be aready reference for you and other usersunfamiliar with the WindowsAutomotive-based system. Please makecertain that before using the system forthe first time, all persons have access tothe User's Guide and read its instructionsand safety information carefully.

360


Appendices

WARNINGOperating certain parts of thissystem while driving can distractyour attention away from the road,

and possibly cause an accident or otherserious consequences. Do not changesystem settings or enter data non-verbally(using your hands) while driving. Stop thevehicle in a safe and legal manner beforeattempting these operations. This isimportant since while setting up orchanging some functions you might berequired to distract your attention awayfrom the road and remove your hands fromthe wheel.

General OperationVoice Command Control: Functionswithin the Windows Automotive-basedsystem may be accomplished using onlyvoice commands. Using voice commandswhile driving allows you to operate thesystem without removing your hands fromthe wheel.Prolonged Views of Screen: Do notaccess any function requiring a prolongedview of the screen while you are driving.Pull over in a safe and legal manner beforeattempting to access a function of thesystem requiring prolonged attention. Evenoccasional short scans to the screen maybe hazardous if your attention has beendiverted away from your driving task at acritical time.Volume Setting: Do not raise the volumeexcessively. Keep the volume at a levelwhere you can still hear outside traffic andemergency signals while driving. Drivingwhile unable to hear these sounds couldcause an accident.

Use of Speech Recognition Functions:Speech recognition software is inherentlya statistical process which is subject toerrors. It is your responsibility to monitorany speech recognition functions includedin the system and address any errors.Navigation Features: Any navigationfeatures included in the system areintended to provide turn by turninstructions to get you to a desireddestination. Please make certain allpersons using this system carefully readand follow instructions and safetyinformation fully.Distraction Hazard: Any navigationfeatures may require manual (non-verbal)setup. Attempting to perform such set-upor insert data while driving can seriouslydistract your attention and could cause anaccident or other serious consequences.Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal mannerbefore attempting these operations.Let Your Judgment Prevail: Anynavigation features are provided only asan aid. Make your driving decisions basedon your observations of local conditionsand existing traffic regulations. Any suchfeature is not a substitute for your personaljudgment. Any route suggestions made bythis system should never replace any localtraffic regulations or your personaljudgment or knowledge of safe drivingpractices.Route Safety: Do not follow the routesuggestions if doing so would result in anunsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would beplaced in an unsafe situation, or if youwould be directed into an area that youconsider unsafe. The driver is ultimatelyresponsible for the safe operation of thevehicle and therefore, must evaluatewhether it is safe to follow the suggesteddirections.

361


Appendices

Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps usedby this system may be inaccurate becauseof changes in roads, traffic controls ordriving conditions. Always use goodjudgment and common sense whenfollowing the suggested routes.Emergency Services: Do not rely on anynavigation features included in the systemto route you to emergency services. Asklocal authorities or an emergency servicesoperator for these locations. Not allemergency services such as police, firestations, hospitals and clinics are likely tobe contained in the map database for suchnavigation features.

TeleNav Software End User LicenseAgreementPlease read these terms and conditionscarefully before you use the TeleNavSoftware. Your use of the TeleNavSoftware indicates that you accept theseterms and conditions. If you do not acceptthese terms and conditions, do not breakthe seal of the package, launch, orotherwise use the TeleNav Software.TeleNav may revise this Agreement andthe privacy policy at any time, with orwithout notice to you. You agree to visithttp://www.telenav.com from time to timeto review the then current version of thisAgreement and of the privacy policy.

1. Safe and Lawful UseYou acknowledge that devoting attentionto the TeleNav Software may pose a riskof injury or death to you and others insituations that otherwise require yourundivided attention, and you thereforeagree to comply with the following whenusing the TeleNav Software: (a) observeall traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;(b) use your own personal judgment whiledriving. If you feel that a route suggestedby the TeleNav Software instructs you toperform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,

places you in an unsafe situation, or directsyou into an area that you consider to beunsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)do not input destinations, or otherwisemanipulate the TeleNav Software, unlessyour vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)do not use the TeleNav Software for anyillegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in anymanner inconsistent with this Agreement;(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devicesand cables necessary for use of theTeleNav Software in a secure manner inyour vehicle so that they will not interferewith your driving and will not prevent theoperation of any safety device (such as anairbag).You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNavharmless against all claims resulting fromany dangerous or otherwise inappropriateuse of the TeleNav Software in any movingvehicle, including as a result of your failureto comply with the directions above.

2. Account InformationYou agree: (a) when registering theTeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav withtrue, accurate, current, and completeinformation about yourself, and (b) toinform TeleNav promptly of any changesto such information, and to keep it true,accurate, current and complete.

3. Software LicenseSubject to your compliance with the termsof this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grantsto you a personal, non-exclusive,non-transferable license (except asexpressly permitted below in connectionwith your permanent transfer of theTeleNav Software license), without theright to sublicense, to use the TeleNavSoftware (in object code form only) inorder to access and use the TeleNavSoftware. This license shall terminate upon

362


Appendices

any termination or expiration of thisAgreement. You agree that you will use theTeleNav Software only for your personalbusiness or leisure purposes, and not toprovide commercial navigation services toother parties.

3.1 License LimitationsYou agree not to do any of the following:(a) reverse engineer, decompile,disassemble, translate, modify, alter orotherwise change the TeleNav Softwareor any part thereof; (b) attempt to derivethe source code, audio library or structureof the TeleNav Software without the priorexpress written consent of TeleNav; (c)remove from the TeleNav Software, oralter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers'trademarks, trade names, logos, patent orcopyright notices, or other notices ormarkings; (d) distribute, sublicense orotherwise transfer the TeleNav Softwareto others, except as part of your permanenttransfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e)use the TeleNav Software in any mannerthat (i) infringes the intellectual propertyor proprietary rights, rights of publicity orprivacy or other rights of any party, (ii)violates any law, statute, ordinance orregulation, including but not limited to lawsand regulations related to spamming,privacy, consumer and child protection,obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, orotherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rentout, or otherwise permit unauthorizedaccess by third parties to the TeleNavSoftware without advanced writtenpermission of TeleNav.

4. DisclaimersTo the fullest extent permissible pursuantto applicable law, in no event will TeleNav,its licensors and suppliers, or agents oremployees of any of the foregoing, beliable for any decision made or actiontaken by you or anyone else in reliance onthe information provided by the TeleNavSoftware. TeleNav also does not warrantthe accuracy of the map or other data usedfor the TeleNav Software. Such data maynot always reflect reality due to, amongother things, road closures, construction,weather, new roads and other changingconditions. You are responsible for theentire risk arising out of your use of theTeleNav Software. For example butwithout limitation, you agree not to rely onthe TeleNav Software for criticalnavigation in areas where the well-beingor survival of you or others is dependenton the accuracy of navigation, as the mapsor functionality of the TeleNav Softwareare not intended to support such high riskapplications, especially in more remotegeographical areas.TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANDEXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES INCONNECTION WITH THE TELENAVSOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALLWARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROMCOURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ORTRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTYRIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAVSOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do notpermit the disclaimer of certain warranties,so this limitation may not apply to you.

363


Appendices

5. Limitation of LiabilityTO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDERAPPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NOCIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV ORITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BELIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTYFOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OREXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING INEACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USETHE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESSINTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISINGOUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TOUSE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IFTELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGESTHAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANYREASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGESREFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECTOR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OROTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OFTELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'SSUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THEAMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FORTHE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOMESTATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOTALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONOF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONSOR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TOYOU.

6. Arbitration and Governing LawYou agree that any dispute, claim orcontroversy arising out of or relating to thisAgreement or the TeleNav Software shallbe settled by independent arbitrationinvolving a neutral arbitrator andadministered by the American ArbitrationAssociation in the County of Santa Clara,California. The arbitrator shall apply the

Commercial Arbitration Rules of theAmerican Arbitration Association, and thejudgment upon the award rendered by thearbitrator may be entered by any courthaving jurisdiction. Note that there is nojudge or jury in an arbitration proceedingand the decision of the arbitrator shall bebinding upon both parties. You expresslyagree to waive your right to a jury trial.This Agreement and performancehereunder will be governed by andconstrued in accordance with the laws ofthe State of California, without givingeffect to its conflict of laws provisions. Tothe extent judicial action is necessary inconnection with the binding arbitration,both TeleNav and you agree to submit tothe exclusive jurisdiction of the courts ofthe County of Santa Clara, California. TheUnited Nations Convention on Contractsfor the International Sale of Goods shallnot apply.

7. AssignmentYou may not resell, assign, or transfer thisAgreement or any of your rights orobligations, except in totality, in connectionwith your permanent transfer of theTeleNav Software, and expresslyconditioned upon the new user of theTeleNav Software agreeing to be boundby the terms and conditions of thisAgreement. Any such sale, assignment ortransfer that is not expressly permittedunder this paragraph will result inimmediate termination of this Agreement,without liability to TeleNav, in which caseyou and all other parties shall immediatelycease all use of the TeleNav Software.Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNavmay assign this Agreement to any otherparty at any time without notice, providedthe assignee remains bound by thisAgreement.

364


Appendices

8. Miscellaneous

8.1This Agreement constitutes the entireagreement between TeleNav and you withrespect to the subject matter hereof.

8.2Except for the limited licenses expresslygranted in this Agreement, TeleNav retainsall right, title and interest in and to theTeleNav Software, including withoutlimitation all related intellectual propertyrights. No licenses or other rights which arenot expressly granted in this Agreementare intended to, or shall be, granted orconferred by implication, statute,inducement, estoppel or otherwise, andTeleNav and its suppliers and licensorshereby reserve all of their respective rightsother than the licenses explicitly grantedin this Agreement

8.3By using the TeleNav Software, youconsent to receive from TeleNav allcommunications, including notices,agreements, legally required disclosuresor other information in connection with theTeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")electronically. TeleNav may provide suchNotices by posting them on TeleNav'sWebsite or by downloading such Noticesto your wireless device. If you desire towithdraw your consent to receive Noticeselectronically, you must discontinue youruse of the TeleNav Software.

8.4TeleNav's or your failure to requireperformance of any provision shall notaffect that party's right to requireperformance at any time thereafter, norshall a waiver of any breach or default ofthis Agreement constitute a waiver of anysubsequent breach or default or a waiverof the provision itself.

8.5If any provision herein is heldunenforceable, then such provision will bemodified to reflect the intention of theparties, and the remaining provisions ofthis Agreement will remain in full force andeffect

8.6The headings in this Agreement are forconvenience of reference only, will not bedeemed to be a part of this Agreement,and will not be referred to in connectionwith the construction or interpretation ofthis Agreement. As used in this Agreement,the words "include" and "including" andvariations thereof, will not be deemed tobe terms of limitation, but rather will bedeemed to be followed by the words"without limitation".

9. Other Vendors Terms and ConditionsThe TeleNav Software utilizes map andother data licensed to TeleNav by thirdparty vendors for the benefit of you andother end users. This Agreement includesend-user terms applicable to thesecompanies (included at the end of thisAgreement), and thus your use of theTeleNav Software is also subject to suchterms. You agree to comply with thefollowing additional terms and conditions,which are applicable to TeleNav's thirdparty vendor licensors:

NavTeq End User License AgreementEND USER TERMSThe content provided ("Data") is licensed,not sold. By opening this package, orinstalling, copying, or otherwise using theData, you agree to be bound by the termsof this agreement. If you do not agree tothe terms of this agreement, you are notpermitted to install, copy, use, resell ortransfer the Data. If you wish to reject theterms of this agreement, and have not

365


Appendices

installed, copied, or used the Data, youmust contact your retailer or NAVTEQNorth America, LLC ("NT") within thirty(30) days of purchase for a refund of yourpurchase price. To contact NT, please visitwww.navteq.com.The Data is provided for your personal,internal use only and may not be resold. Itis protected by copyright, and is subject tothe following terms (this "End User LicenseAgreement") and conditions which areagreed to by you, on the one hand, andNAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT") andits licensors (including their licensors andsuppliers) on the other hand.The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permission fromCanadian authorities, including: © HerMajesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada PostCorporation, GeoBase®.NT holds a nonexclusive license from theUnited States Postal Service ® to publishand sell ZIP+4 ® information.© United States Postal Service ® 2009.Prices are not established, controlled orapproved by the United States PostalService ® The following trademarks andregistrations are owned by the USPS:United States Postal Service, USPS, andZIP+4.The Data for Mexico includes certain Datafrom Instituto Nacional de Estadística yGeografía.TERMS AND CONDITIONSLicense Limitations on Use: You agreethat your license to use this Data is limitedto and conditioned on use for solelypersonal, noncommercial purposes, andnot for service bureau, timesharing or othersimilar purposes. Except as otherwise setforth herein, you agree not to otherwise

reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,disassemble or reverse engineer anyportion of this Data, and may not transferor distribute it in any form, for any purpose,except to the extent permitted bymandatory laws.License Limitations on Transfer: Yourlimited license does not allow transfer orresale of the Data, except on the conditionthat you may transfer the Data and allaccompanying materials on a permanentbasis if: (a) you retain no copies of theData; (b) the recipient agrees to the termsof this End User License Agreement; and(c) you transfer the Data in the exact sameform as you purchased it by physicallytransferring the original media (e.g., theCD-ROM or DVD you purchased), alloriginal packaging, all Manuals and otherdocumentation. Specifically, Multi-discsets may only be transferred or sold as acomplete set as provided to you and notas a subset thereof.Additional License Limitations: Exceptwhere you have been specifically licensedto do so by NT in a separate writtenagreement, and without limiting thepreceding paragraph, your license isconditioned on use of the Data asprescribed in this agreement, and you maynot (a) use this Data with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)with, or in communication with, includingwithout limitation, cellular phones,palmtop and handheld computers, pagers,and personal digital assistants or PDAs.

366


Appendices

WARNINGThis Data may contain inaccurate orincomplete information due to thepassage of time, changing

circumstances, sources used and thenature of collecting comprehensivegeographic Data, any of which may leadto incorrect results.

No Warranty: This Data is provided to you"as is" , and you agree to use it at your ownrisk. NT and its licensors (and theirlicensors and suppliers) make noguarantees, representations or warrantiesof any kind, express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but not limitedto, content, quality, accuracy,completeness, effectiveness, reliability,fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,use or results to be obtained from thisData, or that the Data or server will beuninterrupted or error free.Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITSLICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIMANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,Territories and Countries do not allowcertain warranty exclusions, so to thatextent the above exclusion may not applyto you.Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITSLICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOTBE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THECAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANYLOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS

OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TOUSE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THISDATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMSOR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN ANACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT ORBASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NT ORITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.Some States, Territories and Countries donot allow certain liability exclusions ordamages limitations, so to that extent theabove may not apply to you.Export Control: You agree not to exportfrom anywhere any part of the Data or anydirect product thereof except incompliance with, and with all licenses andapprovals required under, applicableexport laws, rules and regulations,including but not limited to the laws, rulesand regulations administered by the Officeof Foreign Assets Control of the U.S.Department of Commerce and the Bureauof Industry and Security of the U.S.Department of Commerce. To the extentthat any such export laws, rules orregulations prohibit NT from complyingwith any of its obligations hereunder todeliver or distribute Data, such failure shallbe excused and shall not constitute abreach of this Agreement.Entire Agreement: These terms andconditions constitute the entire agreementbetween NT (and its licensors, includingtheir licensors and suppliers) and youpertaining to the subject matter hereof,and supersedes in their entirety any andall written or oral agreements previouslyexisting between us with respect to suchsubject matter.

367


Appendices

Severability: You and NT agree that if anyportion of this agreement is found illegalor unenforceable, that portion shall besevered and the remainder of theAgreement shall be given full force andeffect.Governing Law: The above terms andconditions shall be governed by the lawsof the State of Illinois, without giving effectto (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)the United Nations Convention forContracts for the International Sale ofGoods, which is explicitly excluded. Youagree to submit to the personal jurisdictionof the State of Illinois for any and alldisputes, claims and actions arising fromor in connection with the Data provided toyou hereunder.Government End Users: If the Data isbeing acquired by or on behalf of theUnited States government or any otherentity seeking or applying rights similar tothose customarily claimed by the UnitedStates government, this Data is a"commercial term" as that term is definedat 48 C.F.R. ("FAR") 2.101, is licensed inaccordance with this End User LicenseAgreement, and each copy of Datadelivered or otherwise furnished shall bemarked and embedded as appropriatewith the following "Notice of Use", and betreated in accordance with such Notice:NOTICE OF USECONTRACTOR(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)NAME:NAVTEQCONTRACTOR(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)ADDRESS:425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL60606.

This Data is a commercial item as definedin FAR 2.101and is subject to the End User LicenseAgreement underwhich this Data was provided.© 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.If the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialrefuses to use the legend provided herein,the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialmust notify NAVTEQ prior to seekingadditional or alternative rights in the Data.Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire, ©2013 JiWire.

Gracenote® CopyrightCD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product andservice may practice one or more of thefollowing U.S. Patents #5,987,525,#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,#6,330,593 and other patents issued orpending. Some services supplied underlicense from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.Patent: #6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registeredtrademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the "Powered byGracenote™" logo are trademarks ofGracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement(EULA)This device contains software fromGracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell StreetEmeryville, California 94608("Gracenote").

368


Appendices

The software from Gracenote (the"Gracenote Software") enables this deviceto do disc and music file identification andobtain music-related information, includingname, artist, track, and title information("Gracenote Data") from online servers("Gracenote Servers"), and to performother functions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intended EndUser functions of this device.This device may contain content belongingto Gracenote's providers. If so, all of therestrictions set forth herein with respect toGracenote Data shall also apply to suchcontent and such content providers shallbe entitled to all of the benefits andprotections set forth herein that areavailable to Gracenote.You agree that you will use the contentfrom Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,and Gracenote Servers for your ownpersonal, non-commercial use only. Youagree not to assign, copy, transfer ortransmit the Gracenote Content,Gracenote Software or any GracenoteData (except in a Tag associated with amusic file) to any third party. YOU AGREENOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTECONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT ASEXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive licensesto use the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers will terminate if youviolate these restrictions. If your licensesterminate, you agree to cease any and alluse of the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers. Gracenote,respectively, reserve all rights in GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, and theGracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,including all ownership rights. Under nocircumstances will either Gracenote

become liable for any payment to you forany information that you provide, includingany copyrighted material or music fileinformation. You agree that Gracenotemay enforce its respective rights,collectively or separately, under thisagreement against you, directly in eachcompany's own name.Gracenote uses a unique identifier to trackqueries for statistical purposes. Thepurpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow Gracenote to countqueries without knowing anything aboutwho you are. For more information, see theweb page at www.gracenote.com for theGracenote Privacy Policy.THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEMOF GRACENOTE DATA AND THEGRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSEDTO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTEMAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS ORWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANYGRACENOTE DATA FROM THEGRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTECONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELYAND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHTTO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENTFROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVESERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OFGRACENOTE, CHANGE DATACATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THATGRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NOWARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHERGRACENOTE CONTENT OR THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREEOR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOTOBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANYENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPESTHAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TOPROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREETO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICESAT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL

369


Appendices

WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHERGRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTSTHAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USEOF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANYGRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITSOR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASONWHATSOEVER.© Gracenote 2007.FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2IC: 1422A-SYNCG2This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressively approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate theequipment. The term "IC" before the radiocertification number only signifies thatIndustry Canada technical specificationswere met.

The antenna used for this transmitter mustnot be co-located or operating inconjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

370


Appendices

General Maintenance InformationWhy Maintain Your Vehicle?Carefully following the maintenanceschedule helps protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance and may alsohelp to increase the value of your vehiclewhen you sell or trade it. Keep all receiptsfor completed maintenance with yourvehicle.Regular maintenance intervals for yourvehicle have been established based uponrigorous testing. It is important that youhave your vehicle serviced at the propertimes. These intervals serve two purposes;one is to maintain the reliability of yourvehicle and the second is to keep your costof owning your vehicle down.It is your responsibility to see that allscheduled maintenance is performed andthat the materials used meet thespecifications identified in this owner'smanual. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 235).Failure to perform scheduled maintenanceinvalidates warranty coverage on partsaffected by the lack of maintenance.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at YourDealership?

Factory-Trained TechniciansService technicians participate in extensivefactory-sponsored certification training tohelp them become experts on theoperation of your vehicle. Ask yourdealership about the training andcertification their technicians havereceived.

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®Replacement PartsDealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft andFord-authorized branded re-manufacturedreplacement parts. These parts meet orexceed our specifications. Parts installedat your dealership carry a nationwide 12month or 12000 mile (20000 kilometer)parts and labor limited warranty.If you do not use Ford authorized parts theymay not meet our specifications anddepending on the part it could affectemissions compliance.

ConvenienceMany dealerships have extended eveningand Saturday hours to make your servicevisit more convenient and they offer onestop shopping. They can perform anyservices that are required on your vehicle,from general maintenance to collisionrepairs.Note: Not all dealers have extended hoursor body shops. Please contact your dealerfor details.

Protecting Your InvestmentMaintenance is an investment that paysdividends in the form of improvedreliability, durability and resale value. Tomaintain the proper performance of yourvehicle and its emission control systems,it is imperative that scheduledmaintenance be completed at thedesignated intervals.Your vehicle is equipped with a messagecenter which displays a message in theinformation display at the proper oilchange service interval. This interval is oneyear or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers)under normal driving conditions.

371


Scheduled Maintenance

When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OILCHANGE REQUIRED appears in theinformation display, it is time for an oilchange. The oil change must be donewithin two weeks or 500 miles (800kilometers) of the message appearing. Theoil minder system must be reset after eachoil change. See Engine Oil Check (page182).If your information display is prematurelyreset or becomes inoperative, you shouldperform the oil change interval at sixmonths or 5000 miles (8000 kilometers)from your last oil change. Never exceedone year or 10000 miles (16000kilometers) between oil change intervals.Your vehicle is very sophisticated and builtwith multiple, complex, performancesystems. Every manufacturer developsthese systems using differentspecifications and performance features.That is why it is important to rely upon yourdealership to properly diagnose and repairyour vehicle.Ford Motor Company has recommendedmaintenance intervals for various partsand component systems based uponengineering testing. Ford Motor Companyrelies upon this testing to determine themost appropriate mileage for replacementof oils and fluids to protect your vehicle atthe lowest overall cost to you andrecommends against maintenanceschedules that deviate from the scheduledmaintenance information.Ford strongly recommends the use of onlygenuine Ford, Motorcraft® orFord-authorized re-manufacturedreplacement parts because they areengineered for your vehicle.

Additives and ChemicalsRecommended additives and chemicalsare listed in this owner's manual and in theFord Workshop Manual. Additionalchemicals or additives not approved byFord Motor Company are notrecommended as part of normalmaintenance. Please consult your warrantyinformation.

Oils, Fluids and FlushingIn many cases, fluid discoloration is anormal operating characteristic and, byitself, does not necessarily indicate aconcern or that the fluid needs to bechanged. However, discolored fluids thatalso show signs of overheating or foreignmaterial contamination should beinspected immediately by a qualifiedexpert, such as the factory-trainedtechnicians at your dealership.Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should bechanged at the specified intervals or inconjunction with a repair. Flushing is aviable way to change fluid for many vehiclesub-systems during scheduledmaintenance. It is critical that systems areflushed only with new fluid that is the sameas that required to fill and operate thesystem or using a Ford-approved flushingchemical.

Owner Checks and ServicesCertain basic maintenance checks andinspections should be performed everymonth or at six month intervals.

Check Every Month• Engine oil level.• Function of all interior and exterior

lights.• Tires (including spare) for wear and

proper pressure.• Windshield washer fluid level.

372



Check Every Six Months• Battery connections. Clean if

necessary.• Body and door drain holes for

obstructions. Clean if necessary.• Cooling system fluid level and coolant

strength.• Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate

if necessary.• Hinges, latches and outside locks for

proper operation. Lubricate ifnecessary.

• Parking brake for proper operation.• Safety belts and seat latches for wear

and function.

• Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS,airbag and safety belt) for operation.

• Washer spray and wiper operation.Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-point InspectionIn order to keep your vehicle running right,it is important to have the systems on yourvehicle checked regularly. This can helpidentify potential issues and prevent majorproblems. We recommend the followingmulti-point inspection be performed atevery scheduled maintenance interval tohelp ensure your vehicle keeps runninggreat.

Multi-point Inspection

Half-shaft dust bootsAccessory drive belt(s)

Horn operationBattery performance

Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hosesClutch operation (if equipped)

Suspension components for leaks ordamage

Engine air filter

Steering and linkageExhaust system

Tires (including spare) for wear and properpressure

Exterior lamps and hazard warning systemoperation

Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFluid levels*; fill if necessary

Washer spray and wiper operationFor oil and fluid leaks* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer

Be sure to ask your dealership serviceadvisor or technician about the multi-pointvehicle inspection. It is a comprehensiveway to perform a thorough inspection ofyour vehicle. It is your checklist that givesyou immediate feedback on the overall

condition of your vehicle. You know whathas been checked, what is okay as well asthose things that may require future orimmediate attention. The multi-pointvehicle inspection is one more way to keepyour vehicle running great.

373



Normal Scheduled MaintenanceYour vehicle is equipped with an oil mindersystem that indicates when the engine oilshould be changed under normal operatingconditions.

This means you do not have to rememberto change the oil on a mileage-basedschedule; the vehicle lets you know whenan oil change is due by displaying ENGINEOIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGEREQUIRED in the information display.

Every 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) or 12 months

Change engine oil and filter.**

Rotate the tires.

Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).

Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.

Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.

Inspect the cabin air filter.

Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.

Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.

Inspect the half-shaft boots.

Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.

Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness ordrag.

* Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.** Reset the oil minder system after each engine oil and filter change. See Engine OilCheck (page 182).

Additional Maintenance Items1

Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000km)

Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000km)

Change engine coolant.2At 100000 miles (160000km)

374



Additional Maintenance Items1

Replace spark plugs.Every 100000 miles(160000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s).3

Change transmission fluid.

Every 150000 miles(240000 km)

Replace accessory drive belt(s).4

Replace timing belt (1.0L, 1.6L engine).

Replace oil pump drive belt.1 Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers)of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for theinterval.2 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every threeyears or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.4 If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).

Maintenance Schedule Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):Signature:

Dealer stamp

375



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

376



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

377



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

378



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

Special Operating ConditionsIf you operate your vehicle primarily in anyof the following conditions, you need toperform additional maintenance asindicated. If you operate your vehicleoccasionally under any of theseconditions, it is not necessary to performthe additional maintenance. For specificrecommendations, see your dealershipservice advisor or technician.

379



Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the informationdisplay and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-uled Maintenance chart.

As required

Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000km)

Change manual transmission fluid.Every 60000 miles (96000km)

Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use(i.e. Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the informationdisplay and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-uled Maintenance chart.

As required

Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).Inspect frequently, serviceas required Replace engine air filter.


Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000km)

Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads

Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).Inspect frequently, serviceas required Replace engine air filter.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormalnoise, wear, looseness or drag.

Every 5000 miles (8000km)

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure treaddepth.

Change engine oil and filter.Every 5000 miles (8000km) or six months Perform multi-point inspection.

380



Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads


Change manual transmission fluid.Every 50000 miles (80000km)

Reset your oil life monitor system after each engine oil and filter change. See Engine OilCheck (page 182).

Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regularunleaded fuel.

Every oil change

Special Operating Condition Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

381



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

382



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

ExceptionsThere are some exceptions your NormalScheduled Maintenance:California fuel filter replacement: If thevehicle is registered in California, theCalifornia Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the failure to perform thismaintenance item will not nullify theemission warranty or limit recall liability

prior to the completion of the vehicle'suseful life. Ford Motor Company, however,urges you to have all recommendedmaintenance services performed at thespecified intervals and to record all vehicleservice.Hot climate oil change intervals:Vehicles operating in the Middle East,North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa orlocations with similar climates using anAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certificationmark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normaloil change interval is 5000 miles (8000kilometers).

383



If the available API SM or SN oils are notavailable, then the oil change serviceinterval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).Engine air filter and cabin air filterreplacement: Engine air filter and cabinair filter life is dependent on exposure todusty and dirty conditions. Vehiclesoperated in these conditions requirefrequent inspection and replacement ofthe engine air filter and cabin air filter.

Engine Coolant Change RecordInitial change: Six years or 100000 miles(160000 kilometers) (whichever comesfirst).After initial change: Every three years or50000 miles (80000 kilometers).

Engine Coolant Change Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

384



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

385



386


AA/C

See: Climate Control...........................................97About This Manual...........................................7

Protecting the Environment................................7ABS

See: Brakes............................................................134ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes.................................................................134

Accessories....................................................239Exterior style........................................................239Interior style.........................................................239Lifestyle.................................................................239Peace of mind.....................................................239

AccessoriesSee: Replacement Parts

Recommendation..............................................9Adjusting the Headlamps.........................188

Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................189Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................188

Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................63Airbag Disposal...............................................42Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control...........................................97Air Vents.............................................................97

Center Air Vents....................................................97Side Air Vent...........................................................97

AlarmSee: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................61

Ambient Lighting.............................................71Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................61

Alarm System.........................................................61Arming the Alarm..................................................61Disarming the Alarm............................................61Triggering the Alarm.............................................61

Appendices....................................................356Audible Warnings and Indicators.............84

Automatic Transmission...................................84Headlamps On......................................................84Key Outside Car....................................................84Low Fuel..................................................................84Safety Belt Minder...............................................84

Audio Control...................................................63.....................................................................................63

Audio System................................................244General Information.........................................244

Audio Troubleshooting..............................258Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/

SYNC.............................................................249Alternative Frequencies...................................253Automatic Volume Control............................252Autostore Control..............................................252News Broadcasts...............................................253Regional Mode....................................................253Sound Button.......................................................251Station Preset Buttons....................................252Station Tuning Control.....................................252Waveband Button..............................................252

Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD...................................................................245Alternative Frequencies..................................248Automatic Volume Control............................248Autostore Control..............................................248News Broadcasts..............................................248Regional Mode....................................................249Sound Button......................................................247Station Preset Buttons....................................248Station Tuning Control.....................................247Waveband Button..............................................247

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony AudioSystem/Touchscreen Display..............255

Audio unit - Vehicles With: TouchscreenDisplay..........................................................254

Autolamps........................................................68Automatic Climate Control........................99

Temperature Control........................................100Automatic Transmission............................128

Emergency Park Position ReleaseLever.....................................................................131

Hints on Driving with an AutomaticTransmission....................................................131

Selector Lever Positions...................................129Sport Mode and Manual Shifting.................130

Automatic Transmission FluidCheck.............................................................185

Auxiliary Input Jack......................................257Auxiliary Power Points..................................111

12 Volt DC Power Point.......................................111Location....................................................................111

BBonnet Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood............177

387


Index

Booster Seats..................................................23Types of Booster Seats......................................23

Brake Fluid Check.........................................185Brakes...............................................................134

General Information..........................................134Breaking-In......................................................157

Brakes and Clutch...............................................157Engine......................................................................157Tires..........................................................................157

Bulb Specification Chart...........................199

CCabin Air Filter...............................................103California Proposition 65.............................12Capacities and Specifications................235Cargo Nets.......................................................153

Installing and Removing the CargoNet.......................................................................153

Car WashSee: Cleaning the Exterior..............................204

Changing a Bulb...........................................190Center High Mounted Stop Lamp................193Front Fog Lamps.................................................192Headlamp.............................................................190Interior Lamp........................................................194License Plate Lamp...........................................194Luggage Compartment Lamp, Footwell

Lamp and Liftgate Lamp............................194Reading Lamps...................................................194Rear Lamps...........................................................192Side Direction Indicator.....................................191

Changing a Fuse............................................175Fuses........................................................................175

Changing a Road Wheel...........................230Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly

Information.....................................................230Stowing the flat tire..........................................233Tire Change Procedure.....................................231

Changing the 12V Battery..........................186Changing the Engine Air Filter..................187Changing the Wiper Blades.....................186

Rear Window Wiper Blade..............................186Windshield Wiper Blades................................186

Checking MyKey System Status..............49MyKey Distance....................................................49Number of Admin Keys......................................50Number of MyKeys..............................................49

Checking the Wiper Blades......................186Child Restraint and Safety Belt

Maintenance.................................................32Child Safety.......................................................14

General Information.............................................14Child Safety Locks..........................................25

Left-Hand Side......................................................25Right-Hand Side...................................................25

Child Seat Positioning...................................21Cigar Lighter......................................................111Cleaning Leather Seats.............................207Cleaning Products.......................................204Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................208Cleaning the Engine...................................205Cleaning the Exterior..................................204

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts.....................205Exterior Chrome.................................................204Stripes or Graphics (if equipped)...............204Underbody...........................................................205

Cleaning the Instrument Panel andInstrument Cluster Lens.........................207

Cleaning the Interior...................................206Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades...........................................................206Clearing All MyKeys.......................................49Climate Control...............................................97

Principle of Operation.........................................97Clock...................................................................88

Type 1........................................................................88Type 2.......................................................................88

Cold Weather Precautions.........................157Coolant Check

See: Engine Coolant Check............................183Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41Creating a MyKey...........................................48

Programming or Changing ConfigurableSettings...............................................................49

Cruise Control.................................................64Principle of Operation.......................................142

Cruise controlSee: Using Cruise Control................................142

Cup Holders.....................................................112Customer Assistance.................................160

388


Index

DData Recording................................................10

Event Data Recording..........................................10Service Data Recording......................................10

Daytime Running Lamps............................69Direction Indicators.......................................69Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35

Children and Airbags...........................................35Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating

Adjustment........................................................35Knee Airbag......................................................39Driving Aids.....................................................144Driving Hints....................................................157Driving Through Water................................157DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................69

EEconomical Driving.......................................157Emission Control System...........................123

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................124Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) Testing....................................................124End User License Agreement.................356

SYNC® End User License Agreement(EULA)..............................................................356

Engine Block Heater.....................................116Using the Engine Block Heater........................117

Engine Coolant Check................................183Adding Engine Coolant....................................184Checking the Engine Coolant.........................183Recycled Engine Coolant.................................185Severe Climates..................................................185

Engine ImmobilizerSee: Passive Anti-Theft System....................60

Engine Oil Check...........................................182Adding Engine Oil...............................................182Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring

System...............................................................183Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.0L

EcoBoost™..................................................182Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V

Ti-VCT (88kW/120PS) - Sigma..........182Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L

EcoBoost™..................................................182

Engine Specifications.................................235Drivebelt Routing...............................................235

Entertainment................................................313AM/FM Radio.......................................................315Bluetooth Audio..................................................331Browsing Device Content.................................313CD............................................................................326SD Card Slot and USB Port............................327SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If

Activated).........................................................321Supported Media Players, Formats and

Metadata Information................................330Event Data Recording

See: Data Recording............................................10Export Unique Options..................................12Exterior Mirrors.................................................74

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors................................75Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors...........................75Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................74

FFastening the Safety Belts..........................27

Restraint of Pregnant Women.........................27Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................29Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................28

Floor Mats.......................................................158Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps........................................69Ford Credit.........................................................12

(U.S. Only)................................................................12Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)........241

SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY).............243SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)..........................241

Front Fog Lamps............................................69Front Passenger Sensing System............36Fuel and Refueling........................................118Fuel Consumption........................................122

Calculating Fuel Economy...............................122Filling the Tank.....................................................122

Fuel Filter.........................................................186Fuel Quality......................................................119

Choosing the Right Fuel (Flexible FuelVehicles)............................................................119

Choosing the Right Fuel (GasolineVehicles)............................................................119

Octane Recommendations.............................119Fuel Shutoff....................................................167

389


Index

Fuses.................................................................169Fuse Specification Chart...........................169

Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................169Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............172

GGauges................................................................77

Compass (If Equipped)......................................77Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............78Fuel Gauge..............................................................78

General Information on RadioFrequencies...................................................43Intelligent Access.................................................43

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. andCanada..........................................................163

Getting the Services You Need...............160Away From Home..............................................160

Global Opening and Closing......................73Global Closing........................................................74Global Opening.....................................................73

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake.............................................134Hazard Warning Flashers...........................167Headlamp Exit Delay....................................69Head Restraints............................................105

Adjusting the Head Restraint........................106Heated Seats.................................................109Heated Windows and Mirrors..................103

Heated Exterior Mirrors....................................103Heated Windows................................................103

HeatingSee: Climate Control...........................................97

Hill Start Assist..............................................132Switching the System On and Off................133Using Hill Start Assist........................................132

Hints on Controlling the InteriorClimate.........................................................100Cooling the Interior Quickly............................102General Hints.......................................................100Heating the Interior Quickly.............................101Maximum Cooling Performance in

Instrument Panel or Instrument Paneland Footwell Positions...............................103

Recommended Settings for Cooling ..........102Recommended Settings for Heating...........101Side Window Defogging in Cold

Weather.............................................................103Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods

During Extreme High AmbientTemperatures..................................................102

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes............................................................134

Hood LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood............177

IIgnition Switch................................................113In California (U.S. Only)..............................161Information Displays.....................................85

General Information............................................85Information.....................................................337

911 Assist...............................................................343Alerts......................................................................343Calendar................................................................343SIRIUS Travel Link..............................................341SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States

Only)..................................................................338Vehicle Health Report......................................345

Information Messages.................................89Installing Child Seats.....................................15

Child Seats...............................................................15Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................16Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH).............................................18Using Tether Straps.............................................20

Instrument Cluster.........................................77Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................68Interior Lamps.................................................70

Front Interior Lamps...........................................70Rear Interior Lamps.............................................70

Interior Luggage CompartmentRelease...........................................................58

390


Index

Interior Mirror....................................................75Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................76

Introduction.........................................................7

JJump-Starting the Vehicle.........................167

To Connect the Booster Cables....................168To Start the Engine............................................168

KKeyless Entry...................................................56

Disabled Keys.........................................................57General Information............................................56Locking and Unlocking the Doors With the

Key Blade...........................................................58Locking Your Vehicle...........................................56Passive Key.............................................................56Unlocking Your Vehicle.......................................57

Keyless Starting..............................................113Failure to Start......................................................114Ignition On..............................................................114Starting with Automatic

Transmission....................................................114Starting with Manual Transmission..............114Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Moving.................................................................115Stopping the Engine with Your Vehicle

Stationary..........................................................115Keys and Remote Controls.........................43

LLighting Control...............................................67

Headlamp Flasher...............................................68High Beams............................................................68Lighting Control Positions.................................67Parking Lamps.......................................................67

Lighting...............................................................67General Information............................................67

Load Carrying.................................................145General Information..........................................145

Load Limit........................................................145Vehicle Loading - with and without a

Trailer..................................................................145

Locking and Unlocking.................................52Auto Lock Feature................................................53Auto Unlock Feature...........................................54Emergency Locking With the Key..................54Locking and Unlocking the Doors From

Inside....................................................................52Locking and Unlocking the Doors With the

Key.........................................................................52Remote Control.....................................................52Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead

Transmitter........................................................53Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys

................................................................................53Unlocking the Doors With the Interior Door

Handles...............................................................53Locks...................................................................52Luggage Covers.............................................153

Removing the Cover...........................................153Lug Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................230

MMaintenance...................................................177

General Information...........................................177Manual Climate Control..............................98Manual Liftgate...............................................55

Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................55Manual Seats.................................................107

Adjusting the Height of the DriverSeat....................................................................108

Adjusting the Lumbar Support.....................108Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward.............................................................107Recline Adjustment...........................................108

Manual Transmission - 1.6LEcoBoost™...................................................127Parking Your Vehicle..........................................128Recommended Shift Speeds.........................127Reverse...................................................................128Using the Clutch..................................................127

Manual Transmission..................................126Parking Your Vehicle...........................................127Recommended Shift Speeds.........................126Reverse...................................................................126Using the Clutch..................................................126

Message CenterSee: Information Displays.................................85

391


Index

MirrorsSee: Heated Windows and Mirrors..............103See: Windows and Mirrors.................................72

Mobile CommunicationsEquipment......................................................10

Moonroof...........................................................76Moonroof Sliding Shade....................................76Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............76Venting the Moonroof.........................................76

Motorcraft Parts...........................................236MyFord Touch™...........................................295

General Information.........................................295MyKey Troubleshooting...............................50MyKey™............................................................48

Principle of Operation........................................48

NNavigation......................................................346

cityseekr................................................................348Map Mode..............................................................351Navigation Map Updates................................353Navigation Voice Commands.......................353Point of Interest (POI) Categories..............348Quick-touch Buttons........................................352Setting a Destination.......................................346Setting Your Navigation Preferences.........349

OOil Check

See: Engine Oil Check.......................................182Opening and Closing the Hood................177

Closing the Hood................................................178Opening the Hood...............................................177

Ordering Additional Owner'sLiterature......................................................164Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........164

PParking Aid......................................................138

Rear Sensing System........................................139Parking Aids....................................................138

Principle of Operation.......................................138

Parking Brake.................................................134All Vehicles............................................................135Vehicles With Automatic

Transmission...................................................134Vehicles With Manual Transmission...........134

Passive Anti-Theft System........................60SecuriLock®..........................................................60

PATSSee: Passive Anti-Theft System....................60

Perchlorate.........................................................12Personalized Settings..................................89

Measure Units.......................................................89Switching Chimes Off........................................89

Personal Safety System™..........................33How Does the Personal Safety System

Work?...................................................................33Phone................................................................331

Making Calls.........................................................333Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................332Pairing Your Phone for the First Time.........332Phone Menu Options.......................................333Phone Settings...................................................335Phone Voice Commands................................336Receiving Calls....................................................333Text Messaging...................................................334

Power Door LocksSee: Locking and Unlocking.............................52

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................185Power Windows..............................................72

Accessory Delay....................................................73Bounce-Back..........................................................72One-Touch Down.................................................72One-Touch Up.......................................................72Window Lock..........................................................72

RRear Seats......................................................108

Folding the Seatback.......................................108Unfolding the Seatback...................................109

Rear Under Floor Storage..........................152Adjustable Load Floor.......................................152

Rear View Camera.......................................139Switching the Rear View Camera Off..........141Switching the Rear View Camera On.........140Using the Display................................................140Vehicles with Parking Aid.................................141

392


Index

Rear View CameraSee: Rear View Camera....................................139

Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........66Intermittent Wipe................................................66Rear Window Washer.........................................66Reverse Gear Wipe..............................................66

Refueling..........................................................120Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.................121

Remote Control..............................................43Car Finder................................................................47Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................43Intelligent Access Transmitter........................44Replacing the Battery.........................................44Reprogramming the Unlocking

Function..............................................................44Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................47

Removing a Headlamp..............................189Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............206Replacement Parts

Recommendation.........................................9Collision Repairs......................................................9Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs...................................................................9Warranty on Replacement Parts....................10

Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl.............................................................47

Reporting Safety Defects (CanadaOnly)...............................................................165

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.Only)..............................................................164

Roadside Assistance..................................166Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting Roadside

Assistance........................................................166Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using Roadside

Assistance........................................................166Vehicles Sold In The U.S.: Getting Roadside

Assistance........................................................166Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : Using Roadside

Assistance........................................................166Roadside Emergencies..............................166Running-In

See: Breaking-In...................................................157Running Out of Fuel.....................................119

Refilling With a Portable FuelContainer..........................................................120

SSafety Belt Height Adjustment.................29Safety Belt Minder.........................................30

Belt-Minder®.........................................................30Safety Belts......................................................26

Principle of Operation........................................26Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime..............................................................30Conditions of operation.....................................30

Safety Precautions.......................................118Scheduled Maintenance............................371

Engine Coolant Change Record...................384Exceptions............................................................383General Maintenance Information...............371Normal Scheduled Maintenance.................374Special Operating Conditions.......................379

Seats.................................................................105Security.............................................................60Settings...........................................................303

Clock.......................................................................303Display...................................................................304Settings.................................................................305Sound....................................................................304Vehicle...................................................................305

Side Airbags.....................................................38Side Curtain Airbags.....................................39Sitting in the Correct Position..................105Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains.................................226Special Notices................................................12

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12Special Instructions..............................................12

Speed ControlSee: Cruise Control.............................................142

Stability Control............................................136Principle of Operation.......................................136

Starter SwitchSee: Ignition Switch............................................113

Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................115Cold or Hot Engine..............................................115Engine Idle Speed after Starting....................116Failure to Start......................................................116Flooded Engine.....................................................116

Starting and Stopping the Engine...........113General Information...........................................113

Steering............................................................144Electric Power Steering....................................144

393


Index

Steering Wheel...............................................63Storage Compartments..............................112Sunroof

See: Moonroof.......................................................76Supplementary Restraints System.........34

Principle of Operation........................................34Switching Off the Engine............................116

Vehicles With a Turbocharger.........................116Symbols Glossary.............................................7SYNC™ Applications and Services.......274

911 Assist................................................................274SYNC AppLink....................................................280SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &

Information (TDI)..........................................277Vehicle Health Report......................................276

SYNC™............................................................259General Information.........................................259

SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................289

TTailgate

See: Manual Liftgate...........................................55Technical Specifications - 1.0L

EcoBoost™................................................200Capacities............................................................200Specifications.....................................................200

Technical Specifications - 1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)..............202Capacities.............................................................202Specifications.....................................................203

Technical Specifications - 1.6LEcoBoost™..................................................201Capacities..............................................................201Specifications......................................................201

Technical SpecificationsSee: Capacities and Specifications............235

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) AutoLine Program (U.S. Only)........................162

Tire Care............................................................211Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................213Information About Uniform Tire Quality

Grading................................................................211Information Contained on the Tire

Sidewall.............................................................214Temperature A B C.............................................212Traction AA A B C................................................212Treadwear..............................................................212

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........226Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System........................................227Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System .......................................227Tires

See: Wheels and Tires........................................211Towing a Trailer - 1.6L EcoBoost™........154Towing the Vehicle on Four

Wheels...........................................................154Emergency Towing.............................................154Recreational Towing..........................................155

Towing..............................................................154Transmission Code Designation............238Transmission..................................................126Transmission

See: Transmission..............................................126Transporting the Vehicle............................154Trip Computer.................................................88

....................................................................................88

UUnder Hood Overview - 1.0L

EcoBoost™..................................................179Under Hood Overview - 1.6L Duratec-16V

Ti-VCT (88kW/120PS) - Sigma..........180Under Hood Overview - 1.6L

EcoBoost™...................................................181Using Cruise Control....................................142

Switching Cruise Control Off..........................143Switching Cruise Control On..........................142

Using MyKey With Remote StartSystems..........................................................50

Using Snow Chains.....................................226Using Stability Control - 1.6L

EcoBoost™...................................................137Switching Sport Mode On................................137Switching the System Off................................137

Using Stability Control................................137....................................................................................137

394


Index

Using SYNC™ With Your MediaPlayer.............................................................281Accessing Your Play Menu.............................285Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the

USB Port...........................................................281Media Menu Features......................................283Media Voice Commands..................................281System Settings.................................................287What's Playing?..................................................281

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............263Accessing Features through the Phone

Menu..................................................................267Accessing Your Phone Settings....................270Making Calls........................................................266Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............264Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................264Phone Options during an Active Call.........266Phone Voice Commands................................264Receiving Calls...................................................266System Settings...................................................271Text Messaging...................................................269

Using Voice Recognition............................261Initiating a Voice Session.................................261System Interaction and Feedback..............262

Using Winter Tires.......................................226Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only).........................162

VVehicle Care..................................................204Vehicle Certification Label........................237Vehicle Identification Number................237Vehicle Storage............................................208

Battery...................................................................209Body.......................................................................209Brakes....................................................................209Cooling system...................................................209Engine....................................................................209Fuel system.........................................................209General..................................................................208Miscellaneous.....................................................209Removing Vehicle From Storage.................209Tires........................................................................209

VentilationSee: Climate Control...........................................97

VentsSee: Air Vents.........................................................97

VINSee: Vehicle Identification Number.............237

Voice Control...................................................64

WWarning Lamps and Indicators - 1.6L

EcoBoost™....................................................81Anti-lock Braking System Warning

Lamp.....................................................................81Brake System Warning Lamp...........................81Cruise Control Indicator......................................81Direction Indicator................................................82Door Ajar Warning Lamp...................................82Engine Coolant Temperature Warning

Lamp....................................................................82Engine Oil Warning Lamp.................................82Engine Warning Lamps......................................82Front Airbag Warning Lamp.............................83Front Fog Lamps Indicator...............................83Headlamp Indicator............................................83High Beam Indicator...........................................83Ignition Warning Lamp.......................................83Information Indicator..........................................83Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp........................83Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................83Safety Belt Minder Warning Lamp................83Service Engine Soon...........................................83Shift Indicator........................................................84

395


Index

Warning Lamps and Indicators.................78Anti-lock Braking System Warning

Lamp....................................................................78Brake System Warning Lamp..........................78Cruise Control Indicator.....................................78Direction Indicator................................................79Door Ajar Warning Lamp...................................79Engine Coolant Temperature Warning

Lamp....................................................................79Engine Oil Warning Lamp..................................79Engine Warning Lamps......................................79Front Airbag Warning Lamp............................80Front Fog Lamps Indicator...............................80Headlamp Indicator............................................80High Beam Indicator...........................................80Ignition Warning Lamp......................................80Information Indicator.........................................80Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp.......................80Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................80Safety Belt Minder Warning Lamp................80Service Engine Soon...........................................80Shift Indicator.........................................................81Stability Control Indicator..................................81

Washer Fluid Check.....................................186Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................204See: Wipers and Washers.................................65

Waxing.............................................................205Wheel Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................230Wheels and Tires...........................................211

General Information............................................211Technical Specifications.................................234

Windows and Mirrors....................................72Windshield Washers.....................................65Windshield Wipers........................................65

Intermittent Wipe................................................65Speed Dependent Wipers................................65

Winter TiresSee: Using Winter Tires...................................226

Wipers and Washers.....................................65

396


Index

2014 FIESTA Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

Documents